Mervyn Peake, Letters from a Lost Uncle (from Polar Regions) (1948)

Mervyn and Maeve in 1939

The art of Maeve Gilmore and Mervyn Peake, married writer-artists who moved from house to house many times in the course of their lives together, had a tendency to burst out of formal spaces (studio, gallery, the narrow confines of the sketchbook or the written page) and swarm over the domestic spaces they shared. Both revelled in painting the walls of their homes, Mervyn transforming damp patches in his warehouse apartment in Battersea into ‘faces and landscapes […] so that what should have been detrimental [became] a world of angels and monsters’,[1] then decorating the doors of their flat in Maida Vale with ‘vines, flowers and birds’,[2] while Maeve painted dynamic murals all over their Chelsea house from attic to basement. Real-life spaces, too, invaded their art. The island where they lived for four happy years – Sark in the Channel Islands – peeps out through the prose in Mervyn’s second novel Gormenghast (1950), whose titular castle shares with it the names of certain topographical features. Maeve’s novel Titus Awakes (2011) ends with the fictional protagonist making a home on Sark with the real-life Peakes. Maeve’s murals come to life in her illustrated children’s book, Captain Eustace and the Magic Room (1981), which combines knitted dolls, rhymes, and photographs of her wall paintings to create a narrative that bridges the gap between an ordinary house and the wilderness of dreams. Maeve herself became the subject of Mervyn’s poems, drawings and paintings, while Mervyn became the subject of Maeve’s celebrated memoir, A World Away (1970), as well as of her novel and many of her pictures. Their imaginative world could not be segregated from the material world through which they moved, whose details they took in with all their senses, transmuted in their minds, and revitalised in strange new colours, shapes and sounds.

Nowhere in Mervyn’s work is the intimate link between his imaginative world and the material realities mediated by his senses more vividly realised than in his picture book Letters from a Lost Uncle (from Polar Regions) (1948). The book tells the story of a robust old man who wanders the wild regions of the world, far from human habitation, in quest of a mysterious White Lion known only as the ‘Emperor of the Snows’.[3] He carries with him a typewriter (which he uses to type his letters), a ‘good fat book’ full of blank paper for typing, pencils (with which he draws the creatures and adventures he encounters) and a camera (with which he hopes to photograph the Lion when he finds it). He is accompanied only by his ‘retainer’ (p. [8]), a ‘turtle dog’ called Jackson, who often annoys him. It’s a simple premise, and some have found it over-simple. The Peake scholar Peter Winnington, for instance, suggests that ‘the storyline is weak and fizzles out when the uncle encounters the White Lion, although the final picture, with its mandala in the sky, suggests a sense of wholeness that the text belies’.[4] But for me, the book represents the ultimate fusion of word and image in Mervyn’s oeuvre, whose power is largely derived from its unusual form. The crudely typed pages peppered with mistakes; the energetic and prolific pencil sketches; the smudges and smears on the surface of the paper where Jackson has trodden on it, or spilled gravy on it, or the Uncle has bled on it after cutting his finger; all these details generate the sense of ghostly presences at the edges of the reader’s perception, beings alive and commanding our attention despite the distances of space and time that separate us. The effect is, I imagine, a little like spending time in one of Maeve and Mervyn’s flats or houses, where the murals on the walls invoked a wild world beyond their confines whose shapes were always intruding on the house’s occupants at the edge of vision, ghostly manifestations of an imaginative life as vivid as the papers, pencils, tables, brushes, found objects and books that littered their rooms.

Dustjacket of first edition, front

The most striking aspect of the book’s form is its physical presentation as a collection of letters. Each letter is inexpertly typed with occasional corrections or interjections by hand, illustrated with pencil sketches, and slightly damaged in various ways by the two central characters – the Uncle and Jackson – who share their cramped quarters together, with all the potential for accidents this entails. The dustcover of the first edition takes the form of a hefty envelope with a red wax seal sticking down the flap at the back and a stamp showing the Lion affixed to the front; the stamp itself has been stamped with two postmarks shaped like snowshoes. The letters inside amount to a single continuous letter, with each new section labelled ‘2nd Letter’, ‘THIRD LETTER’, ‘4TH LETTER’ and so on, and distinguished from one another, often in parentheses, by allusions to the passage of time: ‘(Continued next day)’, ‘(weeks later’), ‘six days later’ etc. The effect of this form is to encourage the reader to relive the Uncle’s adventures as they are supposed to have happened, and to reinforce the sense of unplanned or semi-planned spontaneity which is implicit in the terms ‘adventure’, ‘discover’ and ‘explore’. The form is further rendered integral to the narrative by the fact that the stamp on the dustcover represents the object of the Uncle’s travels, the great White Lion; in the first edition the reader was thereby encouraged to turn back to the dustcover for reference whenever the stamp was mentioned in the text. Holding the first edition, then, must have felt like holding the Uncle’s collection of letters itself, as against a printed version of them. The book would have had an aura to it, as if you could detect the fingers of the Uncle laboriously marking the very same pages you were turning over as you read. The book is a missive from outside the familiar universe, but it is also a piece of documentary evidence, like the travelworn diary of Captain Scott recovered from his tent. Polar winds seem to blow from its pages, which serve as an opening onto the beyond. You might be reminded of Mervyn’s preface to the book of his drawings published by Grey Walls Press the following year, which describes the drawing process as a daring expedition into uncharted territory:

The voice of a pencil. […] The voice of ink, of chalk, of pigment or stone. What are they, these varying voices that, soundless, can be like tumult or as faint as a whisper in the next room?

From the brain in the eye and the eye in the brain they make their way, these accents, through the arm and fingers to a canvas like a field of untrodden snow, to a cold chaos of stone, to the square yawn of a paper page as empty of life as the manless moon. These, the imponderable platforms: the breathless theatres.[5]

The form of Letters from a Lost Uncle makes of it a breathless theatre, a ‘paper stage’ as he calls it a few lines later in the same preface. It performs its narrative on the manless moon of the empty page, which is invoked by the vast fields of untrodden snow through which the Uncle tramps. From it, the voice of the pencil – and of the typewriter, the ‘tap-tap-tapping [of] a little black machine’ which generates the Uncle’s words as the pencil generates his pictures (p. [3]) – issues like a call to action or a summons to the strange denizens of your seeing brain.

Dustjacket of first edition, rear

Uncharted territory is where Maeve and Mervyn lived and worked. They inhabited a world that was self-evidently falling apart like a melting ice field, opening up a new range of uncertainties and possibilities unsuspected by previous generations. The British Empire into which they were born – Mervyn in China, Maeve in London – had begun to dissolve, with Ireland the first of its colonies to shake off the cold colonial bonds (Maeve’s father was Irish), closely followed by a succession of independence movements (Burma, Egypt, India) which sometimes took the Irish struggle for liberation as inspiration.[6] The Second World War brought bombs to the streets of London and other British cities, altering them beyond recognition, as Mervyn’s ballad The Rhyme of the Flying Bomb (c. 1947) acknowledged and perversely celebrated. The waves of migration unleashed by war and new national boundaries transformed the world’s populations. Troops who served overseas returned with a new consciousness of alternative ways of living, while continued rationing and the reorganization of British society through unprecedented initiatives like the National Health Service seemed to signal a radical break with the imperial past. Between them, the Great War and World War Two bracketed a rupture from the familiar narrative of British history, a rent that almost severed it in two, before and after, ancient and modern. This giant rupture found a parallel in the many small ruptures experienced by Maeve and Mervyn as they moved from house to house, driven by economic necessity, conscription, Mervyn’s mental illness of 1942, and the endless quest for an artistic space in which to hone their craft.

This last, most quixotic of quests is what took them to Sark in 1946. It was a move that cut them off from Britain in a final, heroic gesture at self-determination, a gesture that came to an end when economic necessity took them back to London again at the end of the decade. Their period on Sark proved to be perhaps the most creative of their lives; at least, it was intensely creative for Mervyn, while Maeve completed some of her finest paintings there, and the island continued to haunt her work for the rest of her life. Marooning themselves from the crumbling world of the 1940s perfectly suited a couple who spent so much of their imaginative time practising an art focused on the domestic: from the titanic castle where Mervyn’s most famous alter ego grows up – Titus Groan, protagonist of the Gormenghast books – to the open windows and almost empty rooms that feature in Maeve’s paintings of the period, exposed to the winds of an island surrounded by dizzying cliffs. Adrift in the ocean between England and France they could concentrate on the haunted inner spaces and strange bodily and architectural surfaces that obsessed them, exploring their imaginative relationships with each other, their children, and the diverse coterie of friends and fascinating strangers – real and imagined – they had gathered outside the family circle.

Maeve Gilmore, Sark Interior

The Lost Uncle is an explorer, a word that conjures up the epic travels of the adventurers who helped to forge the image of the British Empire: men like James Cook, David Livingston, Burton and Speke, Burke and Wills or Captain Scott, whose stories featured in the boy’s magazines read by Mervyn in his childhood. Many of these explorers ended their lives lost and wandering in an alien landscape, their links to the Empire severed by distance, their isolation sometimes intensified by their refusal to learn from indigenous populations. After their deaths they were hailed as heroes, their tragic ends held up as models for active young men being trained in the service of imperialism. Mervyn’s Lost Uncle shares their isolation and their sometimes gimcrack heroism – he is always improvising hairs’-breadth escapes from unforeseen dangers – but the Empire from which he has severed himself seems to have splintered into fragments, like the ice floe ‘the size of Kent’ on which he finds himself stranded at the start of the narrative [p. [7]), a symbolic representation of the slow disintegration of the island of Great Britain along with its colonial acquisitions. He hopes his account of his travels will find its way to the Natural History Museum in Kensington, but has no idea if the building still exists. The ship on which he sails at one point is called the S S Em, which he thinks may be short for Empire or maybe Emu (p. [31]), the syllable ‘Em’ invoking both a lost imperial power and a funny-looking bird from one of its colonies, as if the former may have mutated into the latter. The stamp he uses to send his letters displays not the head of the British Emperor at the time of writing, George VI, but the leonine ‘Emperor of the Snows’, the stamp itself having been manufactured by ‘Esquimaux’ rather than the Royal Mail (p. [22]).[7] The rapidly-drifting ice floe, and the general absence of placenames in the Uncle’s narrative (apart from the section set in London), suggest that the map of the world is in constant flux, no longer fixed to the walls of schoolrooms with the British territories clearly marked in red, but instead sketched hastily in erasable pencil on fragile paper as places and beasts appear and vanish before the sketcher’s eyes.

Even climatic zones have become confused in the Uncle’s world. In the Polar Regions of the title, polar vultures, polar snakes and polar beetles cohabit with polar bears, narwhals and ‘sea elephants’ (i.e. elephant seals), so that the jungles he explored in his early years somehow overlap with the icy lands to which he has dedicated himself in his maturity. The icy waste where he finally finds the great White Lion has both northern polar bears and southern penguins in it, as well as antelopes and ‘snow serpents’. If the Uncle’s pages are a mess, with their errata, smudges and spillages, the world he inhabits shares in this messiness, no longer organised around national borders, trade routes and zoological categories, but spontaneously reshaping itself from moment to moment, at the whim of the words and pencils with which it is described.

The Uncle’s adriftness extends to his home life as well as his severance from nations and empires. The ‘4th Letter’ tells his back story, describing how he found himself alienated from his relatives pretty much from birth. He ran away from home as a week-old baby (just like Peter Pan),[8] and was afterwards forcibly ‘strapped […] down in a cradle’ until ‘I was old enough to go to school’ (p. [25]); this is the closest he comes in his narrative to mentioning his parents, who feature only as an implicit part of the collective ‘they’ who seek to coerce him into compliance from an early age. The rest of his youth is spent in an equally traumatic state of forced detention. On his first day at boarding school he drinks so much ink that he is confined to bed once more until he is old enough to leave, and on returning home he runs away for a second time, comes home again because he is hungry, eats his way through the larder, and promptly falls ill ‘until I was twenty-two, when I married’ (p. [26]) (we never learn how he managed to meet his wife while bedbound). Later he runs away again, this time from his marriage, infuriating his wife and her many siblings. Even his relationship with the nephew to whom he writes his letters begins on a shaky footing: ‘I didn’t like you much at first,’ he explains in the 4th Letter (p. [38]), despite never having met him. The 4th Letter, in fact, represents the Uncle as a lifelong Robinson Crusoe, marooned in his youth among the teeming masses of London, just as he is later self-marooned among the waves of an endless ocean, or the equatorial jungles, or the featureless polar snows.

Perhaps this is because his home life and his native city share in the topographical confusion of the world beyond, so that the Uncle considers himself an explorer in the wilderness of his own back yard. He transforms his London house into an urban jungle by bringing home a range of live specimens (‘different kinds of insects, mushrooms and rats’, p. [28]) and storing them in the lounge. He carves the leg of his wife’s favourite armchair into a pipe, which he then takes with him on his travels. As his wife grows increasingly hostile to him – quite reasonably so in view of his habits – he takes to living on the streets, sleeping on a bench in Cannon Street Station and passing his days in the Natural History Museum (with its eccentric collection of stuffed creatures from all regions and all periods), or sketching the statues of lions in Trafalgar Square. In doing so, he underlines his conviction that central London is a jungle, a belief he shares with his creator Mervyn, who went ‘headhunting’ – sketching the heads of random strangers – on the London Tube and in its streets and squares throughout his life. Even when the Uncle decides to abandon the S S Em and sets out on his travels by himself, he constructs an improvised raft made of an upturned table with a wooden chair strapped to it, wrapping himself for warmth in a homely eiderdown which he later stuffs with orchid stalks to use as tobacco. By building his table raft he signals the continuity between domestic space and the nonhuman wild spaces from which it springs and on which it ultimately depends. The raft also affirms Mervyn’s instinctive belief that in the context of post-war Britain, a house where such a table, chair and eiderdown might be found could be readily thought of as unmoored, engaged in a state of constant motion through strange waters.

Despite his tendency to run away from institutions of Empire – nurseries, schools, cities, museums, houses, marriage – the Lost Uncle takes with him on his travels many elements of colonialist masculinity. His unflattering drawings and descriptions of his pointedly nameless wife (e.g. ‘the end of her nose grew as cold as ice, and her ears burned like beetroots’, p. [29]) imply a misogyny that would have been very familiar to the imperialist boy heroes of the nineteenth century. His bowler hat, which he never takes off, aligns him with the bourgeois denizens of the City of London, the bankers and brokers who are compared to ‘Vampires’ in a poem Mervyn wrote around the same time as Lost Uncle.[9] As if to underscore his continued commitment to his imperialist roots, the Uncle blithely ignores the presence of indigenous people in the lands he explores. The ‘esquimaux’ of the Arctic are only hinted at by the existence of their stamp, while he only ever encounters one inhabitant of the equatorial jungles, a ‘pigmy’ who is chased up a tree by a crocodile (p. [60]), and who is of interest to him solely because he lets fall, as he climbs, a letter with the lion stamp fixed to the envelope. Local people in other places get subsumed into the landscape, becoming a peripheral presence in what he calls the ‘coloured ports’ and ‘black harbours’ (p. [32]). At the same time, the Uncle repeatedly appropriates the tools of indigenous people, from kayaks, igloos and harpoons to birchbark canoes, dugouts, coracles and wigwams or tepees. The same colonial attitude that designed and filled the great museums of London – the Victoria and Albert, the Science Museum, the Natural History Museum, and the nearby British Museum – manifests itself both in the Uncle’s appearance and in his methods of exploration.

Chief among these methods, of course, is his exploitation of the turtle dog, Jackson. Jackson is the Jim to the Lost Uncle’s superannuated Huckleberry Finn, an embodiment of the unease experienced by many white writers in representing people of colour at a time when British and other colonialisms were being dismantled all over the world. The Uncle describes his first meeting with Jackson soon after he has written about the only Black character in the book, the ‘negro’ with whom he shares his cabin on the S S Em (p. [29]). This man never gets named, and we only ever encounter him in his sleep, when the Uncle decides not to wake him and tell him of his plan to leave the ship on a raft. The Uncle therefore sets out on his raft alone, unlike Huck Finn, and is at first supremely happy in his solitude. But as a son of Empire, however keen to disengage himself from the Empire’s conventional citizens as embodied in his wife and family, the Uncle cannot finally imagine embarking on a voyage of discovery without a convenient indigenous servant by his side. He finds one on a beach of red sand ‘littered’ with what he calls turtle dogs, a term that combines the traits of a faithful animal companion – a dog, which has so often been recruited to pull explorers’ sledges – and a water-dwelling reptile, whose shell suggests both the ability to take your home with you wherever you go and the impenetrable obduracy of its wearer. When he first sees Jackson, the Uncle at once decides he will ‘be useful […] as a beast of burden – and possibly as a friend’ (p. [36]), identifying him as both human and nonhuman in a manner that has proved convenient for enslavers and exploitative employers since the beginning of time. The enslaver analogy is reinforced by the Uncle’s claim that Jackson was lazy when he first met him (‘as you can see [from the picture] there was not much life in J’) and that he had to be coerced into servitude (he ‘didn’t want to come with me at first’). Despite this, the Uncle claims elsewhere that Jackson is happy to be exploited: ‘he has always been quite willing to help,’ he tells his nephew, ‘although I have never seen him smile’ (p. [48]). ‘Also’, he adds, ‘he does not mind me hammering nails into his back to hang things on’; the use of ‘back’ here for ‘shell’ underscores the parallel with the abusive practices of slavers. So too does this sentence from the first letter: ‘I wouldn’t swap him for six tins of condensed milk or a jug of hot rum’ (p. [8]). At this stage, the Uncle talks about Jackson as a useful object, like the ‘things’ the turtle dog carries on his nail-studded shell – though the use of the pronoun ‘him’, and the statement that the Uncle wouldn’t swap him, reassert Jackson’s incipient humanity.

The Uncle’s ‘retainer’ starts out as a figure of fun, whose function is to act as a foil to the irascible Uncle. Jackson’s head is always wrapped in a tattered kerchief, as if he suffers from a permanent cold; this makes him look like a housewife from illustrations of the 1940s, who kept her hair wrapped in a headscarf to protect it from dust. He seems unable to comprehend the simplest instructions until they have been repeated multiple times. His clumsiness leaves traces all over the Uncle’s pages in the form of spillages and footprints, and he seems to be voiceless, like a silent movie comic; as the Uncle puts it, he ‘has no conversation’ (p. [8]), which suggests he could speak if he wished but chooses not to. He can be funny because he is an imaginary creature, a hybrid being located somewhere between a sea- or land-dwelling animal and a person; his kind does not exist, which makes his exploitation by the Uncle somehow bearable. He can be funny too, perhaps, because he never complains about his treatment, though Mervyn makes it perfectly clear how unpleasant this treatment is. Even when Jackson develops a ‘beastly cough’ the Uncle has no sympathy for him at all, commenting tersely ‘Am very irritated’ (p. [57]); the word ‘beastly’ suggests that at this point the Uncle thinks of him more as a ‘beast of burden’ than a ‘friend’, while at other times the ‘friend’ aspect comes to the fore, as when the Uncle names a waterfall after him (though afterwards, the Uncle writes, ‘I wished I hadn’t’, p. [43]). Located at an uncertain point on the spectrum between humanity and animalism, beaked and shelled but possessing human-like arms and legs, Jackson avoids being wholly aligned with the enslaved people, exploited workers or abused women which his treatment conjures up, but unsettlingly invokes all three.

There is, however, something mysterious about Jackson; a quality that links him to the many strange animals he and the Uncle encounter in their wanderings. The Uncle never tells us anything about the culture Jackson came from, as embodied in the beach of red sand ‘with turtle dogs littered all over it’ where he finds him (p. [36]); the term ‘litter’ here summarises the explorer’s attitude to that culture, if he thinks of it at all. Jackson drifts into the narrative, in fact, out of the same hidden world that spawns the other beasts in Mervyn’s book. We learn nothing about the White Lion on the stamp, for instance, apart from his title, the ‘Emperor of the Snows’. We learn nothing about the ‘swarms of fishes’ that lift their ‘moonlit heads’ from the sea when the Uncle sings to express his happiness as he sails away from the S S Em on his table raft (p. [35]) (what draws them to him? We never learn). Or the swarms of little wailing creatures that suddenly appear on a particularly desolate tract of snow, ‘pouring themselves over the hills and wringing their hands as they ran’ (p. [59]); they disappear as suddenly as they came, leaving the Uncle with only the sense that ‘they were fleeing from the scene of some Arctic tragedy’. The snow-serpent that attacks the Uncle, forcing him to use his ‘swordfish’ leg to defend himself; the Polar beetle; the flock of Arctic vultures that assail the Uncle and Jackson from the air, ‘huge birds with bodies as big as dogs’’ and beaks ‘like scissors’ (p. [65]); what version of the Arctic do these creatures inhabit? The Uncle can never have seen them in the Natural History Museum; no wonder he thinks it may have vanished. Jackson shares his nature with these beings, all the more so because he is voiceless and has no back story. He cannot be categorised or fitted into any of the neat Linnaean lists beloved of imperial scientists; he is at home in some of the regions where the Uncle is only an interloper. Every now and then, too, his behaviour hints at a secret agenda inaccessible to his master/companion. When the Uncle’s life is in danger he catches Jackson apparently ‘smiling behind his hand’ (p. [106]), but concludes that this is impossible because the turtle dog has ‘never used any expressions before’ – except once, again at a time when the Uncle’s life was in danger, ‘but that was his nervousness’, the Uncle thinks, ‘or else colic’. Jackson and the other beings of the wild occupy an unseen, unspoken space to which the Uncle only has limited access.

At the same time, the Uncle himself seems to be gradually mutating into one of these beings of the wild. He has a missing leg, which has been replaced with what he insists is the spike of a swordfish but is clearly a narwhal tusk, with its distinctive corkscrew spiral. This leg makes him literally part animal, and it’s the part of his body that proves most useful in protecting him against the dangers of the wilderness. In the course of the book we see it being used to skewer a hungry wolf, to pin a snow-serpent to a tree, to fend off vultures, to stop Jackson and the Uncle from sliding off an icy cliff by being employed as an impromptu ice axe, and to anchor them both to the ice when a tornado threatens to blow them away. The Uncle’s leg-spike, in other words, helps him adapt to the environments he moves through, serving as a twisted bridge between his humanity and the wilderness he has always been drawn to. The fact that he is drawn to the wild and its animals is confirmed by the many drawings he makes of them (is there a pun intended? Mervyn loved puns), from a knotted-tail moose (another nonexistent creature) to a cheese-loving shark, from apes, crocodiles and cockatoos to penguins, gulls, polar vultures, puffins and a white crow. His intention in tracking down the great White Lion is not to shoot him, as colonial big game hunters would have done, but to take a picture of him with his box camera, paying homage to his life without depriving him of it; despite his love of museums, he will bring no body home to be stuffed and mounted in a glass case. But the loss of the camera in a snowstorm forces the Uncle instead to make yet more drawings of the Lion when he finds him, a much more bodily form of record-keeping than photography. The artist’s stare that lies behind each sketch – a total commitment to studying the distinctive shape and selfhood of the object at which the artist stares, as Mervyn explains in his little pamphlet on The Craft of the Lead Pencil (1946)[10] – involves a surrender of the self, an immersion in the other, which seems very far from an imperialist attitude. The Uncle is, like Mervyn himself, an itinerant and eccentric artist, and this sets him apart from the Empire far more effectively than his vocation as an explorer.

The Uncle’s relationship with Jackson, too, gradually grows to resemble something like companionship as the story unfolds. The Uncle’s abuse of him, after all, is part of his general irascibility, which he expresses in the language of pirates or whalers. He is constantly using piratical phrases (‘Blubber take this thumb mark’, ‘Hags blubber’, ‘O blubber it’, Oh blubberation’) which fuse his own oversized body with the many targets of his wrath, and he himself is as often the object of his disgust as Jackson is (‘Pickle my blubber!’, he remarks repeatedly, as well as ‘Oh blubber him!’). The Uncle also shares with Jackson a tendency to clumsiness: he stains his own letters with thumb prints, blood from a cut finger and washing up water, as often as Jackson spills soup or coffee over it. If Jackson is feminised by his headscarf, the Uncle feminises himself – in his own opinion – by using a typewriter (‘Pickle my blubber! But it makes me feel like a woman, writing this letter to England’, p. [4]), as well as by his housekeeping and his role as Jackson’s carer. If Jackson does not share the Uncle’s investment in the Arctic Sublime, the Uncle does not share Jackson’s fears or understand his emotions – at least at first. Both are separated from the cultures that reared them, both are isolated in the Polar wastes, both subsist on the same food and share the same rough quarters. The Uncle even has a kind of shell in the form of the eiderdown stuffed full of orchid stalks which he carries with him at all times; and at one point Jackson hides under the eiderdown without the Uncle even noticing. The pair have more in common than the Uncle cares to admit.

As the book goes on, too, the Uncle begins to refer to himself and Jackson as an inseparable unit. In the first half of the book, the Uncle speaks of himself always in the singular, as if all his travels were solitary ones (an Arctic wolf ‘sprang at me’, p. [15], ‘I came to […] a forest of trees that had been frozen into skeletons’, p. [18], ‘the beasts I met with on the way’, p. [20], ‘I’m approaching his dominion’, p. [54]). Jackson is thrust to the margins as if he were no more than a piece of the luggage he carries. Increasingly, though, the Uncle speaks of the pair as ‘us’ and ‘we’, a change that begins in the long twelfth letter which describes the first part of their final approach to the Lion’s lair. On this last stage of his quest the Uncle tends to Jackson’s wounds, shares his burdens, and saves his life on one occasion by pinning him to the ice with his leg-spike moments before the turtle dog slides into a crevasse. On another occasion Jackson must rotate the Uncle’s body, holding onto his sound leg, in order to screw him into the ice and save them both from the devastating force of the tornado; at this point it is the Uncle who serves as an object, the turtle dog who has agency. The Uncle continues to be enraged by Jackson’s obtuseness, but he also shows some sympathy for his feelings; for instance, when the turtle dog is terrified by seeing living fish under the ice beneath their feet the Uncle carries him ‘for quite a long time […] with all our belongings nailed to his back’ (p. [103]). At the climax of their journey, the Uncle and Jackson finally share the same emotions as they scale a snow-covered hill which turns out to be the Lion’s sleeping body: ‘When we reached the top we stared around us, and still could see no reason for the excitement which both of us felt more than ever’ (p. [107], my emphasis). In their isolation from the rest of humankind there’s a growing sense of mutual interdependence about them, which the Uncle can only ever express in action, saving Jackson’s life, binding his wounds, building shelters for them both and cooking their meals while continuing to shower the unfortunate turtle dog with insults.

Their severance from humankind, after all, is also a severance from its dominant narratives, including the narratives that govern hierarchy. The Uncle’s seeming commitment to science, for instance, which manifested itself in his youthful collection of live specimens and his visits to the museum, turns out to be vastly subordinate to his sense of the beautiful and the sublime; the sublime in the Burkean sense being something whose scale and causes cannot be adequately measured, understood or even communicated, the polar opposite of scientific discourse. We’ve already seen how he has become detached from the narrative of imperialism, carrying with him only broken scraps of it embedded in his body and mind. And his seeming connection to his family, through the nephew to whom he addresses his string of letters, only stresses his detachment from familial narratives. The Uncle does not seem to know or care how the nephew is related to him, or his age, or where he lives, or anything about his personality (he may be ‘very stupid’, as the Uncle points out at one point, p. [55]); so that he comes across less as a person than as a necessary manifestation of the old man’s desire to express his yearning for the Lion, a yearning which for most of his life no one else has shared. In his mind, too, the Uncle seems to model this nephew on himself, assuming or hoping that he will be more interested in strange events and wild adventures than in lounges, tables or chairs (at least, when the tables and chairs in question are firmly settled on a middle-class carpet). This invented nephew is as much a rebel against familial narratives as a product of them, and as liable to run away from their constraints as the Uncle himself.

Meanwhile, there seems to be a different narrative at work in the Uncle’s adventures, one to which the Uncle himself is forever marginal. Towards the end of his quest for the Lion one begins to sense that the real action is always happening elsewhere, out of reach of the artist’s pencil or the poet’s typewriter. This feeling starts to develop in the fifth letter, I think, as the Uncle confesses his lack of success in the quest so far. All he has found of the Lion is ‘strange rumours’, he tells us (p. [54]), but he never goes on to explain what these rumours are. He feels he is getting closer, but feelings are all he has, not evidence; he says he has discovered some ‘clues’ but never lists them (p. [63]). His travels have always been marked, in fact, by the Lion’s absence: ‘I scoured the tropics – he wasn’t there. Cancer and Capricorn had never heard of him. I scrutinized every inch of the equator and he wasn’t there, either. […] Sometimes I thought I was nearing his boundaries only to be disappointed’ (pp. [55] and [60]). He is certain, he adds, that ‘something exciting is going to happen tomorrow’ (p. [60]), but nine more days pass without incident (‘I can’t think why nothing important is happening because I am sure I am close to the White Lion’, he complains on day five, p. [63]), and when something does take place, it happens off stage. A swarm of wailing, hand-wringing creatures hurries across the snow past the Uncle and Jackson, turning the snow black with their bodies, like a sheet of paper being blackened by ink, but we never find out what is being written on the page or what ‘tragedy’ they are running from. The sea-elephants, on the other hand, seem to know all about it, since they break through the Arctic ice after the creatures’ passing and begin to ‘bellow […] as though they also knew that there was a tragedy happening somewhere which they had only just heard about’ (p. [65]). Knowledge is power, an imperialist might say, but in the latter stages of the Uncle’s narrative knowledge is always possessed by the nonhuman other.

The reference in this, the eleventh letter, to some unseen ‘tragedy’ invokes a piece of high culture, something that might have been penned by some Polar Aeschylus or Sophocles. From this point on, further works of high culture reveal themselves in the Arctic wastes, detached from the contexts that shape such artefacts in the fields we know. A sudden wind blows up, lifting the snow for miles around into a mile-high column which suddenly collapses to create a pyramid of snow, invoking some lost nonhuman civilization. Lights appear beneath an expanse of translucent ice as they are crossing it, turning the surface into a vast piece of stained glass not made by human hands (pp. [101-103]). A seeming ‘city of glass churches’ appears on the horizon (p. [100]), the biggest of which the Uncle dubs ‘the shining cathedral’ (p. [104]): monuments to an unknown religion, whose architects, priests and worshippers are not human. In this cathedral gathers a host of polar animals to witness the final act of the mysterious Emperor of the Snows; among them are representatives of all the strange species we have encountered in the book, as well as many others. These creatures know, it seems, what’s about to happen, and the Uncle and Jackson do not share this knowledge. All the same, they take their place in the congregation, finally united with the beings they have fought against and consumed throughout their journey. They are abruptly animals alongside other animals, and in this capacity the Uncle sets aside all prior narratives in favour of witnessing the Lion’s last act without speculating on its purpose, meaning, or significance to science.

The White Lion is the final work of high culture they encounter, a work that declares its independence from imperialist discourse. The Uncle’s obsession with the beast was never rooted in a colonial rationale; from the start his quest was deeply unscientific, based on the image on a stamp and his youthful delight in drawing the four lion statues in Trafalgar Square, one after the other, without noticing until the end that they were all identical. His search for the Lion has strayed with anarchic randomness from one extreme of the earth’s environment to the other, from the equator to the Pole – scarcely a Darwinian journey towards enlightenment. The beast’s whiteness may seem to make it an icon of white supremacy, but the all-encompassing whiteness of the Poles and many of their animal inhabitants ensure that whiteness in this story is not exclusive; rather it’s a sign of infinite possibility, like the whiteness of unpainted canvas or unmarked paper. The Lion’s shape recalls the various uses of the lion as an imperialist symbol, not least in the lion statues of Trafalgar Square; the Lion’s title supports this association. Lions in Mervyn’s work, however, are without exception past their prime, if they ever had one: from Headmaster Bellgrove in Gormenghast (1950), whose face resembles that of a lion with bad teeth, to the idiotic but self-satisfied lion in the play Noah’s Ark (1950s); from the enslaved lion-man in the novella Boy in Darkness (1956), who crumbles to dust as he unleashes his last roar, to the battered toy protagonist of Burgess Drake’s children’s novel The Book of Lyonne (1952), which Peake illustrated, who keeps a boy’s pyjamas in his zip-up tummy, favours ‘Demi-cratic’ principles and ‘listens to the voice of the Common People’ (p. 258) instead of imposing his will on his fellow toys.[11] The Lion in Letters from a Lost Uncle has a throne in an ice cathedral, cementing his status as King of Beasts and perhaps invoking the Lion of Judah, a figure of Christ. But he is blind (like the monstrous Lamb in Boy in Darkness) and ‘ready to die’, as the Uncle sees the moment he sets eyes on him (p. [112]). Having stalked to the ice cathedral – which is also a stage, with the animal audience arranged in tiers as if in a Greek or Roman amphitheatre – the Lion rears up, gives a final roar, and transforms itself into another work of art, a sculpture made of ice. All its cultural and religious resonances are at this stage consigned to the past, and it becomes a sublime spectacle, powerful only in its emotional and aesthetic impact on those who see it first hand after an arduous journey, such as the Uncle’s quest. Its ‘long and fabulous […] life’ (p. [117]), about which we have learned nothing, comes to an end, leaving only the fables of the Uncle’s, Jackson’s and now the reader’s imagination.

The White Lion, then, invokes a world in which old narratives have come to an end. The Uncle, too, is old, and has passed on his vision of the Lion’s death to a new generation – embodied in his nephew – to make of it what they wish. Soon afterwards the Uncle himself merges with the Arctic landscape, just as the beast did. We don’t know where he is going; we only know that he has been liberated from the quest that has driven him so far. The ‘Last Letter’ ends with him sharpening his leg-spike (now a ‘sword-spike’, like the weapon of some quixotic knight, p. [127]) and setting off into the snow to collect a wolf-skin from one of the carcasses slain in a fight between wolves and reindeer. Jackson has been ‘excited’ by the fight (p. [126]), while the Uncle regards it as nothing special after the spectacle of the Lion’s death – a direct reversal of their usual emotional reactions. But the letter’s final page shows the Uncle and Jackson side by side beneath an Arctic sky in which hangs an array of strange signs resembling waves and compass roses, a hint at further sublimity to come. The fact that we do not know what shape that sublimity will take makes of the book’s ending an opening out from the narrow bounds of Empire, and of imperial narratives of all kinds. The fact that both the Uncle and Jackson are shown on this page as tiny, insignificant figures (and the Uncle seems to be waving goodbye with his harpoon) clears a space for new protagonists – perhaps without the Uncle’s unsettling traits, though presumably with plenty of new ones of their own – to perform in the paper theatres of the future. In fact, the last few pages of Mervyn’s book repeatedly show the Uncle and Jackson side by side and dwarfed by the wonders of the North. By the end these wonders have taken centre stage, like the Lion, and their part human, part animal witnesses have dwindled to the size of the wailing and hand-wringing little creatures that swarmed over the horizon at the start of the final phase of the Uncle’s journey.

There is nothing in art or literature, I think, remotely like Letters from a Lost Uncle, but it is packed with clear allusions to other works of art and literature. Its creation through word and image of two new mythic beings, the Uncle and Jackson, invokes the work of one of Mervyn’s heroes, William Blake. There are echoes here, too, of Moby Dick (1851), whose plot is equally simple and involves a quest for a mysterious white whale: the Uncle has a missing leg, like Captain Ahab, and substitutes for it a prosthesis fashioned from a narwhal’s tusk (Ahab uses a whalebone’s jaw). William Heath Robinson’s The Adventures of Uncle Lubin (1902) involves an uncle’s quest to find his baby nephew, little Peter, who was stolen by a wicked bagbird – a quest that takes him through lands as many and various as the districts traversed by Mervyn’s adventurer; it seems possible that Heath Robinson’s uncle and nephew inspired Peake to place an Uncle and his absent nephew at the core of his narrative. And then there is J. M. Barrie’s Peter and Wendy (1911), whose protagonist is trapped like the Uncle in a perpetual cycle of irresponsible action and wild adventure. Mervyn’s Lost Uncle taps, too, into his lifelong love of pirates (his missing limb and nautical turn of phrase invoke Long John Silver or Captain Hook) and Western movies (since he is a nameless, solitary hero perpetually on the move, accompanied only by a sidekick whose principal functions are to carry his things and be rescued from danger). The high cultural aspect of the Uncle’s quest is, then, commingled with images from popular culture, so that it invokes both Don Quixote with his sidekick Sancho Panza[12] and the Lone Ranger with his sidekick Tonto,[13] both Robinson Crusoe with his indigenous companion Friday and the mendicant odd couples of cinema, such as Laurel and Hardy, or of the stage, such as Estragon and Vladimir in Waiting for Godot (1952). Several of these relationships involve the same kind of abuse as the Uncle’s with Jackson, troublingly bound together with mutual dependence and intermittent signs of real affection.

At the same time, the book is linked to the lives of the Peakes in ways that go far beyond the Uncle’s status as a migrant artist. The igloos he builds recall an igloo Mervyn built for his sons, Sebastian and Fabian, in the garden of their house on Sark, while the Uncle’s adventures recall the pictures Mervyn drew for the boys each Sunday in a series of exercise books known as ‘The Sunday Books’, full of pirates, indigenous Americans, ships and animals. The boys proposed the subjects of the pictures and Mervyn wove them into his stories; there are even some stamps among the sketches, one (perhaps) drawn for Sebastian, full of things beginning with B (a bus, a bull, a bicycle, a cricket bat, a baby), another for Fabian, as well as a lion which closely resembles the ‘lion on the stamp’ as depicted on the dustjacket of Letters from a Lost Uncle.[14] In addition, the back cover of the dustjacket bears the image of a wax seal stamped with the names ‘Sebastian, Fabian, Maeve’, as if to confirm that the contents have been sent out into the world from their island home. There’s even an in-joke in the narrative which could only have been appreciated by members of the family and some of their friends: the name of the ship on which the Uncle sails, the S. S. Em, invokes the acronym S. S. M., which stands for the School for the Sons of Missionaries – Eltham College – which Mervyn attended in his boyhood.[15] The Uncle, meanwhile, joins the parade of bizarre relatives Mervyn wrote about throughout his career, most notably the Uncles and Aunts he mentions in the poems ‘How Good It Is to Be Alone’, ‘My Uncle Paul of Pimlico’, ‘It Makes a Change’, ‘What a Day It’s Been’, ‘Uncle George’, ‘The Threads Remain’, ‘Crown Me with Hairpins’ and above all ‘Aunts and Uncles’, which contains a list of eccentric characters most of whom are transformed into animals.[16]

Letters from a Lost Uncle, then, is rooted in the moment of its creation, the immediate postwar period when the future could be said to have opened up as it opens up at the end of Mervyn’s book. It draws deeply on literary and artistic history as well as on the history of Mervyn’s family, and marks a point when post-imperial possibilities point towards a potentially vibrant future from a shabby present and a dishonourable British past. Its calculatedly chaotic and improvised nature – with its typos, blots and scribbled handwritten corrections and annotations – insist on the fact that the next moment in time or history cannot be predicted, since all familiar narratives have been disrupted. It is in a sense post-apocalyptic, like Dominic Hill’s 2026 production of Waiting for Godot at the Citizen’s Theatre in Glasgow. Apocalypse takes place in it, in the form of baffling signs and portents, and the Uncle and Jackson tramp their way past them into the unwritten time to come. It’s therefore also a key work of the mid-twentieth century, and one that continues to resonate in our own apparently apocalyptic moment. It deserves, and badly needs, a new edition.

My own beloved copy, bought in 1977.

Bibliographical note

My essay ends with that last sentence. What follows is a bibliographical note about an error that occurs in all known editions of Letters from a Lost Uncle, and you should only read on if you have a copy (digital or analogue) and are interested in the question of whether or not your copy is accurate. I would suggest that it is not, because as far as I can make out no copy of the book has ever been correctly printed. I shall explain this contention here.

It’s widely accepted by Mervyn’s biographers that he was unhappy with the single edition of the book that appeared in his lifetime, for reasons he gave in a letter quoted by John Watney in his early biography: first, Mervyn didn’t think much of the way the book was printed, and secondly, he was annoyed that the price on the dustjacket had been altered from seven shillings and sixpence to three shillings and sixpence, ‘thus giving the book a second-hand look from the very outset’.[17] One error he didn’t mention, however, was that some pages of the first edition had been printed in the wrong order. I first noticed this when I started puzzling over one of the Uncle’s handwritten comments, scribbled under a drawing on p. [5] of my edition (the unpaginated Picador edition of 1977, which largely reproduces the first edition of 1948). ‘I’d forgotten’, the Uncle writes, ‘that I’d already drawn a sea-elephant – not that it matters’. My edition had no drawing of a sea-elephant on any of the preceding pages; the only other such drawing in the book occurs at the top of p. [11], which shows a ‘sea-leopard’  [i.e. a leopard seal] and an elephant-seal, both carefully labelled. I then noticed that the typed prose on p. [11] begins with the word ‘and’ with a lower-case ‘a’, suggesting that the sentence has been carried over from the page before. At the same time, p. [10] ends with a full stop, which means this cannot have been the page that was meant to precede p. [11]. P. [4] of my edition, on the other hand, ends with an unfinished sentence: ‘Not only this, but what with Jackson to be unloaded before he curls up to sleep, and what with my leg-spike to polish’, followed by an ellipsis; and the sentence on p. [11] completes it perfectly: ‘and the sea-leopard stew to prepare for supper, I can’t think why I began this letter tonight of all times’. This suggests that p. [11] – along with p. [12], which follows on from it seamlessly – should actually be pp. [5]-[6].

I would also suggest that pp. [5]-[6] in my edition should in fact be pp. [11]-[12] – in other words, that both pairs of pages have been accidentally transposed. This is more difficult to justify, but the transposition makes sense for a number of reasons. First, the existing p. [5] ends with a handwritten note saying that the Uncle had forgotten he had already drawn an elephant seal (which he here calls a ‘sea-elephant’ before correcting himself to ‘elephant-seal’, presumably because his first drawing of it was labelled with the latter term). It seems unlikely the Uncle would have forgotten this between making the drawing on p. [5] and a drawing only two pages later in the same opening letter. Secondly, if the current pp. [5]-[6] were repositioned as pp. [11]-[12] the portrait of the Uncle on p. [12] (previously p. [6]) would be followed by his detailed discussion of it on p. [13]: ‘Even if the drawing of me isnt a speaking likeness, I do know that I have only one eye’ etc. The lead-up to the portrait on p. [6] makes better sense, too, if we move pp. [5]-[6] to pp. [11]-[12]. On p. [10] the Uncle writes ‘Perhaps you have never heard of me before?’, and the swap would mean he follows this comment with the detailed verbal description that’s currently on p. [5], and with the drawing of himself on the current p. [6]. The description would then be completed by his further discussion of the drawing on p. [13].

It’s worth mentioning one more thing that would need correcting in any new edition of Letters, and this is the fact that no edition after the first has reprinted pp. [24]-[25] as they appeared in the first edition (drawings from these missing pages were added to the endpapers of the book’s second edition of 1976, but are not present in any later ones). These pages were originally removed, G. Peter Winnington suggests, to reduce the length of the book to the standard 132-page format.[18]

I can imagine a new and perfect edition of Letters from a Lost Uncle, but only time will tell if it can ever come into existence. The problem is made worse by the alterations in pen which Mervyn made to some of his pencil drawings in his last illness; these have changed the look of the drawings radically, and a reprint would need to consider whether to keep these alterations, in recognition of his changing abilities as he succumbed to Parkinson’s Disease, or whether to return instead to the first edition as the most finished edition we possess, making only one change, which is to swap the two transposed sets of pages. Of course if you have a first edition you could simply read it in the new order I’ve suggested. But do read it, in whatever version you can get hold of.

NOTES

[1] Maeve Gilmore, A World Away (1970), in Mervyn Peake: Two Lives (London: Vintage, 1999), p. 4.

[2] Clare Peake, Under a Canvas Sky: Living Outside Gormenghast (London: Constable, 2011), p. 23, quoting Patricia Herington, who was the Peakes’ neighbour as a child. Also quoted in Lucy Scholes, Maeve Gilmore, Modern Women Artists (n.p.: Eiderdown Books, 2026), p. 36. Scholes gives a detailed account of Maeve’s murals in the Peakes’ Chelsea home on pp. 36-39.

[3] Mervyn Peake, Letters from a Lost Uncle (from Polar Regions), Picador (London: Pan Books, 1977), p. [12]. All references are to this edition, which is unpaginated; I’ve therefore supplied page numbers in square brackets throughout.

[4] G. Peter Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies: The Illustrated Biography (London: Peter Owen, 2009), p. 228.

[5] From The Drawings of Mervyn Peake (London: Grey Walls Press, 1949), cited in Mervyn Peake: Writings and Drawings, ed. Maeve Gilmore and Shelagh Johnson (London: Academy Editions and New York: St Martin’s Press, 1974), p. 80.

[6] See M. C. Rast, ‘Ireland’s sister nations’: internationalism and sectarianism in the Irish struggle for independence, 1916–22’, Journal of Global History, 2015, Volume 10, Issue 3, pp. 479-501.

[7] In fact, George VI lost his title ‘Emperor of India’ when India won independence in 1947, the year before the book was published.

[8] Peter Pan in Kensington Gardens tells us that Peter ran away (by flying out of the nursery window) ‘when he was seven days old’, and that as a result his age is always one week. J. M. Barrie, Peter Pan in Kensington Gardens and Peter and Wendy, Oxford World Classics (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999), p. 12.

[9] ‘The Men in Bowler Hats are Sweet’, in Mervyn Peake, Complete Nonsense, ed. R. W. Maslen and G. Peter Winnington, Fyfield Books (Manchester: Carcanet, 2011), p. 148. Cf the final stanza:

The Men in Bowler Hats are sweet
Beneath their bowler hats.
It’s not their fault if, in the heat
Of their Transactions; I repeat,
It’s not their fault if Vampires meet
And gurgle in their spats.

[10] ‘HOW TO STARE […] Scrutinize the object for a long while. Try to understand its shape, its solidity, or outline, or texture, or whatever it is that interests you about it – and then after the long stare – when you know what you want to record, begin.’ Mervyn Peake, The Craft of the Lead Pencil (London: Allan Wingate, 1946), pp. 2-3.

[11] The Book of Lyonne features a tortoise who looks exactly like Jackson in Mervyn’s illustration, down to the kerchief he wears around his head. See Burgess Drake, The Book of Lyonne (London: The Falcon Press, 1952), p. 21.

[12] The Peakes owned a copy of Don Quixote illustrated by Gustave Doré. See Sebastian Peake, Child of Bliss, in Mervyn Peake: Two Lives […] pp. 203-5.

[13] The two Lone Ranger movie serials of 1938 and 1939 were shown in UK cinemas at the time. The original Lone Ranger radio show was never broadcast in the UK.

[14] While the B picture seems to have been drawn as part of an alphabet – there is also a stamp showing objects beginning with A – I think it was drawn for Sebastian, because the capital B in it has been modified to become an anagram of SP, i.e. S[ebastian] P[eake]. The stamp I’m identifying as Fabian’s shows a boy in the cabin of a locomotive alongside the driver; the boy has blond hair, like Fabian, whereas Sebastian’s was brown. See Mervyn Peake and Michael Moorcock, The Sunday Books (London and New York: Duckworth Overlook, 2011), pp. 36-7 and p. 38. A stamp showing objects beginning with A appears on p. 130. For the lion that resembles the lion on the stamp see p. 93.

[15] See Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 228.

[16] See Mervyn Peake, Complete Nonsense, ed. R. W. Maslen and G. Peter Winnington, Fyfield Books (Manchester: Carcanet, 2011), pp. 71-3, 86, 88, 90, 113, 123, 220 and 150-3.

[17] John Watney, Mervyn Peake (London: Abacus, 1977) p. 103.

[18] See G. Peter Winnington’s bibliographical account of Letters from a Lost Uncle in his essential list of Peake’s work in print, available on the Peake Studies website here [https://peakestudies.com/parta.htm].

William Heath Robinson, The Adventures of Uncle Lubin (1902)

Some of my blog posts begin in one place and end somewhere completely different. This is a case in point. I started writing with the intention of talking about Mervyn Peake’s picture book Letters from a Lost Uncle from Polar Regions (1948), then started thinking about Peake’s debt to Heath Robinson’s much older book, and found myself with so much to say that the Peake post risked sinking under the weight of its excess Heath Robinson cargo. In any case I need to get a copy of the latest edition of the Letters to make my point about it properly, and I’ve used up my book allowance for the month, so here’s something on Heath Robinson instead.

Heath Robinson is best known now for designing elaborate machines to perform simple or surprising tasks; the term ‘a Heath Robinson contraption’ has entered the English language, and is still being used even by those who have never seen his drawings. His art, in other words, spills out of its confines within the pages of printed books to invade the world, introducing a new concept into everyday use, providing copy for magazines and advertising campaigns, appearing on crockery for children in the 1920s, lending its name to a code-breaking machine at Bletchley Park, and reshaping the history of film. Caractacus Potts uses Heath Robinson contraptions to make breakfast, manufacture sweeties and cut hair in the movie Chitty Chitty Bang Bang (1968), and the car of the title is a Heath Robinson contraption which takes on a life of its own, beginning as a straightforward Potts project to refurbish a vintage automobile and going on to become a flying, ocean-going, sentient vehicle that can put down tyrannies. The inventor Wallace in the Wallace and Gromit movies designs Heath Robinson contraptions to meet his needs, and many of those contraptions escape the limits of what they were made for, as in The Wrong Trousers (1993), where the titular piece of clothing goes rogue on the orders of a criminal penguin. Heath Robinson’s own inventions extend the interior space of buildings into the open air, allow weddings to take place in aeroplanes with the celebrant perched on a steeple, and enable the great monoliths of Stonehenge to tiptoe across Salisbury Plain while being used as camouflage by British troops on a training exercise. His inventions invoke the hectic inventiveness of the first half of the twentieth century, when domestic and urban time and space burst out of their previously stable boundaries, transforming the old into the sometimes ridiculously new, and catching ordinary men, women and children in an ever-expanding web of innovative technologies.

Heath Robinson’s penchant for eccentric technology is often traced to the first of his books for which he both wrote the words and drew the pictures, The Adventures of Uncle Lubin (1902).[1] There are improvised inventions in this book – a balloon driven to the moon by a crude propellor, a submarine which seems slightly too small to accommodate its pilot – but the most striking thing about Heath Robinson’s story is the tendency of familiar objects in it to take on a life and character of their own, from footwear and hats to umbrellas, swords, blunderbusses, birds, fish and babies (the last three being honorary objects thanks to their inarticulacy). Most strikingly of all, the illustrated book as object acquires a life of its own in Heath Robinson’s hands, its decorations taking control of the story instead of merely embellishing it. Look closely at Heath Robinson’s visual embellishments to Uncle Lubin and you’ll find that they have as many adventures as the old man of the title, enmeshing him in a dynamic, ever-changing universe where anything – or rather, any thing – can steer his narrative in unexpected directions on a whim. Things, in fact, have whims in Uncle Lubin, thus identifying the century at the beginning of which the book was published as one in which human beings would find themselves possessed and their fortunes steered by the unexpected agency of the objects they owned.

Heath Robinson’s picture book tells the story of an elderly uncle whose baby nephew, little Peter, is stolen by a wicked bag-bird while in his care. The bag-bird’s act of thievery succeeds on account of Uncle Lubin’s negligence – the old man was dozing when it happened – so Lubin must pursue the child across every region of the world, and beyond it, to atone for his lapse. His adventures involve difficult journeys, on foot and in gimcrack vessels, as far as the moon, the ‘Land of Chilblains’ (which looks much like one of the Poles), the depths of the ocean and an orientalised Eastern kingdom, before being reunited with little Peter in the final chapter. The book is organised into twelve short chapters or ‘Adventures’, and the twelve-part structure aligns it with the great English-language epics modelled on Virgil’s Aeneid, such as Spenser’s unfinished Faerie Queene or Milton’s Paradise Lost. There’s an imaginative ambition to it, in other words, which belies its short length and youthful readership, and suggests it is somehow larger than the sum of its parts. It strains at its seams, I’d suggest, and Heath Robinson makes the notion of bursting out of narrow confines the presiding principle of his composition.

This is largely the result of Heath Robinson’s games with the form and conventions of the Victorian illustrated novel. His book has a full-colour frontispiece (in the first edition), followed by title page, dedication, list of pictures and list of chapters (or ‘Adventures’), each richly decorated with drawings in black and white. Each Adventure has its own title page, and each pair of facing pages in each chapter includes a full-page framed illustration on the right, and a decorative initial capital on the left, followed by a carefully typeset text with a pen-and-ink drawing in the margin. There are also three wordless ‘display cases’, so to speak: two-page framed illustrations depicting some of the more significant moments in the Uncle’s travels. So far so conventional. But Robinson’s initial capitals and pen-and-ink drawings exist in complex dialogue with the framed illustrations that face them. The initial capital sometimes alters or expands upon some element of the framed illustration, while the drawing sometimes alludes to a quite different moment in Lubin’s adventures, not always implied by either the framed illustration or the accompanying text. The effect is that Robinson’s narrative spills out of the confines of the formal publishing conventions it follows. The carefully ruled borders of the largest illustrations cannot restrain the inventiveness of the artist’s pen, which finds new and surprising angles on the narrative in the marginal drawings, the initial capitals, and even the ornaments that decorate the other pages. The book’s visual images augment the verbal text rather than illustrating it; they tell a larger and more complex story, which implies that the narrative contained in the text is by no means a sufficient account of the dynamic world through which Lubin moves, and to which he responds with such improvisatory enthusiasm.

There are continuities, too, in the pictures which are not mentioned in the verbal text, but will quickly be picked up by the sharp-eyed observer. The recurrence of impish birds, for instance, suggests that an ornithological version of the story runs alongside the human one.[2] The wicked bag-bird first shows up in the title page of the first adventure, then again in the top left-hand corner of the first framed illustration in the book on p. 3, a gigantic quasi-saurian presence to which Lubin seems oblivious as he sings to his howling nephew in the vain hope of lulling him to sleep. The bird then takes over several pages of framed illustrations and marginal drawings, while also taking over the child and popping him into the bag beneath its beak. This bag, incidentally, makes it the first of many animated objects in the narrative, an airborne version of the capacious carpet bag Lubin carries with him on some of his adventures.

For a while the wicked bag-bird is the only bird in the book. Then abruptly there is another: a crudely fashioned little bird on top of a weathercock surmounting the mast of Uncle Lubin’s ‘beautiful boat’ in the third adventure (p. 25). The bird on the weathercock reappears in adventure number five, now attached incongruously to the mast of Uncle Lubin’s submarine (p. 47). Another living bird, meanwhile – this time (seemingly) a young bag-bird – appears on the title page of the fourth adventure, and again in the marginal drawing that follows, watching with interest as Lubin’s boat gets ‘frozen up’ in the Land of Chilblains (p. 38). The bag-bird itself appears soon after on an elongated iceberg (p. 40), still with little Peter in its beak-bag, and gets the better of Uncle Lubin once again; it seems more at home in the Poles than he is, which is presumably why its young are to be found there. In the sixth adventure Lubin meets a flock of seagulls in his submarine (now bereft of its weathercock) (p. 59), one of which watches him again with interest as he talks to a little mer-boy; again, they are more at home at sea than Lubin is, though his persistence in entering their natural environment seems to intrigue them.

So far, the birds seem to exist alongside Lubin, not interacting with him except when the wicked bag-bird gets involved. Then in the eighth adventure the nature of Lubin’s association with birds begins to change. Caught in a storm, Lubin seeks shelter under a tree and begins to climb it as the flood waters rise. In the first framed illustration of the chapter (p. 75), a tiny featherless chick flies through the rain (despite its lack of feathers) towards the adventurer, and perches in the second framed illustration on the crown of his hat. As the waters continue to rise the chick remains safely on the hat (p. 77), until in one marginal drawing only the crown of Lubin’s hat remains above the surface (p. 78), with the chick still perched on it; Lubin has become the chick’s protector, just as he sought to be the protector of his little nephew. In the final framed illustration of the chapter, Lubin climbs into his battered umbrella and sails safely away through the flooded landscape (p. 81), while the chick crows in triumph from his hat as if in celebration of the old man’s resourcefulness. The final picture in the chapter is a drawing of the chick in the middle of an empty page (p. 82), still crowing, perhaps in gratitude to its rescuer. There is no mention of the chick in the text of the chapter, but one gets a sense from the pictures that some corner has been turned in Lubin’s relationship with the natural world, and with birds in particular.

Sure enough, from this moment on Lubin’s connection to his feathered friends becomes a genial one. In the tenth adventure, three swallows fly around Lubin as he falls asleep in a seaside meadow (p. 93), and the happy dream that follows – in which he sees little Peter crowned King of the Fairies (pp. 94 and 95) – is full of tiny wings, as if inspired by the swallows. And the twelfth and final adventure features another of the recurring trees in the narrative (the first was the one he dozed under in his first adventure), a coconut palm, which drops a shower of coconuts on his head as he walks under it (p. 111). Unmentioned in the text, another little naked chick – larger than the one in the eighth adventure – falls on his head along with the coconuts, and a marginal drawing shows chick and man confronting each other (p. 110); the chick seems to be smiling in delight at being reunited with its elderly friend. The chick appears again, drawn much larger as if to emphasize its rapid maturation, in the following marginal drawing, and the framed illustration opposite shows Uncle Lubin climbing the palm tree to find out (as the text tells us) ‘who it was that could be so rude as to throw cocoa-nuts at him’ (p. 110). But the illustrations suggest he has another motive: he may be looking for the nest from which the chick came, and the bird, perhaps a bag-bird, that built it. He is also making the final gesture of solidarity with the birds; he saved a bird’s life in adventure number eight, and now he is climbing to the bird’s own home, which we might suspect will prove to be somehow Lubin’s home as well as the bag-bird’s.

Sure enough (again), in the final framed illustration of the adventure he finds a nest full of little bag-chicks with Peter in the midst of them, ‘warm and cosy and safe and sound’ (p. 114) – certainly more so than the little lost chicks we have encountered in the rest of the narrative. Lubin takes him home, of course, and the final drawing of the wicked bag-bird – all alone in the middle of an otherwise empty page (p. 116) – shows it weeping, clearly heartbroken at having lost its human protegé. The bag-bird, then, has its own story, one not explicitly told in Heath Robinson’s text. It is no less affectionate than Uncle Lubin, and no less lax in its childminding duties, though it has a ruder sense of humour (it laughs at him when it escapes him, still carrying Peter, on the moon and in the Land of Chilblains). If, then, it is a kind of alternative Lubin – who also has a bag, like the bag-bird, as I pointed out – then this final picture might well imply that it will act on its feelings and pursue little Peter through thick and thin, perhaps even stealing him back so that the story can begin all over again. Heath Robinson tells us at the end of the final adventure that Uncle Lubin and his nephew ‘got home quite safely and lived happily ever after’ (p. 114); but even if the text does not tell us anything about the return of the wicked bag-bird, the recommencement of Uncle Lubin’s adventures can reasonably be anticipated in spite of the apparent closure offered in these final words. After all, birds have been absent from the verbal text throughout the book, with the sole exception of the wicked bag-bird itself, yet we have seen them often in the pictures. Words don’t tell us everything; we need pictures, too, to make sense of the world in which we find ourselves. What the pictures tell us, as the text does not, is that Uncle Lubin and the bag-bird are in the end doubles of each other, which means that the bag-bird is not so wicked after all – unless one considers persistence in rescuing lost young things from perceived danger as a form of wickedness.

As I’ve suggested, other objects besides birds recur in Heath Robinson’s story, often finding their epiphanic moments in the narrative long after we’ve first encountered them. And in many cases, what they do at these moments is very different from what we might have expected (much like the wicked bag-bird, which turns out to be over-affectionate and mischievous rather than malevolent). Uncle Lubin carries a blunderbuss or gun, for instance, in the second adventure (p. 13), but he doesn’t use it in anger until the eleventh, when he shoots at a wasp that has settled on a Rajah’s nose (pp. 102-103); and it’s not the projectiles in his gun that drive off the wasp but the noise it makes when it ‘bursts’ to pieces (p. 104). In the third adventure he has an accordion strapped to his back (p. 25), which gets played for the first time in the ninth adventure, when he uses it to charm a dragon-snake (p. 87); this is a fairly conventional use of a musical instrument, of course, but the usual tool for snake-seduction is a pipe. His umbrella, which first appears in the second adventure as one of the items in his balloon (p. 13), finds its most effective use in the eighth adventure, when he turns it upside down and uses it as a boat to escape a flood, in anticipation of Winnie-the-Pooh. He carries a battered sword in several adventures (p. 39), but it only gets used in a story from Lubin’s past, and then not by Lubin himself. The story involves the boy Lubin’s encounter with a ‘funny little old man’ in an outsized hat, who emerges from the snow wielding a similar blade and threatening in terrible tones to ‘cut you to pieces’ (p. 70), upon which the boy Lubin sensibly runs away. The old man’s hat, slippers and nose resemble Uncle Lubin’s, and this together with his sword suggests that young Lubin has somehow encountered a ferocious alternative version of his future self – a self against which he has gone on to define his gentle adult personality.

Even Lubin’s hat has its own adventures. It becomes a parachute when he needs to escape from the moon after his hot air balloon has been punctured by one of its horns (p. 21), serves as a house in two of the ornamental drawings (p. 1 and two pages earlier), and provides a template for the many other flamboyant hats that feature in the book, such as the feathered cavalier’s hat worn by the swordsman Vammadopper in the third adventure (p. 23), the boy Lubin’s straw hat in the seventh (p. 65) – a smaller, less permanent version of the adult Lubin’s headwear – and the even smaller conical hats worn by two old fairy gentlemen in the double-page framed illustration, ‘Uncle Lubin’s Dream of Little Peter’ (pp. 94-5). Lubin’s footwear, meanwhile, undergoes several adventurous transformations. Sometimes he wears shoes with buckles and bows; sometimes hobnailed boots; but most often slippers, which suffer various travails in the course of his exploits, falling off one by one when he’s on the moon (pp. 17 and 21), lying discarded in the grass when he has his dream (p. 93), and featuring on his coat-of-arms in the final framed illustration of the book, alongside his hat and little Peter’s bottle (p. 117). In that coat-of-arms, objects stand in for the central persons in the narrative, which reinforces our sense that things have an active role to play in shaping Lubin’s fortunes.[3]

The adventures of Uncle Lubin, in other words, are also the adventures of the things and creatures and people he encounters, which sometimes take central stage in a book ostensibly dedicated to Uncle Lubin. Besides the implied stories contained in the pictures, three inset stories get told in both words and images that have nothing at all to do with the central quest: about Vammadopper and the giant (p. 28ff.), the impudent Mer-Boy and his schoolmaster (p. 58ff.) and the boy Lubin and the savage old man (p. 66ff.). There is the potential, then, for an endless series of adventures in Robinson’s little volume: adventures in clothing, adventures in natural history, adventures in the imaginative repurposing of things, and the many random adventures of the strangers one meets from day to day.

Robinson was clearly keenly aware of this potential for an infinite expansion of his picture-book. At the head of the List of Adventures there is a drawing of Uncle Lubin reading a massive tome whose spine gives its title as ‘ADVENTURES VOL. 5,000’. The possibilities for adventure generated by linked words and images are clearly unlimited, never to be contained within the confines of any literary or artistic structure. The mind, after all, continually spins its own narratives out of the ones on offer, both in waking life and in dreams – the life of dreams being duly represented in Robinson’s book by the dream Lubin has about little Peter among the fairies, which opens a door onto other books as well as oneiric states of mind. Lubin’s dream invokes the little kidnapped Indian boy in Shakespeare’s A Midsummer Night’s Dream, just as the little mer-boy invokes Charles Kingsley’s famous children’s book The Water Babies and the dragon-snake invokes the Arabian Nights, which Heath Robinson was illustrating as he worked on Uncle Lubin (he had already illustrated Charles and Mary Lamb’s Tales from Shakespeare by the time he published his picture book, and he went on to illustrate Kingsley’s novel in 1915). Uncle Lubin himself is a Don Quixote figure, heroic and absurd in equal measure, reminding us that the artist’s interpretation of Cervantes came out in the same year as his own self-authored book for children. Heath Robinson and his illustrations interact with other authors and their illustrators – Arthur Rackham, Gustave Doré, Walter Crane, Mabel Lucie Atwell and the rest – as well as with the other products of the writer-artist’s own fertile brain. They spiral centrifugally outwards from Uncle Lubin to take in adjacent volumes in Heath Robinson’s imaginative library.

The adventure of the little mer-boy, for instance, which occupies the central pages of the book, finds itself extended in many directions as we read. Lubin meets the mer-boy in one of the eccentric machines – a submarine – which he builds to help him in his quest for his nephew. The child looks very much like his nephew Peter, except that Peter is nearly always crying in the pictures Robinson draws of him, whereas the mer-boy is nearly always laughing or smiling. He first appears on the title page of the Sixth Adventure, along with a decorative capital M (for Mer-boy) that shows a fish with a gaping mouth, and mer-boys and gaping fishes proceed to proliferate through the successive pages: in the decorative capitals (which show more gaping fishes on pp. 56 and 58) and marginal pictures (which show mer-boys on pp. 56, 58 and 62) as well as in the framed illustrations (most of which show both). The first of the framed illustrations for the chapter shows Lubin underwater, trying to drive the mer-boy away from his submarine by waving his umbrella at him (p. 57), watched by several other mer-boys and gaping fishes; there is a crab in the bottom left-hand corner of the illustration (Uncle Lubin’s unwonted crabbiness in this picture aligns him with another famous inventor and submariner, Captain Nemo). In the next framed illustration Lubin’s submarine has surfaced and Lubin has become fascinated by the mer-boy (p. 59), who tells him a story as a passing seabird looks on. The next two pages form a double-page framed illustration, showing a school for mer-boys in which an elderly merman is explaining the properties of a toy, a ‘humming-top’, while the largest fish we have seen so far approaches him from behind (pp. 60-61).[4] In the following framed picture the fish has begun to swallow the unfortunate merman, while the mer-boys do ‘nothing but laugh’, as the mer-boy tells Lubin (p. 63 and p. 62). Opposite the picture of the merman being swallowed, a marginal picture shows a mer-boy being bitten on the tail by a crab exactly like the one we saw in the first framed illustration of the adventure (p. 62); above him, the decorative capital shows a mer-boy emerging from a shell, like a hermit crab looking for a new residence. The final picture of the adventure – an ornament in the middle of a blank page – shows Lubin himself upside down in the hatch of his submarine, his slippered feet waving in the air (p. 64), as if in imitation of the merman, who was swallowed head first by the fish so that his undulating tail, skinny body and splayed hands were all that could be seen of him. What are we to make of this procession of images, and how do they interact with the accompanying text?

The adventure suggests some of the ways in which Heath Robinson’s verbal text and the pictures he draws generate one another, in a mutual process that refuses to prioritise text over pictures or pictures over text. The mer-boy, for instance, with his link to gaping fishes, seems to have had his origin in one of the pictures Heath Robinson drew for the previous adventure, ‘The Sea-Serpent’. A marginal drawing in that adventure shows Little Peter peering out of the mouth of a gaping fish (p. 48); perhaps it represents Uncle Lubin’s hope of finding his little nephew in the depths of the ocean with the help of his submarine. We can tell the child looking out of the fish’s mouth is little Peter, not a mer-boy, because it has clothes on, as the mer-boys never do, and because its hair is arranged with a curl on the forehead – a kiss-curl – whereas the mer-boys’ always stream upwards, like seaweed in water. The first picture of the mer-boy, on the title page of the Sixth Adventure, seems to confirm the link with Peter: it shows him with much shorter hair than in the drawings that follow, and with the distinctive kiss-curl (p. 55). On this title page Peter seems to be mutating into the mer-boy, a process that began in the marginal drawing of the child in the fish’s mouth, which shows Uncle Lubin’s nephew sporting an uncharacteristic smile. Before this, almost every picture of the baby shows him crying, and the smile suggests a new and impish delight at having escaped from adult control, a delight which gets transferred to the mer-boys in the following chapter, who smile and laugh in nearly every situation.[5]

The adventure with the baby mer-boy, then, seems to emerge organically from Uncle Lubin’s quest for his baby nephew, and from his desire to find Peter in the sea despite the fact that there is no evidence he was ever there apart from the marginal drawing (though the wicked bag-bird resembles a pelican, an ocean-going bird, which might have suggested the ocean episodes). Lubin clearly shares Peter’s and the mer-boy’s delight in the sea and its denizens, as the cover drawing for the Fifth Adventure, ‘The Sea Serpent’, shows the old man sitting astride a gaping fish with a grin even broader than his nephew’s (p. 45). One suspects that Lubin went to sea as much for his own gratification as for the quest; he certainly looks delighted with his submarine in every picture showing them together. He looks for his nephew, then, as waywardly as he once looked after him; which means that the supposed real-world distinction in responsibility between a child and its adult minder has little meaning in Heath Robinson’s universe. And the story told by the mer-boy confirms this impression. Unlike the highly moralistic teacher figures in Kingsley’s The Water Babies, the mer-boy’s elderly teacher is as interested in toys as any child could be – his lesson involves an explanation of why a spinning top hums as it spins (p. 62) – and his failure to take things seriously seems to be punished when a passing sea creature swallows him in the middle of the lesson. As he is swallowed the mer-boys laugh at him, and this in turn could be seen as being punished by the fate of the mer-boy in the marginal drawing on the same page, which shows him being pinched by a crab so that he cries, for once, instead of laughing (p. 62). But any moral we may have been intended to deduce from Heath Robinson’s words and images is implicitly contradicted by the last picture in the chapter, which shows Uncle Lubin falling into his submarine head first (p. 64), exactly mirroring the way the teacher fell into the fish’s mouth. If the mer-boy was being punished for his laughter when the crab pinched him, was Lubin being punished for telling the mer-boy it was ‘not nice’ to laugh when his teacher was swallowed (p. 62)? Morally speaking, Heath Robinson’s words and pictures offer their readers mixed messages, in which the usual hierarchy of childhood and adulthood – whereby the adult issues authoritative instruction while the child is expected to listen in passive obedience – no longer applies.

This is confirmed in the following adventure, where Uncle Lubin rewards the mer-boy ‘for telling him such nice stories’ (p. 66) (the contradiction is pointed up by the verbal echo of ‘not nice’) by telling him a story of his own. Lubin’s story concerns the time when he himself was ‘a little boy’, suggesting that the only thing that separates old men from little boys is time. And the old man’s tale has no more moral than the mer-boy’s did. Young Lubin is lost in the snow when he comes across the murderous old man wielding a battered sword, and the conclusion of the story has the little boy running away and finding his way home by sheer good luck so that he ‘was able to sleep in bed that night after all’ (p. 70). Young Lubin’s discovery of the route home has no causal link to his encounter with the murderous old man – it’s a matter of chance; and the old man’s murderous intentions certainly explode the myth that old age brings with it responsibility and accumulated wisdom. In addition, Uncle Lubin’s story is not much ‘nicer’ than the mer-boy’s. No one likes to think that one can come across bloodthirsty killers quite by accident while out for a walk, and some parents might be disturbed to find the fact advertised in a text devised for the nursery. In this way Heath Robinson’s work disrupts the function as well as the format of an illustrated picture book, implying that its author shares Uncle Lubin’s wholehearted dismissal of the usual understanding of the way search and rescue operations, and the adult world in general, is supposed to operate. Lubin’s search for little Peter is random, and ends with the random discovery of him; it is as much a search for himself as it is for his nephew, since he seldom seems to know where he is or why he is there. Like the swordsman Vammerdopper, who got blown onto an uninhabited island by a giant’s breath, he is a feather to each wind that blows, and so it seems is everyone else he comes across.

The absence of hierarchy in Heath Robinson’s book – from the refusal to prioritise either text or image to the close parallels between children and grown ups throughout the narrative – extends to the relationship between text and reader. The book is full of pictures of Uncle Lubin looking out of the page directly at the reader, inviting them to share his delight in extemporary invention, his total disregard for health and safety, and his enthusiastic indulgence in wild adventures. The child reader is the old man’s accomplice, and participates in his adventures by scanning each detailed, eccentric drawing as carefully as any parent might wish a child to scrutinise an instructive text. The close relationship is implied, in fact, by the old man’s quest, which is to find the child with whom he considers himself to have the closest bond; a charming concept, though even this is a little undercut by Peter’s evident distress whenever his uncle is holding him (a distress which would seem well-founded when he slips out of Lubin’s arms as the old man falls asleep [p. 5], so that the bag-bird could be seen as Peter’s rescuer rather than his abductor, since it never drops him).

Lubin’s kindness to everyone he meets could be seen as the moral point of the book, but even this is undercut: on meeting Vammadopper stranded on a rock Lubin never offers to rescue him, merely ‘kissing him kindly’ before sailing off on his quest (p. 38), and he is quite bad tempered with the mer-boy when the child clings to his submarine. There’s an anarchism to Lubin’s adventures, then, which allies them to Barrie’s representation of childhood in the Peter Pan books, or Alice’s adventures in the unstable world of adult humans and creatures in Carroll’s Wonderland, or Captain Nemo’s misanthropic wanderings in Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea. Resist the temptation, these books imply, to accept on trust the moral systems you are offered. Chart your own route through this rapidly-changing modern world and improvise your own practical responses to every eventuality. You may find and make friends and communities as you go, but be aware that these may not last. The wicked bag-bird waits in the wings – though given your distrust of moral systems it may not turn out to be so very wicked after all – and you will need to build wings and fins and sails and propellors of your own if you are to deal with it.

The most convincing reading of Heath Robinson’s book, I think, is ecological. Uncle Lubin finds a way to inhabit the many different landscapes he enters, making himself part of each ecosystem by constructing the various specialist adaptations he needs to negotiate their challenges. He does not bring a fixed perspective to each new context, but improvises his reactions to the dangers they pose, sometimes by behaving as the other inhabitants do, sometimes by inventing appropriate responses or behaviours: flying down from the moon with the help of his hat, in imitation of the wicked bag bird; leaving Vammadopper on the island to which he has been exiled in mute recognition that it’s where he belongs; trudging through the polar snow of the Land of Chilblains in his slippers, wearing his patched coat and carrying a candle to light up the polar night, as if he were wandering through his own house and garden (though his attempt to melt an iceberg with the candle [p. 41] is not so successful in its consequences [p. 43]); responding to the attempts of a sea-serpent and a dragon-snake to kill him by killing them instead, thanks to his intimate knowledge of their habits and tendencies (the sea-serpent can be killed by putting salt on its tail, while a dragon-snake is fatally susceptible to music). With the mer-boy Uncle Lubin becomes, in effect, both the mer-boy and his elderly teacher, while his dream of little Peter among the fairies populates fairyland with old men wearing funny hats, much like himself. His rescue of the rajah from the wasp leads him to be hugged and kissed by the monarch and his cheering people (pp. 104-5), while the final adventure sees Uncle Lubin become one with the bag-bird by finding and entering its nest. All the way through, Lubin presents himself not as an authority or an evangelist but as an interloper who wishes to embrace the circumstances in which he finds himself. Even the bag-bird seems always to consider him less as an enemy than an amusement, who causes it to laugh inordinately – up until the moment when he makes it cry. Lubin is endlessly resourceful and open-minded in his willingness to become part of the places and narratives in which he finds himself, and the objects he brings with him on his adventures seem equally adaptable. His quest for little Peter, in other words, is the very opposite of an imperialist conquest; it’s an opportunity for him to manifest his pleasure in new and unexpected places, people and animals, without violating the conditions under which they live. If the Adventures of Uncle Lubin is an epic, it’s not a nationalist manifesto, like the Aeneid, but something older, a creation myth for a manner of living in which nations and their armies have no purpose.

Early responses to Heath Robinson’s work suggest that his tendency to reject conventional hierarchical relations between text and image, or between people, creatures and places, could disturb his British readers. In his book for A. and C. Black’s Brush, Pen and Pencil series, W. Heath Robinson (1913, reprinted 1930), A. E. Johnson commented on Heath Robinson’s propensity for departing from the texts he illustrated and following his own imaginative trajectory: ‘Where the illustrator fails’, Johnson writes, ‘as usually happens, is in the difficult task of embodying the essential literary motive and idea. […] The defect is one which Heath Robinson shares with most illustrators, whose natural instinct is to concern themselves with the pictorial possibilities afforded by the author’s context, rather than the elucidation of his central (and purely literary) idea’ (pp. 14-15). He also rebukes Heath Robinson for not illustrating the plays of Shakespeare with an eye to their presentation on the stage (pp. 41-2) – something most illustrators have done with Shakespeare, and for good reason, since his most visually striking passages refer to events not taking place in front of the audience, such as Ophelia’s drowning, or Clarence’s dream, or Enobarbus’s account of Cleopatra in her barge. Heath Robinson, Johnson opines, is an artist who

never has been, and does not desire to be, an illustrator in the strict sense of the word. He demands to go his own way too much, unwilling to re-state literal facts pictorially, and providing rather an accompaniment to the author’s text than an exposition of his meaning. One may hazard a guess that the authors for whose writings he has made drawings […] have proved to him, as an artist, a nuisance and a bore. Their writings furnish excuses for his pictures, but, except as pegs upon which to hang the latter, he would much prefer not to be hampered by them. (pp. 18-19)

For Johnson, Uncle Lubin represents Heath Robinson’s solution to his impatience with other authors (pp. 47-50); in it, drawings can give rise to new ideas as readily as words can. In this way the book predicts the rapid rise of the ‘ninth art’ of comics in the twentieth century, where pictures and words are given more or less equal weighting. It also affirms the fantasy creator’s delight in enabling their impossible narrative to transfer itself from one medium to another, or to fuse media together – something that’s effectively built in to comics, with their frequent mimicry of cinema and their seeming readiness to be converted into cinematic terms, or of course into games.

Many of the great fantasy writers have either been writer-artists themselves or have happily worked with visual artists in a collaborative bid to extend their imaginative universe in new directions. Fantasy at its best is not afraid of its own tendency to be transformed as it enters different artistic, theatrical, ludic or musical modes of expression. Its authors are rarely unsettled by the idea that sympathetic adapters might come to think of them as ‘a nuisance and a bore’, or that their texts might become mere ‘pegs’ for more interesting work in another medium. What fills them with the infectious joy of Uncle Lubin is the idea of the infinite universe of imaginative adventure which these transformations confirm and enlarge. This is not a universe with a hierarchy; it’s an anarchic but beautifully patterned universe, whose centre is everywhere and whose circumference is nowhere. One of these centres is Heath Robinson’s little book The Adventures of Uncle Lubin. This book deserves the respect due to an imaginative crossroads or railway junction, from which paths or railroads are always being laid by our eyes and minds to take us in unexpected and often exhilarating new directions…

NOTES

[1] My edition of the book, from which all references are taken, The Adventures of Uncle Lubin, Told and Illustrated by W. Heath Robinson, published by the Minerva Press, London, in 1972.

[2] Heath Robinson had a great propensity for drawing impish or helpless birds. See e.g. his picture of ‘A simple apparatus for rescuing a wounded snipe’, or the picture of a tiny chick trying to hatch a set of ostrich eggs in ‘Thoughtfulness; or taking mother’s place’, or the picture of chicks nesting in an elderly man’s top hat in Bill the Minder. These can be found in A. E. Johnson, Heath Robinson (London: A. and C. Black, 1913, reprinted 1930), in the following places: between pp. 24 and 25, between pp. 16 and 17, and on p. 9.

[3] Objects are also present in the very first ornamental illustration, before even the frontispiece, which shows all the objects I’ve listed bar the slippers – hat, gun, sword, umbrella, accordion – along with a stick and a candle, as if to confirm the centrality of things to the adventures to come.

[4] In some versions of the book the merman is described as the mer-boys’ father, and is balancing an eel rather than a humming-top on his hand. I’d be interested to know more about why and how Heath Robinson ended up producing two versions of the same story, with illustrations to match…

[5] It’s tempting to see a link between the lost Peter, with his increasing taste for adventure, and J. M. Barrie’s more famous Peter, who ran away as a baby in Peter Pan in Kensington Gardens and made friends with the birds in Hyde Park. But Peter’s Kensington adventures were first told in chapters 13 to 18 of Barrie’s novel The Little White Bird, which was published in the same year as Heath Robinson’s (1902). Peter did not meet mermaids until he became the star of Barrie’s play, Peter Pan, in 1904. This makes a direct link between the texts unlikely.

Peter Winnington, The Voice of the Heart: the Working of Mervyn Peake’s Imagination (2006)

[Last month I learned that my friend, the finest Peake scholar of all time, Peter Winnington, had died after a long illness. I worked closely with Peter twice: once when going over the manuscript of my edition of Peake’s Collected Poems, and once when co-editing Peake’s Complete Nonsense with him (both books were published by Carcanet in 2008 and 2011 respectively). The first of these occasions took place in Peter’s house in the Jura, and it was one of the most delightful scholarly episodes of my life, both because of Peter’s kindness as a host and because we shared a lifelong passion for Peake and could talk about him with each other as we never could have done, perhaps, with anyone else. Peter was funny, learned and sometimes irascible; I’ll miss his companionship, and the benefit of his unparalleled knowledge of Peake, more than I can say.

In tribute to Peter I’m putting up here my review of his extraordinary monograph on Peake, The Voice of the Heart. It will always remain the definitive book on Peake’s creative process. The review was first published in the journal Peter ran for many years, Peake Studies, vol. 10 no. 3 (October 2007), pp. 26-40. I’ve made a few small changes.]

 Peter Winnington’s masterly book begins by surprising us with a few facts. As he points out, there has been only a ‘tiny body of criticism’ dedicated to Peake’s works over the last sixty years – and this despite the fact that the Gormenghast trilogy has remained in print continuously since the 1960s and is always listed among the four or five most important works of fantasy of the twentieth century; that his pictures and illustrated books are now in huge demand all over the world; and that as many as seven biographies and book-length memoirs of Peake have appeared since his death. By contrast, there have only been three monographs published before Winnington’s book, and remarkably few substantial essays or book chapters. What is it that has made critics so reluctant to take on the richly varied productions of this well-loved artist?

The usual answer is that they are just too rich and varied. Winnington’s is the only book so far to deal with every aspect of Peake’s creativity: his poetry, drama and essays as well as his novels, short stories, picture books, illustrations and paintings. It is easy to conclude that he was simply too multifarious a talent to be easily accommodated within the framework of conventional criticism. But another reason for critical neglect of Peake may lie hidden, I suspect, in our very fascination with his biography. Peake’s life is all too easily told (as Michael Moorcock has pointed out) as a sentimental tragic romance: the story of a sensitive, other-worldly writer-artist whose flame shone brightly for a brief period before his inevitable descent into mental illness and death. The continuing stigma of mental illness hangs over his achievements. Part of his first novel, Titus Groan, was written as occupational therapy while he was undergoing treatment for ‘neurosis’ in Southport Emergency Hospital, after suffering a breakdown brought on by the pressures and absurdities of military life in the Second World War. A second, prolonged hospitalization followed the failure of his play The Wit to Woo on the London stage in 1957; and there were fears for Peake’s psychological health in between these two episodes. For some commentators, the implication is that he was never quite in control of his genius; that his writings and drawings are the undisciplined outpourings of a vast but chaotic imagination, and therefore finally resistant to any rigorous, sustained analysis – except from a psychoanalytical perspective. One of the three monographs devoted to Peake’s work, Alice Mills’s Stuckness in the Fiction of Mervyn Peake, adopts such a perspective, and one suspects it will continue to prove popular in future. Indeed, Peake himself seems deliberately to invite psychoanalysis through his recurring references to madness, ranging from an unpublished poem of 1939, where he anticipates that with the outbreak of war he will ‘be taken away / Into the nightmare land of idiocy’, to the derangement of Lord Sepulchrave in Titus Groan, or Cheeta’s psychological torture of the young protagonist in Titus Alone. When he found himself in a hospital for the mentally ill in the ’50s, Peake wrote to his wife: ‘I will never write about mad people again…. I’ve played too much round the edge of madness.’ His playfulness may have cost him dear in terms of literary reputation – more dearly than some of his admirers care to admit.

Then there is the fantastic mode in which so many of his visual and verbal works are cast. When I approached the writer-artist Alasdair Gray with a request to write a short preface to an edition of Peake’s Collected Poetry, his response was interestingly complicated. ‘I couldn’t possibly do it,’ he said, ‘because I wouldn’t be able to celebrate his work with honesty.’ Peake was a romantic, Gray explained; a self-indulgent escapist who failed to engage with any of the urgent social and political problems of his day. And he went on to illustrate Peake’s lack of artistic responsibility by pointing out how he glosses over the sexual politics of feudalism in his account of the emotional development of Titus Groan; how the wretched condition of the Bright Carvers is placidly accepted by all the inhabitants of Gormenghast; and how the only true revolutionary in the castle, Steerpike, ends as a fugitive murderer hunted down by the merciless champions of feudal justice. At the same time, Gray could quote from memory verses recited by the Poet in the first of the Titus books, and admitted that his own childhood imagination was set on fire by Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor, which made him a lifelong admirer of Peake’s illustrations. Can Peake’s qualities as an artist finally be said to counterbalance what Gray and others have seen as his manifest failings?

Gray is not alone in his vexed relationship with Peake. Some of his most ardent fans confess themselves embarrassed by their love of his work. If he is a romantic, they fear, then he cannot also be modern; if he is an escapist then he cannot also be a thinker; and for many people both terms (‘romantic’ and ‘escapist’) imply once again a lack of artistic rigour, a quasi-adolescent undirected effusiveness that relegates all his work to a place on the shelf alongside the cherished books of childhood, to be re-read in a spirit of nostalgia rather than thoughtfulness. Again, Peake contributed to this view through his lifelong interest in adolescence. His favourite book, Stevenson’s Treasure Island, has an adolescent protagonist; Titus is left stranded at the end of Titus Alone in a condition of permanent teenage sullenness; and Peake’s poems from ‘The Burning Boy’ to ‘Poem: As Though It Were Not His’ are filled with cocky walkers, wiry boys and fit-for-nothing fellows who exert an extraordinary hold on the poet’s heart and mind. Peake stands accused as another version of the boy who never grew up, an artistic Peter Pan unable to break free from the images and obsessions of his early years.

Peter Winnington’s book does not try to demolish these prejudices. Indeed, it confirms a few of them, such as Peake’s obsession with certain recurring motifs, many of them having their roots in his childhood and youth. What it does, however, is to demonstrate beyond all doubt – at least for this reader – that Peake was a deeply committed artist, a serious thinker and a meticulous craftsman whose texts and pictures richly reward close scrutiny. He also shows that Peake’s work is best understood as a whole, since his visual art and his writing spring from the same imaginative processes. These processes Winnington investigates with the kind of inspiring thoroughness lavished on Coleridge by Jonathan Livingston Lowes in The Road to Xanadu (a book Peake intended to read, at least, as we know from a memo he wrote to himself in one of his notebooks). Winnington makes extensive use of Peake’s essays on drawing to show how he set about the business of writing his novels, and identifies his novels as a kind of evolving treatise on the business of creating a visual work of art – a sculpture or a painting. And he has found an original and highly successful way of drawing together the multiple strands of Peake’s creativity in each successive chapter.

The book is organized into a series of interrelated essays focussing on a number of dominant themes or motifs that surface again and again throughout Peake’s work in all media, from the beginning of his career until his final illness. The chapter headings embrace the physical (Islands, Animals, Birds), the emotional (Heart, Solitude, Love), the philosophical (Identity, Evil) and the technical (Perspective, Voice), and close with two more narrowly focussed chapters on specific areas of Peake’s writing (the novel Mr Pye and his work for the theatre). But my attempt to categorize the chapters in the previous sentence merely goes to show the extent to which they depend on one another. For Peake, the physical, emotional, philosophical and technical aspects of his art are so tightly enmeshed as to be inseparable – which is why Winnington can so convincingly demonstrate how his work in any one medium illuminates his procedures in all the others. The chapter headings are skilfully chosen, and their subjects so thoroughly yet lucidly explored that one ends by imagining one has thought them through for oneself. And they accumulate into a remarkable portrayal of a creative mind at work, which should be recognized as making a significant contribution to our understanding of the creative process itself and of the relationship between one art form and another.

The first chapter lays the groundwork for all the rest, stressing as it does the centrality of the metaphor of the heart to Peake’s intellectual and imaginative life. Readers of Peake’s work may well have been struck by his recurrent references to the heart and its beating, both literal and metaphorical; references which imply an obsessive concentration on that organ which wrests it as if by force from the realm of cliché to which it has often been consigned. Indeed, this revisiting and revitalizing of cliché is one of the traits of Peake that Winnington highlights throughout his text. A lot of the metaphors Peake uses – those of islands, of various kinds of animal, of heart and nerve and sinew – are as familiar as the contours of the human body itself; but like a fine draftsman (Peake taught life drawing throughout his professional career as an artist), who enables his viewers to rediscover the strangeness and beauty of those contours, Peake’s intensive scrutiny of over-familiar verbal comparisons transforms them into something new and often disturbing. His self-consciousness in reanimating clichés can be confirmed by a glance at one of his later books, Figures of Speech (1954), which comprises a series of visual puzzles that give astonishing new life to hackneyed phrases such as ‘coming up to scratch’ (a merman exploding from the sea in a rapture of self-abrasion) or ‘burning one’s bridges’ (a top-heavy and self-satisfied couple trotting swiftly to the left with the bridges of their noses on fire). So too, Peake’s version of the heart turns out to be something new: both an intensely physical organ (Peake’s command of anatomy derives both from his studies as a visual artist and from childhood observation of his father’s work as a doctor) and a seemingly limitless space into which external impressions are projected and in which new works of art are forged. And like human organs throughout his work, the heart turns out to have an independent life of its own, seizing control of its human possessors against their will at unexpected moments and articulating its desires in the resonant ‘voice’ which supplies Winnington’s book with its title. Peake saw his successful works as utterances of the ‘voice of the heart’, Winnington contends, and he uses the rest of his book to build on this perception.

A clue to the heart’s role in Peake’s imaginative process lies in his two chief activities as a visual artist. Throughout his career he drew from models, whether these were professional people employed by the colleges of art where he studied and taught or members of his own family, whom he drew with astonishing tenderness and frequency. Also, in about 1940 he embarked on the career for which he has become most celebrated among his fellow artists: that of an illustrator of other people’s texts. Both these activities involve prolonged gazing at an external object – what Peake describes in The Craft of the Lead Pencil as the artist’s ‘stare’. And both involve internalizing that object – whether it be a human figure or a text whose contents must be digested before they can be translated into visual terms. For Peake, the heart is central to the writer-artist’s project of internalizing what he sees, whether real or imagined: becoming possessed by it, as it were, so that its life, its form, its senses become one with his, and he can re-present it fully formed to his viewers or readers. It is a process he described with a virtuoso’s skill in two important essays on which Winnington draws – The Craft of the Lead Pencil and the introduction to his book of Drawings – and in each case the heart is central to the description, both as the place to which the object of an artist’s attention must be gathered and as an emblem of the vitality an artist must impart to his or her representation of that object. Without the involvement of the heart – the seat of the emotions and the location of the artist’s deepest convictions and desires – creation becomes an automatic process, like the functioning of a machine; and throughout his life the notion of human beings becoming mechanised is a source of horror to Peake.

But if Peake’s work as a visual artist helps to explain the role played by the heart in his creative process, Winnington also makes the important point that other senses besides vision are equally vital to his creativity. The title of his book is The Voice of the Heart, and the ‘voice’ of a person or thing is what conveys its identity, what distinguishes it from any other thing or person. The book’s first chapter brilliantly demonstrates the way Peake’s accounts of the act of inventing imaginary beings invariably begin with his characters’ voices, as heard in his ‘heart’, before fleshing out what he has heard inwardly with an appropriate appearance. This explains, Winnington plausibly suggests, why Peake was not content to remain an exclusively visual artist: the music of living excited him just as much as its fluctuating shapes did (he acknowledged as much when he called his first poetry collection Shapes and Sounds). In his tenth chapter, ‘Voice’, Winnington shows how the voices of the characters in Peake’s fiction are what give them life: if he did not suffuse a character’s utterances with sufficient energy (think of the manic laughter of Prunesquallor, the resonant but hollow tones of Bellgrove, Irma’s jarring screeches) he never really got them off the ground. The necessity of fusing voice with shape, inwardness with outwardness in what one creates is beautifully summed up in a sentence from the introduction to Drawings, which Winnington cites in his first chapter and at the head of his tenth: ‘Art is the voice of man, naked, militant, and unashamed’. The sentence invokes both the unabashed physical nakedness of the newly created Adam and the ‘militant’ urge to proclaim his triumphant distinctiveness with open mouth – the urge that led to the Fall. And in recalling the Fall of Man as well as the Creation, it hints at the many problems Peake encountered in his own creative process, problems that helped to make that process such a fertile source of narratives for him in the course of his career.

In the first place, the attempt to internalize what one perceives (with either the mind’s eye or the body’s) – to give it life within oneself, before embarking on the arduous task of making that life perceptible to others – seems frequently to have brought home to Peake how often he was unable to penetrate the physical surface of the object of his scrutiny; how often he could not understand the language uttered by another person or thing. One of the effects of the sheer physicality of the heart for Peake is that he is always conscious of the extent to which it is walled in by its cage of ribs, and of the mighty physical force required to wrench that cage apart – an act that stops dead the organ it exposes. It is partly, perhaps, as a result of the difficulty of gaining access to other people’s inward lives – even through the artist’s obsessive stare or careful hearkening after the special timbre of a given voice – that his work is suffused with such an intense sense of isolation.

Loneliness is for Peake both a pleasure and a pain. It is an essential prerequisite for the rapt contemplation that an artist needs if he is to reproduce what he sees outside him or within; but it also cuts him off from other people, imposing on him a fresh awareness of Adam’s condition as an exile. Winnington’s second chapter demonstrates the remarkable pervasiveness of human solitude in Peake’s writings, and links it with the invariably solitary nature of his drawn and painted figures: as he points out, Peake’s pictures very seldom show people in groups. In this chapter, seclusion comes across as an unalloyed delight for most of Peake’s characters, and its interruption tends to destroy the painstaking process of constructing an imaginative environment, a process which is their chief pleasure. But there is a negative form of isolation, too: that of enforced solitude as opposed to solitude freely chosen. And in the third chapter, where Winnington identifies the island as the principal metaphor for solitude in Peake’s work, it becomes clear that an inability to return from freely-chosen isolation is the worst form of seclusion he can imagine, implying as it does an inability to communicate what lies stored in the heart – and above all a sequestration from the most necessary of human emotions, love.

Actual and metaphorical islands crop up in all of Peake’s work, just as they came to dominate his life outside his work. In the great land-mass of China the boy Peake grew up dreaming of islands, with the help of Treasure Island, and on his return to the British isles he quickly formed a lifelong bond with one of the smallest islands in that archipelago, Sark. Intriguingly, Winnington points out that islands are never cut off from the greater land-masses on earth: they are linked, at base, to the solid ground that sustains the world’s oceans as well as the continents bounded by these waters. But the human effort involved in re-forging links between one island and another, or with a continent, is for Peake immense, and accounts for the brittle bridges and dangerous boat-journeys with which his writings and drawings are filled. Unlike Donne, he thought that many men are islands – an effect, Winnington suggests, of Peake’s loss of the faith which sustained his missionary forebears; and attempts to escape one’s status as islander can result in an obliteration of identity as one drowns in a sea of undifferentiated sensory information. But although solitude may be desired as a means of retaining one’s identity, the urge to forge links with others, to commune, to make one’s voice heard, overrides all fear of identity loss. The heart desires to share its contents, and it is this perilous act of communication that his writings and drawings record.

One of the most startling achievements of Winnington’s first chapter is his demonstration of the way that the metaphor of the edge – among which he includes the border, precipice, axis, and the sharp edge of a knife – dominates Peake’s account of the difficult and dangerous artistic task of conveying what is in the heart to one’s viewers or readers. The idea of the island developed in the third chapter helps to make sense of this metaphor: the edge of an island is often a cliff (as on Sark), from which one launches oneself at the risk of one’s life into the unresponsive ocean of the world beyond. Some people’s islands have beaches, Winnington points out, which makes it easier for them to cross the edge or boundary that divides their internal world – the world of the heart – from what lies outside. But in every case, as Treasure Island reminds us, the journey from any island – whether a real one or the metaphorical one that stands for the inward space of the imagination – is fraught with peril, and necessitates a sea-voyage that can result in drowning – that is, in the annihilation of one’s identity. Traversing the edge that separates one being from another can be murderous, and Winnington cites a number of edges in the Gormenghast books and elsewhere that involve death or madness: the edge of the cliff from which Keda flings her- self; the edge of a sill on which Swelter trips (carrying the murderous cleaver to which he has imparted an edge that he hopes will destroy his arch-enemy Flay) and which leads to his impaling at Flay’s hands; the edge of the roof over which Flay and the mad Sepulchrave tip Swelter’s corpse on its way to the Tower of Flints where Sepulchrave will meet his end, and so on. Swelter’s cleaver is a hideous instrument of communion with Flay, the man he loves to hate; Sepulchrave’s dragging of Swelter’s corpse to the Tower of Flints is an attempted act of communion with the owls who live there, and who tear Sepulchrave to pieces for his pains. Communicating, through art or by other means, can result in obliteration; and Peake’s conviction of this makes one wonder if he did not have a premonition of how he would lose his own identity, and with it his ability to communicate even with the people he most loved, at the end of a lifetime dedicated to art.

Swelter without his cleaver

The act that most imperils one’s identity is to fall in love; and the centrality of the heart metaphor to Peake’s work also identifies the centrality of love to his thinking. Winnington is at his most perceptive when talking about love in Peake; both about the difficulty of attaining it – in Peake’s poetry, prose and drama there is never enough love to go around, the emotion is always being ‘used up’ – and of the danger, when one has it, of being overwhelmed, of losing oneself in its intensity, of being drowned in it. The urgency with which Peake’s characters look for love, and their final inability to find a sufficient supply of emotional nourishment, forms the subject of Winnington’s fifth chapter. But the dangers involved in loving other people prove central to the seventh chapter, too, ‘Identity’. Here Winnington shows how Peake’s characters are to a startling extent in love with themselves, their own inner space, their imaginative world, and how this self-love which is so necessary to the artist invariably finds itself in conflict with the love of others – whether parents or lovers. It’s for this reason that Peake’s characters love others so passionately – as if drawing sustenance from this love for the construction of their inner world – while at the same time perversely working to cut themselves off from those they love, to flee from their homes as Titus flees his beloved Gormenghast.

The process of fleeing, it is implied, strengthens the inner life, expands the spaces of the heart, confirms one’s identity. It does this both by showing how one has no permanent need of any specific Other in order to be oneself, and by subjecting one to the pain of loss – which makes it clear as nothing else can exactly what it is one fears to lose. The heart, then, is a highly conflicted environment, in which the need for isolation wars with the need for affection, the love of self with the love of others. And this ‘civil war’ of the heart, as Peake calls it in a poem – this struggle between irreconcilable needs – means that there is also a civil war going on in that product of the heart, Peake’s art; a war which found an unnerving echo in the global war that broke out just as Peake was reaching maturity as an artist.

As stated earlier, for Peake the heart has a dual function. It is the organ that enables an artist to sympathize with – to become one with – what he strives to represent in his art, and it is the thing that makes him himself, the location of his inmost being, his integrity. In a sense, these two functions are at odds with one another. Sympathizing, becoming one with others, involves a capacity for chameleon change which seems to put integrity and even selfhood in jeopardy. The heart has a life of its own, independent of the convictions of its owner, and its willingness to warm to what his head tells him should be spurned is sometimes unnerving. By its very intensity, by its desire to internalize what is stared at, the artist’s gaze can change him utterly; his heartbeat synchronizes with what he sees and makes him in effect one with it. At times one gets the sense that Peake was profoundly horrified by what he was capable of identifying with, by the responses triggered in him by, say, the loveliness of a war-damaged cityscape; or the beauty of a girl dying of consumption in a concentration camp – her suffering being what delights his artist’s eye in the poem ‘The Consumptive: Belsen 1945’; or the fires liberated by the V1s and V2s in The Rhyme of the Flying Bomb. At times the artist in his work acquires the look of astonished self-disgust which he gave to the ‘Self-portrait’ of Hitler he drew for propaganda purposes at the beginning of the Second World War. This portrait is the first of a series of pictures that purported to record the work of Hitler the war-artist, using blitzed cities and dismembered or starved bodies as the media for his monstrous creativity. One ingredient in Peake’s work that Winnington does not discuss in detail (because he deliberately excludes the biographical approach from his analysis) is the role played in its development by the fact that it was written in time of war; but his meticulous account of the working of Peake’s imagination shows better than anything that has been written before why Peake both shunned direct confrontation with the topic of war in the longer works he produced in this period – Titus Groan, his major work as an illustrator, his narrative poem A Reverie of Bone – and why war should nevertheless be seen as having shaped his work in terrible ways.

For Peake, engagement with the effects of war, in the form of its ruins and its human victims, was as dreadful a prospect as failure to engage with it. The first could potentially make him complicit with war’s atrocities – transforming him into a petty version of the artist Hitler in his propaganda drawings, as he took pleasure in the act of giving life to various forms of devastation. The second would convict his heart of having refused to make an adequate connection with the most urgent set of facts in the world he lived in – the one object no artist could fail to stare at as he scanned the English landscape. His conflicted response to this situation – he was desperate to get back to London from the various provincial army camps to which he was banished between 1940 and 1942, yet he was also eager to immerse himself in the spaces of his private imagination, as he scribbled away at Titus Groan in the camps he hated – perfectly matches the conflict Winnington identifies in Peake’s creative heart. In a sense, one could say he was a man born at the wrong time; but isn’t that true of everyone who lives through war? And if he had not lived when he did, would his account of insurrection in Gormenghast have had the power that lifts it so far above so many other English fantasies?

Peake, Muzzlehatch

There is much more in Winnington’s book than I have room to consider here. His chapter on ‘Animals’ argues that animal companions provided one solution to Peake’s fear that his creative solitude might be shattered or taken over by the people he loved. An extraordinary number of his characters adopt such companions, from Captain Slaughterboard with his androgynous Yellow Creature to the Lost Uncle with his surly companion the ‘turtle-dog’ Jackson, or Muzzlehatch with his pet monkey and his zoo of aggressive but affectionate beasts. Animals serve as a safe substitute for people because there is no need to decipher the complexity of their thoughts and emotions, or to adapt oneself more than superficially to their needs. One cannot be taken over by an animal. It’s a lazy way out of an identity crisis, as the pictures of Captain Slaughterboard lounging on rocks with his arm round the Yellow Creature show. On the other hand, once you start to sympathize with animals – no doubt after staring at them for too long – their predicament as helpless slaves of human beings can change you as much as the scrutiny of any man or woman could do. In the army, Peake clearly felt he was being treated like an animal; though it was not until the 1950s, when he wrote Boy in Darkness, that he was able to articulate the full horror of being changed into one. The novella concerns a monstrous lamb who has the power to invade the hearts of human beings and reshape their bodies from within into the forms of tormented animals. The lamb is another appalling manifestation of the despotic artist, like Peake’s Hitler; and the boy Titus almost falls victim to this dreadful beast, a fate he narrowly avoids by cutting it to pieces with the edge of a sword. As Winnington observes, after writing this story Peake never again wrote glibly about the convenience of having an animal companion.

Another extraordinary section of Winnington’s book concerns Peake’s interest in perspective. Winnington writes well about the unusual visual perspectives, and extraordinary shifts in perspective, that Peake adopts in his finest illustrations; but he writes brilliantly about the ways in which Peake transfers these shifts of perspective to his prose style, narrating scenes from the most unexpected chronological position, usually some future point in time towards which the scene in question inexorably tends. I have read few better pieces of close critical analysis in recent years than those in Winnington’s ninth chapter, and shall always be grateful to him for having shown me so clearly how Peake’s prose casts its convoluted spell over its readers.

But for me, the most remarkable transformation the book effected was in my view of Mr Pye, one of the few texts Winnington describes in its entirety rather than in the context of a specific theme or motif. Coming as it does towards the end of the book, the discussion of Mr Pye is a revelation, transforming the novel into one of the high points of Peake’s artistic development instead of what I had always taken it to be: a faintly disturbing piece of whimsy. Themes and obsessions Winnington has carefully shown in preceding chapters to be central to Peake’s thinking here find climactic expression, in a narrative where the history of Peake’s family as missionaries in Madagascar and China comes into startling alignment with his own traumatic experiences: the rise of totalitarianism in Europe, the domination of British culture by political and commercial propaganda, and the question of the role of the responsible artist in a world that seems to have grown indifferent to art.

The essential solitariness of Peake’s protagonists here finds poignant embodiment in the benign-seeming Mr Pye, whose project of exerting a godlike grip over the island of Sark through his missionary zeal to spread the word about his personal divinity, ‘the Great Pal’, bears a striking affinity to Steerpike’s self-appointed mission to seize control of Gormenghast castle. The missions of both men lead them to a crisis of self-induced loneliness in high places: in Mr Pye’s case, at the crest of the island to which he has been driven by an angry mob; in Steerpike’s, on the rooftops of Gormenghast, from which the former kitchen-boy launches his last desperate attack on his aristocratic alter-ego Titus Groan. Winnington does not need to point out how the names Steerpike and Pye play variations on the letters of Peake’s name. Throughout his book he has kept reminding us of how Peake sees the force that drives the artist as a kind of lust for power, a desire to exert control over viewers and readers in the interests of making them share the artist’s vision. Mr Pye is a benign Hitler, whose need for love threatens to overwhelm the identities of the people with whom he comes in contact. Eventually his remorseless pursuit of love and the moral high ground leads him to sprout a pair of wings, which set him apart forever from his fellow human beings. In an effort to free himself from these wings he turns to the intensive contemplation of evil, taking as his template a devilish-looking goat that lives on the island; and inevitably his artistic scrutiny of the beast leads to his sprouting horns. Shocked by the ease with which he can identify with evil – become absorbed by it – Mr Pye ends the book by accepting the isolation imposed on him by his wings, as opposed to the horns he has toyed with. The book ends with him soaring from the edge of a cliff on those same wings, like a diminutive and dapper version of that emblem of artistic inspiration, Pegasus, and disappearing into the distance above the ocean. In Winnington’s account, this becomes a metaphor for the predicament of the artist, whose desire to embrace and communicate the things he sees paradoxically results in his severance from all communities, and whose quest to give expression to love inevitably ends in a loss of love. This places the book a long way from the effervescent holiday reading it has often been taken for – not least, no doubt, because it is an illustrated novel, and illustrated books have always been viewed as light reading in the literary marketplace. Mr Pye is a worthy sequel to the Gormenghast books, and can never be read as a simple jeu d’esprit again.

Towards the beginning of The Voice of the Heart, Winnington writes, ‘There is a sense in which the first two books about Titus Groan recapitulate at great length the development of a work of art (whether visual or verbal) and the third dramatizes its existence in the outer world’. It is a measure of Winnington’s achievement that he ends by convincing us not just of the truth of this statement, but of the fact that this process of developing a work of art is effectively Peake’s topic in everything he writes; that he is in fact one of the great writers about the responsibilities of the artist. Everyone who admires Peake’s work will be delighted by this book; and from now on, nobody who writes about Peake will be able to do so without paying it homage.

Peake, Steerpike

Ursula Moray Williams, Adventures of the Little Wooden Horse (1938)

This was my favourite book when I was eight years old. I know exactly what age I was when I first read it, because I wrote a book of my own that year – The History of the Little Toy Soldier, by R. W. Maslen (as I signed myself then) – and the teacher who commented on it put the date at the end in his beautiful italic hand: 23.3.71. The Little Toy Soldier is a fusion of Hans Christian Andersen’s The Steadfast Tin Soldier and Moray Williams’s novel. The protagonist is made of wood, not tin, and swims the ocean just as Moray Williams’s horse does, losing much of his paint in the process, and many of his other adventures have close parallels with those of his distinguished predecessor. Like Moray Williams’s, my book has a happy ending; this was, in fact, the reason I wrote it. I had been outraged by the dismal fate of Andersen’s toy, and fusing the steadfast tin soldier with the little wooden horse was the perfect way to give him the Happily Ever After I felt he deserved. More interestingly, at least to me, it testifies to the tastes of a middle-class eight-year-old boy at the beginning of the 1970s, when fantasy as a genre was just coming into existence, and when the map of it looked very different from the way it does now. The Little Wooden Horse was central to my imaginative map, and online reviews of this short novel suggest that my love of it was shared by many other readers, and may even have shaped their reading and writing practices as it shaped mine.

The Little Wooden Horse is by no means a Lost Book, at least in Britain. It has been in print since it was first published, and my Puffin edition, reissued in 1963, says it is ‘already fairly established as one of the classic children’s books of this century’. But friends of mine in the United States – people with an intimate knowledge of fantasy for children – have never heard of it, though it had an early American edition. Some of them may have noticed that it’s mentioned in Michael Levy and Farah Mendlesohn’s seminal book on Children’s Fantasy Literature, but there it is described somewhat dismissively as a typical example of a theme that was well established in Britain between the wars, that of the toy-as-servant, the toy that lives only for the sake of serving its owner. The little wooden horse, say Levy and Mendlesohn, is ‘humble and unctuous’, and its servility makes the narrative ‘reminiscent of earlier, nineteenth-century fantasies’.[1] That’s one way of reading it, certainly, though it doesn’t fit the template of nineteenth-century children’s fantasy they provide in their chapter on the subject, which makes a strong case for the Victorian fantastic as deeply embedded in ‘house-based action’, that is, action contained within the limits of the domestic household;[2] the little wooden horse, by contrast, goes on extensive travels before returning to his master. The notion of the toy as an unctuous servant doesn’t work for me either. The wooden horse’s ‘master’ is a poor toymaker with no other servants – not even a real live horse, whose role the wooden horse takes on by carrying the toymaker’s wares from town to town so the old man doesn’t have to carry them himself. Moreover, the wooden horse leaves home because his master has fallen ill, implicitly through poverty; and when you’re roving from job to job in search of employment to save the life of a sick dependent, I’m not sure politeness and obedience can be classified as ‘unctuousness’. I do know that when I read Moray Williams’s book at eight years old it made me cry, and that it stuck in my mind as no other book did at the time (except Edward Lear’s Nonsense Omnibus, but that’s another story). I don’t think I’d have fallen so hard for a mid-twentieth century version of Dickens’s unctuously servile Uriah Heep. I remember that there was a distinctive emotional atmosphere about this story that lifted it out of the ordinary, one that I never found again except in some of Moray Williams’s other books, such as Gobbolino the Witch’s Cat (1942) and The Three Toymakers (1946). In tribute to that atmosphere, and to the deep impression the book made on me, I’d like to consider what makes Adventures of the Little Wooden Horse exceptional among offerings for young readers.

First edition, illustrated by Joyce Lankester Brisley.

Moray Williams’s book is itself a fusion of earlier classics, from the stories about animated objects told by Andersen in his many fairy tales (1835-1874) to the original horse story, Anna Sewell’s Black Beauty (1877), and the adventures of the wooden puppet Pinocchio, introduced to the world by Carlo Collodi in 1883. It has a simple plot, as Kaye Webb points out in her blurb, in which a wooden horse with wheels is made by an old toymaker who then loses his business to mass-produced toys made of tin and china and so falls on hard times. The wooden horse, who works for the toymaker because he loves him, decides he must make some money for his ailing master, and sets out on his titular adventures. These take him from one side of a nameless ocean to the other and through every walk of life, where he encounters kindness, cruelty, thoughtlessness, affection, greed and many dangers, before making his way back to the toymaker carrying a fortune in his little wooden body. If that plot sounds episodic, it is; but the episodes are so cleverly woven together, the adventures so harrowing, and the horse himself such a complex figure, that the effect is little short of epic. I read the Penguin edition of The Odyssey not long after reading Moray Williams’s book, and I now think I may have been led from one to the other by affinities between them.

The little wooden horse is complex, not so much because of his character – he is, as he often repeats in a kind of chorus, ‘a quiet little horse’ who would rather stay at home than seek his fortune[3] – as because of his nature, and the various ways the people he meets respond to it. What exactly is he? A toy? A horse? A person? He can talk like a human being, and is often treated by adults as though he had the human right to be paid for his labour. He has wooden wheels mounted on a platform to which his legs are attached, which makes him a toy, but he can also jump, kick, gallop and swim as well as any horse – though sometimes with unforeseen effects on his wooden body. Sometimes he finds work as a toy – as when a harassed father employs him as a plaything for his many unruly children – and sometimes as a working animal, for instance when he pulls a barge along a canal or joins a group of pit ponies hauling coal in a mine; his size, then, seems to fluctuate along with his identity. He can be broken and mended like any other wooden object, but he also feels pain, which is a quality seldom found in objects.[4] The wooden horse’s versatility resembles that of a child’s imagination, which can slot the same toy into a range of different adventures, but some of the adventures he embarks on are based on a knowledge of working conditions well beyond the scope of most young children.

Cover illustration by Pauline Baynes.

The multiplicity of the wooden horse’s identity means he is subject to the sort of double vision we apply to puppets, as explained by Steve Tillis in the following passage:

the puppet is a theatrical figure, perceived by an audience to be an object, that is given design, movement, and frequently, speech, so that it fulfils the audience’s desire to imagine it as having life; by creating a double-vision of perception and imagination, the puppet pleasurably challenges the audience’s understanding of the relationship between objects and life.[5]

But the Little Wooden Horse is not a theatrical figure, which means that certain abilities he has need to be visualised by the reader rather than staged; and some of those abilities are hard to visualise. How do you gallop when you’re mounted on a platform with wooden wheels? How do you unscrew your own head to put coins in your wooden body for safekeeping? How do you balance on a circus tightrope when you have four wheels, one at each corner of the platform, rather than two wheels in alignment? When your head falls off, how do you go looking for it when you have no eyes to look with? Moray Williams offers no explanation of how these actions are accomplished, which means that the wooden horse’s body seems to exist in a state of flux; your visualisation of it needs to be constantly adjusted to accommodate the needs of each new episode. The horse’s identity, too, is more multiple than can be accommodated by Tillis’s double vision. He is not merely both an object and a being endowed with life, but an object which is also an animal which is also (for certain purposes) a person – as well as being sometimes an adult person and sometimes a child. The work of the reader in imagining the little wooden horse is more complicated than the work of the theatre audience in imagining a puppet to be endowed with life. It requires a more active engagement with or involvement in the story, which may well explain why I chose to write a story of my own after reading the novel; by the time I had finished the last page, Moray Williams had given me a thorough apprenticeship in the challenges of imaginative creation.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

His multiplicity makes the wooden horse rather hard to draw. Moray Williams’s book has been published with illustrations by many different hands, but to me the best are by Peggy Fortnum, who provided the pictures for the first Puffin edition. Fortnum is now best known as the first illustrator of the Paddington books, but her work for The Little Wooden Horse is even better, since it resolves the difficult question of how to picture a living object that can fulfil so many functions. Fortnum eschews the ‘clean line’ favoured by many children’s book illustrators, opting instead for a dynamic, rhythmic style which emphasizes action, and which is perfect for invoking the consequences of action too – the battering and dirtiness that comes from interacting with a rough environment. Fortnum often includes lines on the page which indicate the speed of the horse’s forward motion, or the swishing of his tail, or the lashing of wind and rain as he swims the ocean. She adds dots and more lines to many of her pictures to show the dust and stains accrued by the actions she is depicting. Her pictures are messy, which exactly suits a book which is deeply concerned with the messiness of the life into which its readers, like its protagonist, have been plunged.

Certain qualities of the horse remain stable through all his changes, above all the ones implicit in his name, which is not a name at all but a description. He is the Little Wooden Horse, not Ned or Atlas or Dobbin. That he is a wooden horse helps to make him epic – if you google the name you’ll mostly come up with the siege engine built by the Greeks to get into Troy – but it also ensures he’s always got both an equine quality and a woodenness about him – the woodenness making him as steadfast as Andersen’s toy soldier; he never wavers in his loyalty to his sick maker. He’s also little, and so always represented as smaller than other objects or beings he encounters – other toys, other horses, other people – no matter how his implied size may vary. His size does vary, since at one point he’s large enough to pull a carriage, at another small enough to be carried off by the youngest child in a family and dropped in a stream, but his littleness is always an integral part of him; the barge people, for instance, are astonished at his strength in relation to his size. He encounters other little people in his adventures: a little old woman who takes in Uncle Peder when he falls ill, a miner’s little boy who plays with him in the kitchen of a cottage, the youngest child who drops him in the stream, who is both an ‘honest little boy’ and a careless one (p. 108). Williams’s frequent use of the epithet ‘little’ in her book, above all in the incantatory repetitions of the protagonist’s name, underscores her commitment to the ‘little’ people who ensure things run as they should: from the bargemen and bargewomen who convey necessary articles from A to B to the miners who supply coal for industries and homes and the sailors who transport that coal across the ocean; from the women who run most households to the toymakers who supply goods for their children, and of course the children themselves, without whom any community will soon die out. The Little Wooden Horse is the epic of the little, its title suggests, to be appreciated by readers who have a proper respect for the value of small things.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

(I met with some criticism for using the term ‘little’ too much in my homage to Williams’s novel, The Little Toy Soldier. My teacher said nice things about it, but urged me to make it shorter by ‘cutting out the “obvious” bits’. Above all, he wrote, ‘Avoid the adjectives “pretty”, “nice” and “little”’ – the last of which I used more often even than Moray Williams does. He had a point, of course, but the same rule doesn’t apply to all narratives, and Moray Williams’s book would be a very different affair – a diminished affair, I think – if it had not been so liberally sprinkled with ‘littles’.)

The little wooden horse’s horsiness is confirmed by the many horses he meets at each stage of his journey. Moray Williams and her twin sister Barbara were passionate riders – we’re told they started riding on home-made hobby horses before graduating to actual ponies – and Ursula went on writing about horses throughout her career (there’s a full list of her equestrian stories at this excellent website). The world of the wooden horse is driven by horses; they are its engine and the fuel that feeds it, from the snobbish rocking horse he meets in a nursery to the farmer’s horses alongside whom he works at harvest time, from the powerful barge horses ‘who made the little wooden horse look very small indeed’ to the lazy and jealous pit ponies who leave him to work by himself in a corner of the mine, from the team of kindly white horses which pulls the king’s carriage to the aggressive thoroughbreds at the royal racecourse and the big red hunter he meets at a blacksmith’s forge. Each horse he meets compares the Little Wooden Horse to themselves, often unfavourably, and he is forced to prove his equine credentials by beating them at their own respective games. The rocking horse dismisses him as too scratched and cheap to live in a wealthy household, but its judgment is overturned when its owner, a rich little girl, falls in love with him and asks him to commission an identical wooden horse from Uncle Peder. When he applies for a job with the farm horses the farmer first laughs at him ‘through his great black beard’, but soon stops laughing when he proves his worth by harnessing himself to the heaviest carts and pulling the biggest loads (p. 32). He proves himself as a barge horse, despite his size, by winning a race against the larger barge horses; confirms his worth as a pit pony by rescuing other ponies when a tunnel collapses; puts the whiteness of his painted body to good use when pulling the royal carriage as part of the colour-matched team; and shows himself a genuine racehorse by winning the Golden Trophy for his sponsor, the youngest of the ‘ten little Princes and Princesses’ in the royal family. The only time he fails to prove his worth is in his final horse-related adventure, when he finds himself swimming across the ocean in the company of a horde of angry sea horses, which ‘skimmed over the tops of the waves with such ease that the little wooden horse felt awkward beside them’. One of these ‘lovely little creatures’ demands contemptuously how he dare call himself a horse: ‘Look at you! Are you like a horse, I’d like to know?’ (p. 133); and the wooden horse replies by listing his credentials: he has two ears, two eyes, a mane, a tail, and ‘four strong wooden legs’ (p. 134). It’s the last of these attributes, ironically – the legs that for many readers will define a horse – that convinces the sea horses he is not one of them. ‘Whoever heard of a horse with legs?’ they scream, ‘Why, horses have fins!’ (p. 134). For the rest of this episode the ‘beautiful, wicked sea-horses’ seek to punish him for his temerity in calling himself a horse (p. 135), and he is only rescued by a helpful sailor who hauls him out of the water onto a ship – though the ship is sunk a short time later by the vengeful steeds of the sea, who are still trying to get at the wooden horse and dash him to pieces. The wooden horse manages to evade their attentions as the ship goes down, but his identity has never seemed so precarious. He has been judged and found wanting, at last, by creatures whose own physical form seems to run counter to most widely-accepted definitions of the equine.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

The sea-horses, of course, are quite wrong in their judgement of the little wooden horse, since by this time in the story he has been accepted as authentically equine many times over. Indeed, the many kinds of horse our hero has met underlines an essential truth about equinicity: that it comes in many shapes and sizes, each with its own particular qualities. Even the donkeys the wooden horse finds on a foreign beach are clearly his kin, and he happily takes his place among them to work for a helpful old couple who mended him when he was broken, unconcerned as to whether or not donkeys and horses are (as the dictionary tells us) separate species. Moray Williams was writing, of course, at a time when the discourse of race had been violently thrown into the political foreground by the rise of Nazism; her little wooden horse, then, stands as a refutation of the Nazi doctrine of racial ‘purity’, and the sea horses serve as elegant illustrations of the absurd and toxic rhetoric that underpins it. If the little wooden horse’s identity exists in a state of constant flux, it fluctuates no more than any category or community we seek to define, and definitions themselves are useful only as contingent descriptors, not as zones designed to exclude, condemn or repress those who lie beyond their borders. This is the only conclusion the reader can reach after seeing the protagonist repeatedly dismissed as no horse only to be accepted as one a few pages later; not merely as a horse, in fact, but as the best of horses, whose qualities are worthy of being dispersed throughout society by the manufacture of further copies of our hero, each commissioned from Uncle Peder by a person who has been impressed by his courage, kindness, resilience and honesty. The wooden horse, in other words, is responsible for redefining horsiness all by himself, and offers hope that such positive redefinitions are possible, and can bring about improvements to a world that is rarely as kind or equitable as we might wish.

As crucial to the little wooden horse’s identity as his littleness and his horsiness is the fact that he’s made of wood; and this fact too remains central to the story from beginning to end. We are always being reminded of it, from the moment he’s made – when tears start to flow down his ‘newly painted cheeks’ (p. 11)  – to the final page, when Uncle Peder is busy carving replicas of him (‘wooden legs and wooden heads and wooden bodies’) and painting ‘red saddles and blue stripes on his new horses’ (p. 176), while their original sits quietly in the corner, going over his adventures in his head. The wooden horse’s woodenness makes him more subject to corporeal change than most living humans. Not only does he lose wheels, legs and even his head in the course of his adventures, but he is constantly changing appearance, losing his colours when Uncle Peder can no longer afford to repaint him, getting his wheels encrusted with mud when working at Farmer Max’s farm, turning black and shedding splinters as he labours in the mine, and worrying that if he changes too much Uncle Peder may no longer recognise him when they meet again. His woodenness also means he is not the exclusive work of one artificer. People are always repainting him and replacing his component parts, from the miner who carves new wheels for him with his pocket-knife to the blacksmith who makes him another set of new wheels ‘bound strongly with iron’ (p. 88), from the kind old shopkeeper who replaces a leg he broke in the circus to the donkey man and his wife who find his head and fix it onto his body. Other people ask if they can fix him – such as the ringmaster of the circus where he became a tightrope walker, or the father of the unruly children who pull off his head – but the wooden horse is choosy as to who takes a hand in his construction, unwilling (perhaps) to have his times of trauma built into his person, so to speak, in the form of a replacement limb. Nevertheless, by the end of the book the little wooden horse has become a collaborative artefact, his body assembled from parts and paint supplied by a succession of different makers, to the extent that he can be said to resist, by his continuing existence, the notions of exclusive property and elitist art. We’ll return to this later.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

For all his woodenness and the collaborative nature of his construction, the little wooden horse retains a distinctive personality that could be said to haunt his increasingly battered and mended body like a ghost. We’re told that he has a hollow wooden body, well suited to containing things of all sorts, especially money; but when he gets anxious his heart beats somewhere inside it, ‘pit-a-pat! pit-a-pat!’ (pp. 18, 23, 38). His legs may be anchored to a wooden platform, yet they somehow contrive to work like a horse’s legs all the same: ‘the little wooden horse kicked his legs in the air, so that the four green wheels spun round and round’ (p. 12). When he is mistreated or damaged he gets ‘bruised’ (pp. 26, 139); when he runs a challenging race his ears buzz and ‘stars dance […] before his painted eyes’ (p. 80); when water fills him he fears he ‘shall drown’ (p. 114), and when he swims for a long time his legs begin to ache (p. 135). When he loses his head, a phantom head seems to go on thinking for him: ‘All thoughts of the money he was to have earned had gone out of his head’ (p. 109, my emphasis); and the hole left by the head’s absence puts his imaginary heart in jeopardy: when he hears an unexpected noise ‘His heart nearly jumped out of the hole in his neck’ (p. 110). The wooden horse retains his selfhood, it would appear, through sheer force of will and intensity of emotion, like Italo Calvino’s non-existent knight, who is really just an empty suit of armour with strong views about his duties as one of Charlemagne’s paladins.[6] It’s the wooden horse’s view of himself as a person, as against an object to be bought, sold, used and discarded, that carries him through his adventures, in the quite literal sense that it means he remains ‘him’ – the very same little wooden horse – despite all the changes he undergoes and the different perceptions of him with which he is confronted.

These perceptions are expressed through money: the money he thinks he’s worth; the money people will pay for him, or pay him for services rendered; the money withheld from him; the money he forgoes because it’s not worth the price he must pay for it; the money he loses or finds by chance. His travels are motivated by the quest for ready cash, and this makes the story typical of children’s stories of the pre-war period as diagnosed by Geoffrey Trease, many of which involve treasure hunts (The Midnight Folk, The Happy Mariners and The Hobbit are good examples).[7] But most treasure hunts are relatively straightforward. The process of finding the treasure is the point of the exercise, and the questions of what the treasure is, where it comes from, how it functions and what to do with it are not so important. This is not the case in Moray Williams’s novel, any more than it was in Tolkien’s The Hobbit, which appeared the year before, published by Moray Williams’s uncle Sir Stanley Unwin.[8] The little wooden horse wins his treasure many times over, but loses it again repeatedly, which is part of what makes his adventures so long and hard. When he gets trapped in the mine by a rockfall, ‘nearly all his wages’ fall out of his body as he struggles to free himself and his fellow workers from their underground prison (p. 57). Later, his pay from the circus falls out of the hole which was left when he breaks his leg falling from the tightrope; he only notices the loss when he feels ‘strangely light and empty’ the morning after (p. 98). Work-related injury, Moray Williams seems to be saying, drains a worker’s resources, effectively nullifying the value of any pay they may have received. While swimming the ocean, the wooden horse has to throw away most of his earnings to keep afloat, not to save his own life but that of a sailor who mistreated him (pp. 143-146). Finding treasure or earning money is depicted as a complicated business, subject to the vicissitudes of the market, the character and values of the worker and his employers, and the fluctuations of chance from day to day.

Illustration by Paul Howard.

The Little Wooden Horse, then, is not a simple treasure hunt, though in fact the wooden horse does find treasure on an island in the end, and it’s this treasure that he brings home to Uncle Peder. Even this treasure, however, needs to be earned by strenuous labour. The sailor gives it to him as payment for saving his life, which he accomplishes very nearly at the cost of his own, and certainly at the cost of all the pay he has accumulated before taking to the ocean. The process of getting the treasure is not so simple, either; it turns out that another sailor has a claim to it, and that this additional claim must be considered before the findings can be divided up. For an adult reader, this question of claims may in fact go further than Moray Williams takes it. The treasure has been hidden in a cave by some previous owner – perhaps a pirate; and the sailors who found it have the swashbuckling names of ‘Pirate Jacky’ and ‘Bill Blackpatch’, implying that they may have been involved in shady business at sea themselves. Whose treasure is it really, then – theirs, or the man’s who hid it, or the original owners’ from whom it was probably stolen? In Moray Williams’s novel, money is slippery, escaping from its containers through holes or crannies, getting lost in underground caves and discovered by strangers, or failing to be paid at all despite prior agreements. No one is its ultimate owner; rather, it resembles Bilbo’s Ring in The Lord of the Rings, an object that transfers itself from hand to hand for some devious purpose of its own, a purpose which is unknown to any of its holders, not even those who made it. Its deviousness and instability would have been deeply familiar to the book’s first readers in 1938, after more than a decade of financial crisis and economic Depression.

Money is also seductive, like Tolkien’s Ring. When the little wooden horse first sees the treasure, he responds with all the excitement of a dedicated buccaneer, enchanted by its sensuous beauty and rich abundance:

For all about the cave, in piles and heaps, in caskets, in crates, and in boxes, was such treasure as the little wooden horse had never dreamed of. Piles of golden coins, sparkling jewels, emeralds, pearls, rubies, diamonds – all flashing out of the darkness at the little wooden horse, winking at him with their sparkling eyes, saying, ‘Take us! Fill yourself with us! We are yours!’ (p. 149)

At this point in the narrative the treasure looks less like a reward for saving Pirate Jacky than a temptation to turn aside from his quest to save Uncle Peder. ‘We are yours’ (p. 149), the treasure declares, as if urging the wooden horse to consume it for his own exclusive benefit. The horse responds by loading his hollow body with precious objects:

the little wooden horse without more ado whipped off his head and scuttled round the golden heaps, picking here diamonds, there pearls, there golden coins, till his little body was filled to bursting-point, and he felt so rich he could hardly contain himself. How Uncle Peder’s eyes would pop out of his head at the sight of such a fortune! They would never be in want again! (p. 150)

Here the wooden horse whipping off his head becomes a prelude to yet another near loss of identity. By the time he is full he can ‘hardly contain himself’, which suggests he is on the verge of losing the selfhood he has struggled to preserve throughout his adventures, full of humility, kindness, resilience and concern for his elderly master. For once, he sees himself as surpassing rather than meeting Uncle Peder’s valuation of him; he anticipates the old man’s surprise at finding that his toy is now worth more than anything he has ever seen in his life. Teetering on a tightrope has nothing on this; the wooden horse has almost ceased to be the toy we have known and loved since the beginning of the book, and it’s only the appearance of the sailor Bill Blackpatch, who claims a share of the treasure he carries, that returns him to the values he has always cleaved to: values more stable and long-lasting than pearls or diamonds.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

Elsewhere in the book the little wooden horse’s valuation of himself remains consistent, except on the odd occasion when he loses faith in his own appearance after a particularly damaging adventure. When Uncle Peder made him he judged him at once to be the best toy he had ever crafted, and set his price at exactly five shillings, more than he had ever charged for any of his wares. The villagers to whom he usually sold his toys were taken aback, and tried to convince him to sell the toy for less; but the old man stuck to his price: ‘You see,’ he explained, ‘I have never made such a fine little horse before’ (p. 11). This work of art, then, has a proper value in its maker’s mind, and Uncle Peder never wavers in his assessment of it, even when his customers stop buying his toys in favour of the cheaper toys mass-produced in city factories. In the end, of course, the horse brings him far more than his supposed value, not only in terms of the treasure he contains but also in terms of the many commissions for identical wooden horses with which he returns from his travels; many of the people he has worked for want an exact replica of the toy, person or horse they have fallen in love with, like the rich little girl in his first adventure. Uncle Peder’s integrity in demanding a just price for his labour is more than matched by the horse’s ability to generate income from his own labours; the book makes an economic case for valuing both work and its artefacts properly, and Moray Williams ensures that this principle gets extended – thanks to the horse’s adventures and the friends he accumulates – from the cottage of a miner to the palace of a king.

All the best people in the book never question the wooden horse’s value; he is worth five shillings exactly, no more, no less. The little rich girl to whom he tries to sell himself at the beginning refuses to buy him when she hears about Uncle Peder’s illness, and instead asks him to ask the toymaker to make her ‘a little wooden horse just like you, only quite new, and then my father will give him five shillings for it’ (p. 20). The King commissions ten little wooden horses at five shillings apiece, one for each of his ten little Princes and Princesses. The circus master offers five shillings for a replacement wooden horse to perform in the ring, the miner promises to pay ‘five shillings out of my wages’ for another horse for his son to play with, the kind shopkeeper asks him to send over a ‘dozen little horses like yourself […] and I will pay him five shillings for every one of them’ (though one wonders how much he planned to sell them for), and the father of the five unruly children commissions five ‘particularly strong’ wooden horses at five shillings a head (p. 176). When the barge people agree to carry the completed new wooden horses down the canal and see them safely stowed on a ship for delivery to the land across the ocean, the foundations are laid for a system of supply and demand which is very different from the alienated labour of the industrial revolution. Through the little wooden horse’s adventures, which he tells Uncle Peder in detail, a direct relationship is established between each purchaser of one or more new little wooden horses and the craftsman who constructs them. The solidity of this relationship is guaranteed by the fact that not one of the purchasers quibbles over the asking price; it remains the same at the end of the book as it was at the beginning, which gives the sum of five shillings the quality of a promise, something more stable and substantial than the promise printed on a five pound note to pay the bearer thereof on demand the sum of five pounds in gold. Britain had in fact formally abandoned the gold standard in 1931, which meant that the banknote promise could no longer be honoured. The little wooden horse standard, it would seem, is more reliable than the gold standard among those who are willing to accept it.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

Despite this seeming consensus among the little wooden horse’s friends, his value is not universally accepted. The little rich girl’s fine large rocking horse sees him as an outdated artefact worth only grinding to powder beneath his rockers. The little old woman who takes in Uncle Peder sees the wooden horse as a useless thing left behind by some naughty children who have been hammering at her door (in fact the toy has been trying to gain access to his master). Three times she throws him away – once even flinging him over her cottage roof – and is just about to chop him to pieces when he finally decides to run off and seek his fortune. The sea-horses decide he is a ‘fox’ (p. 135), which is famous for not having anything of value to offer its hunters; its meat and skin are worthless. The sailor who rescues him from the sea-horses is told that the toy is useless to him, since he has no children; and Pirate Jacky, who claims him when the sailor disowns him, puts him away in his sea-chest as a trinket to be sold for pennies at the nearest market. For many of the people who meet him, then, the little wooden horse is not a person, nor even an animal; but several are forced to change their views when their circumstances change. The rocking horse must eat his words when his owner takes the wooden horse to her heart, and is later reduced himself to an outdated artefact, battered beyond recognition by mistreatment at the hands of some more unruly children, the little girl’s cousins. The little old woman changes her opinion when she marries the toymaker, and Pirate Jackie accepts the wooden horse’s personhood when the toy saves him from drowning. The little wooden horse, in other words, can prove his worth by his actions; but his actions alone don’t determine his value, as Moray Williams is careful to show at the beginning of the book, both in the different valuations of him by the girl and her rocking horse and in the challenges to his personhood posed by his very first adventure away from his master, when he goes to work for Farmer Max.

This episode involves a difficult negotiation concerning the little wooden horse’s status as a worker. On meeting some flesh-and-blood horses in a farmer’s field, the wooden horse learns that they earn money by their labour – or rather, that their masters earn money by their labour, since ‘what is money to us?’, the horses ask. The wooden horse, however, wants money ‘very badly’; so he queues up with the horses’ masters to sign a paper ‘agreeing to work for three days for Farmer Max and to accept the payment he offered them’ (p. 31). But his desire to sign the paper prompts general laughter, and when he applies for his wages after three days of graft the farmer asks him: ‘What does a little wooden horse want with money?’, seeking to confirm the farm horses’ view of him as an animal like themselves. It’s the masters of those farm horses who demand that Farmer Max pay the wooden horse, implicitly accepting the toy as an honorary human worker. From this point onwards, the wooden horse’s status as an honorary worker remains a given for much of the book; indeed, this status is one of the reasons the pit ponies hate him, since, as they complain, ‘We don’t get any money! […] We only get kicks and blows!’ (p. 53). But being a worker does not guarantee good wages, job security, or immunity from work-related injury. Farmer Max, for instance, tricks him into working for nothing, and chases after him when he escapes as if he were a runaway animal, incidentally causing him to lose his wages for pulling the barge. Later the wooden horse is injured several times, by a collapsed tunnel at the mine, a vindictive kick from a fellow racehorse, a fall from a circus tightrope and the ‘kicks and blows’ of the unruly children. The pay he gets for his work, too, varies considerably, depending on the wealth of his employer. The king, for instance, pays him gold for drawing his coach, the wealthy man who hires him as a plaything for his unruly children pays him in silver coins (p. 110), while the children who ride him on the beach pay only in pennies – though he gets a silver coin from the donkey man at the end of each day, ‘which is,’ Moray Williams tells us, ‘as much as he had earned from the circus master’ (p. 118). In the end, the little wooden horse gets paid more often than not, and duly earns his fortune in the end through his actions; but the difficulties, griefs and torments he has endured to get that fortune leave the reader under no illusion that this ending was inevitable. Besides, the fortune he eventually acquires is not the result of a conventional contract between employer and employee; it’s as much a matter of chance that Pirate Jacky has the wherewithal to reward him for saving his life as that he should have lost all his wages through a hole in his body after leaving the circus. The world of work is in effect made up of a series of adventures, if we take the term ‘adventure’ in the old sense of ‘chance’ or ‘luck’; and anyone living through the Depression would have been keenly aware that luck or chance – together with a proper recognition on the part of employers of the worth of labour – has more of a hand in getting gainful employment than any special diligence or skill on the part of the worker.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

The little wooden horse’s relationship with money, then, is by no means straightforward. In early twentieth-century children’s fiction, the closest analogy to this relationship can be found in the works of Edith Nesbit and Noel Streatfeild, whose young characters learn through bitter experience how difficult it is to accumulate cash for the relief of their families. Unlike Nesbit’s or Streatfeild’s protagonists, however, Moray Williams’s hero is a work of art, having been made to the highest standards by a master craftsman; indeed, the term ‘master’ as applied to Uncle Peder may well be intended to remind us of the mastery that turned dead wood into a living creature. Moray Williams was herself a visual artist, having trained at the Winchester College of Art alongside her twin sister Barbara; she illustrated several of her own stories, most notably The Good Little Christmas Tree (1943), which is decorated with colourful double-page ‘scissor cuts’ throughout. The question of how an artist can make a living, then, would have been as important to her as it was to her contemporary, Mervyn Peake.[9] For her, works of art did not exist in the rarefied atmosphere of the art gallery or the wealthy private household, but in the busy world where properly remunerated work is as needful as it is hard to get; indeed, The Good Little Christmas Tree articulates the same philosophy, as its protagonist – another object brought alive by the writer-artist’s imagination – is forced to pay for its own decorations by giving up needles one by one till it’s almost bald (fortunately Santa Claus steps in at the last moment to put things right). The Little Wooden Horse seems to me more a story about labour and the value of labour than about servanthood, and duly sets the artist’s or master craftsman’s labour alongside the labour of the farmhand, bargewoman, miner, circus performer, blacksmith, shopkeeper and sailor as part of the same economic system of payment for services rendered.

Moray Williams’s book is itself a beautifully crafted artefact, above all in the construction of its plot. I said earlier that it could be seen as episodic, but each adventure builds logically on the one before, and the there-and-back-again trajectory of the wooden horse’s adventures ensures that each episode is revisited and satisfyingly concluded before the end. The little wooden horse keeps recalling his adventures in a series of reflective ‘choruses’ that always begin with his description of himself as a ‘quiet little horse’, counting and accounting for events as carefully as he counts the coins that go into his body. This draws attention to the structure of the narrative as a journey or odyssey through the British class system, in which the toy that began his travels as a nobody gains recognition for his qualities from a succession of strangers. The book, then, is an inverted Odyssey, since Odysseus was already famous for his exploits (which included devising the Trojan wooden horse) before posing as a man called Nobody to fool the Cyclops Polyphemus. Unlike the wily Greek adventurer, the little wooden horse remains a nobody to the end, and rejects the notion of heroic exclusivity in favour of the more anonymous achievement of having inspired many imitations in the form of new wooden horses, each calculated to improve the lives and luck of the community or household it enters.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

The wooden horse’s adventures follow on from one another and recall one another with the elegance of a piece of music. His first employer, Farmer Max, for example, is directly responsible for the wooden horse’s achievement in beating the other barges in the race to the port, since his pursuit of the wooden horse on horseback stimulates the toy into running faster than any of his competitors. The barge pulled by the wooden horse contains props for a coalmine on the other side of the ocean, and he later finds himself working in that same coalmine. When he reaches the port he gets lifted onto a ship by a crane as a joke on the part of the sailors; he later demonstrates to a sailor that he is more than just a laughing stock by saving the man from drowning. The crane deposits him in the hold of the ship, where he meets a circus elephant with whom he soon makes friends; when next he meets the elephant he is lifted into the air for a second time by a kind of crane, which turns out to be the elephant’s trunk. After rescuing the pit ponies from the mine the wooden horse is taken in and mended by a miner’s little boy, who takes him to the city to see the King, the Queen and the ten little Princes and Princesses, about whom the toy had already heard from the elephant in the ship’s hold. In the city the wooden horse’s skill in pulling heavy vehicles, confirmed by the episode with the barge, is put to service again when he draws the royal carriage; and immediately afterwards his skill in running races is drawn upon for a second time when he runs a race on behalf of the littlest Princess. After his accident at the circus he is rescued again by the miner’s boy, whose father offers to mend him for a second time, an offer he refuses in his hurry to get home, which gives him a reason to seek assistance from an old toymaker who mends him in his shop, a counterpart of Uncle Peder. It’s in the shop that the wealthy man with unruly children spots him, leading to his appalling treatment at the hands of those children; more unruly children appear later when he revisits the rich little girl who fell in love with him near the beginning, because all her fancy toys have been broken by her boy cousins, including the haughty rocking horse who so despised him at the beginning. From the wealthy man’s house he travels to the beach at the edge of the ocean he needs to recross to find Uncle Peder, and here he foils an attempt by a piratical donkey man called Black Jake to steal a donkey from the kind donkey man and his wife, who gave the wooden horse shelter and employment as he waited for a ship to take him home. Later, on the island where he finds himself after rescuing Pirate Jacky, the wooden horse foils what he thinks is a second act of thievery, when he informs the sailor that another man, apparently his double, is trying to steal the treasure. When he meets the barge people for a second time after recrossing the ocean they remember to pay him what they owe him from pulling the barge to the port. Echoes weave through the story like musical themes, binding each part to all the others and establishing the act of remembrance or recollection – that is, of diligent accounting – as a key factor in any healthy personal or financial economy.

The little wooden horse’s last adventure involves yet another act of recollection or accounting. The owner of a horse that was to have drawn the wagonette for a wedding couple as they made their way to their new home claims he has not been paid enough for the job and takes his animal away; the wooden horse promptly volunteers to take its place, offering as his credentials for doing so the fact that he is ‘a strong little horse, and a quiet one’, and inwardly recalling ‘how he had helped to pull the King’s coach round and round the city’ (p. 172). The driver has already said that the married couple are poor, so the wooden horse knows he will not be paid for this act of kindness. This is the only job he has done, in fact, apart from rescuing the sailor, without some formal agreement that it will be remunerated (he earlier offered to work for the donkey-man who mended him for free, but the donkey-man insisted on paying him handsomely). For the wooden horse, working for the King for gold and working for a poor couple for nothing are effectively equivalent; the first makes him suited for the second; and he is duly rewarded for this egalitarian outlook by the discovery that the couple are none other than Uncle Peder and the little old woman. He learns this when he hears the old woman lamenting her mistreatment of him at the beginning of the book; and so his travels come full circle, and he finds himself living happily ever after, not in the palace – where he could easily have stayed – but in a cottage, which the story has made more attractive than any palace by the intensity of the little wooden horse’s yearning for it throughout his adventures.

Illustration by Peggy Fortnum.

In the cottage at the end of the book Uncle Peder institutes a new kind of economy, made possible by the treasure his toy has brought him. Thanks to that treasure the old man does not need to go on working, but he chooses to do so, and thereby links himself to the world the wooden horse has now explored. Uncle Peder fashions toys for all the children and adults who have requested them on both sides of the ocean, listing them carefully in his mind before he begins; and although he is presumably paid five shillings for each of these new wooden horses, he goes on to fashion additional toys for little or nothing. ‘Uncle Peder,’ Moray Williams tells us, ‘could now make toys to his heart’s content, but only for those children who pleased him, or for those who had none of their own’ (p. 176). The little wooden horse may not have triggered a revolution, but in a small way he has rocked the principles behind the capitalist system, since he has enabled an artist to work the rest of his life for the love of his craft and the love of children.

The little wooden horse has put his own special skills as a horse and a toy to generous use throughout his travels; for instance when he volunteered to run a race for the littlest Princess, who had no racehorse to run for her, or when he ‘took Pirate Jacky’s coat […] between his wooden teeth and began to swim with him’ (p. 143). He has also made his own stand against the principles of free market competition. When he catches the sailor trying to steal Pirate Jacky’s treasure he afterwards learns that the would-be thief is none other than Bill Blackpatch, who discovered the treasure with Pirate Jacky years before. Bill Blackpatch therefore has a good claim to half of it; but this does not stop both men getting into a fight over which of them should have the lot. Young readers in 1938 would have been thoroughly familiar with such fights on a larger scale; the Spanish Civil War had been going on for three years by the time the book appeared, Japan had gone to war with China the year before, and 1938 saw the invasion of Czechoslovakia by Hitler’s Germany. What these larger fights needed was a wooden horse to resolve them, and of course a willingness to accept a resolution. The wooden horse quickly settles the dispute between Pirate Jacky and Bill Blackpatch by proposing that they share the treasure between them, and the sailors have the good grace to agree to his ‘very sensible argument’, despite their piratical names (p. 156). Peace is restored, and the little wooden horse is permitted to travel on in Pirate Jacky’s boat towards his own special happy ending. Unfortunately the world in which Moray Williams lived did not do the same.

Nevertheless, in writing The Little Wooden Horse Moray Williams may have sown the seeds in some young readers’ hearts of a better settlement than the one they would shortly live through – the settlement reached through bloodshed at the close of the Second World War. Her little book remains well worth reading in our own times, when fascistic thinking is on the rise and we have great need of sensible arguments and friendship from strangers.

NOTES

[1] Michael Levy and Farah Mendlesohn, Children’s Fantasy Literature: An Introduction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2016), p. 95.

[2] Levy and Mendlesohn, Children’s Fantasy Literature, p. 38. The phrase is Colin Manlove’s.

[3] See Ursula Moray Williams, Adventures of the Little Wooden Horse, Young Puffin (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1963), p. 11. All references are to this edition.

[4] Williams is a little inconsistent as to the wooden horse’s capacity for pain. When he breaks his leg in the circus we are told that ‘Fortunately, having only wooden legs, the little wooden horse was not in pain’ (p. 95); but earlier, when a little old women flings him into the forest, ‘his wooden body […] smarted and ached’ (p. 24), and when he’s chased by some delinquent sea horses in the ocean ‘His wooden legs ached; he could no longer feel his wheels, and longed to rest a little on the surface of the sea, till his breath returned’ (p. 135). His pain, I believe, depends on his state of mind.

[5] Steve Tillis, Toward an Aesthetics of the Puppet (New York etc.: Greenwood Pres, 1992), p. 65.

[6] See Italo Calvino, Our Ancestors, trans. Archibald Colquhoun (London: Pan Books, 1980), pp. 285-382.

[7] Levy and Mendlesohn, Children’s Fantasy Fiction, p. 99: ‘the treasure hunt […] Geoffrey Trease identified as one of the key tales of children’s fiction’; it ‘lacks the import of the quest’.

[8] The question of who owns or deserves the treasure stolen by Smaug is central, of course, to the last scenes of Tolkien’s novel. The treasure in The Midnight Folk is not so simple either, come to think of it; it belongs to the Church and people of Santa Barbara, a fictional country in South America, and its loss by the protagonist’s great-grandfather has left his spirit restless until it can be restored to its rightful owners. Perhaps treasure hunts in children’s fiction need more attention?

[9] Peake was born, like Moray Williams, in 1911.

Gerald Bullett, The Spanish Caravel (1927), reissued as The Happy Mariners (1935)

One of my favourite illustrations in The Hobbit (1937) is Tolkien’s drawing of the three trolls, Tom, Bill and Bert, hiding behind trees as a dwarf approaches the fire they have built in a wood.[1] The wood stands, we’re told, in a disreputable country not far from the Misty Mountains, to which policemen and map-makers never go and where people have never even heard the name of the king. This is the location of Bilbo’s first adventure after leaving home and the first time he acts as a burglar; he has been hired in this capacity to help steal back the treasure of the dwarves, stolen long before by a dragon. It is also the first time the dwarves let themselves get caught by one of their enemies. Bilbo’s expertise as a burglar steadily grows as the adventure continues after this episode. The dwarves, on the other hand, don’t seem to learn anything at all from this first experience of captivity. They get caught again in the Misty Mountains by goblins, in Mirkwood by spiders, and in Mirkwood a second time by their tetchy old foes the Wood-Elves. On one occasion they are even caught in exactly the same way as they were by the trolls: they see firelight in the distance, assume correctly that where there’s fire there’s food, and hurry towards it without taking the most basic precautions, letting their stomachs do their thinking for them. Confusticate and bebother these unteachable dwarves, as Bilbo might well have put it.

This first episode in the hobbit’s adventures – the meeting with the trolls – contains in miniature all the rest. It involves fire, woods, mountains (at a distance), meetings with dangerous creatures, a bit of magic, a good deal of trickery, and some shenanigans with pockets (Bilbo tries to pick a troll’s pocket and gets caught because the purse he lifts is able to talk; pockets or pocketses also play a central role in his later meeting with Gollum). It even involves treasure, since Bilbo and the Dwarves afterwards find the trolls’ cave, which is full of food, gold, unpleasant smells and some useful swords. With the swords is the long, keen knife Bilbo christens ‘Sting’, which he uses to rescue the dwarves when they are caught by giant spiders in Mirkwood. In that later rescue he copies Gandalf’s trick of enraging his enemies with his voice while keeping himself hidden, which suggests again that the hobbit learns from his adventures. Thanks to his growing knowledge, Bilbo grows in stature as the novel progresses, reflecting the growing confidence of the novice reader who follows his journey to the Lonely Mountain (and back again, of course), as charted by Francis Spufford in The Child That Books Built.[2]

The illustration Tolkien drew for this adventure is dominated by trees: long boles in foreground and background, with a bright fire in the middle ground, slightly right of centre, from which smoke rises in baroque curls above stylised flames. There are very few branches visible; the trees are mostly shown as a cluster of trunks standing closely together. There are various items by the fire: the barrel from which the trolls have been serving out beer, a stone for sitting on (or is it a sack?), a jug, two bowls. In the foreground a dwarf with a hood approaches the fire. At least, Tolkien tells us in the text that the dwarves wore hoods, but this one wears something more like a hat as modelled by the dwarves in Disney’s Snow White (1937), which wasn’t released in the UK until 1938, the year after The Hobbit was first published.

From behind the tree trunks in the background three trolls peer out; they have prominent eyes and pointed ears set high on their heads, like the eyes and ears of cats. I remember thinking as a child that the trolls didn’t look much like the way I’d imagined them; too slim, their heads too large in proportion to their bodies, and the text never mentions those pointed ears.[3] The trees, on the other hand, were wonderful. The ones in the foreground are drawn in broken and unbroken white lines against a black background, while the ones behind are textured with white dots on black, reversing the black dots on white with which Tolkien decorates the ground around the fire; this mixture of line-work with pointillism gives the drawing tremendous energy. Three of the trees have vines curling up them, neatly echoing the curls of smoke rising from the fire. I also liked the way Tolkien put a triple border round the picture, just like an Edwardian picture frame, with the title displayed at the bottom as if on a plaque. This was something I tried to emulate in my own finished drawings at the age of seven or eight.

More recently I’ve been reading a novel for children by Gerald Bullett, The Spanish Caravel (1927), republished in 1935 as The Happy Mariners with illustrations by the celebrated artist and theatrical scholar C. Walter Hodges.[4] Bullett’s novel was well known in his lifetime; my 1956 edition tells me it had been reprinted three times, and the illustrations by Hodges are wonderful work, on a par with his much-loved illustrations for Elizabeth Goudge’s The Little White Horse (1946). These days any reader will find the book offensive for its representation of Pacific Islanders as a horde of ‘comic’ cannibals who speak a nonsense language; the fact that those islanders are clearly intended to parody British childhood fantasies of adventure in far-off places modelled on imperialist stories tailored to middle-class boys does nothing to soften the racism. But the novel is also full of passages of beautiful prose – something Bullett was well known for in his lifetime. And its central character, a ten-year-old girl called Elizabeth Robinson, could be considered a curious example of British male attitudes to girls just before the Equal Franchise Act of 1928 – better known as the Universal Franchise – which finally granted women the vote on the same terms as men in the United Kingdom. I’ll have more to say about this in a moment.

Most importantly for my purposes in this blog post, however, one of Hodges’s illustrations looks remarkably like Tolkien’s drawing of the trolls. This is a picture titled ‘Night in the Forest’, on p. 119 of my edition, almost exactly halfway through the book. The parallels are striking. First, the trees: long boles in the foreground and background, with a bright fire in the middle ground, once again slightly right of centre, from which smoke rises in billows and curls more naturalistically depicted than in Tolkien’s drawing. Once again there are very few branches visible, and the trees are standing close together, rising from the bottom to the top of the picture like the bars of a cage. People, not objects, are visible by the fire, one sitting, one lying half raised on their arms; it’s hard to tell which of the four children in Bullett’s book they represent. In foreground and background, occupying the place of Tolkien’s dwarf and three trolls, are the shapes of big cats: eight cats in all, counting the one that’s only visible thanks to its glowing eyes in the dense shadows at the left in the foreground. In Bullett’s text the creatures are not specifically cats but ‘beasts of prey’ (p. 117); Hodges has chosen to interpret them as feline, which is interesting considering the feline appearance of Tolkien’s trolls, with their pointed ears and large, glowing eyes so unlike the description in his narrative. Hodges’s picture, like Tolkien’s, is given texture by the juxtaposition of white on black and black on white, with black predominating throughout, as you might expect in a night scene. Like Tolkien’s, the picture is surrounded by a frame of three parallel lines, and like Tolkien’s its title is given underneath, inscribed on what looks like a brass plaque. So many parallels, it seemed to me when I first saw the picture, could hardly be a coincidence, and I’m inclined to believe that still, though I have little concrete evidence to back this up.

In theory, of course, Tolkien could have read The Happy Mariners, and his youngest son Christopher and daughter Priscilla were of an age to enjoy the edition illustrated by Hodges, which came out in the year when Christopher turned eleven and Priscilla turned six. Bullett’s child protagonists are twelve, twins of ten-and-a-half, and seven, which tallies nicely with the ages of Christopher and Priscilla, as does the fact that there are three boys and a girl in the fictional family, which matches the composition of Tolkien’s actual one. Beyond this, Bullett’s novel has little in common with The Hobbit, apart from the fact that it includes a meeting with anthropophagic people, that is, people who eat other people (though the trolls in The Hobbit are not strictly cannibals, since they are clearly identified as a different species from the beings they eat). There’s much more in it, however, that aligns with the fiction of C. S. Lewis, Tolkien’s best friend in the 1930s; again, I’ll have more to say about this later. Could Lewis, I wondered, have recommended the book to Tolkien, or vice versa? Sharing views on fiction, especially fiction with a fantastic aspect, was common practice among the Inklings, the informal literary circle that met at the Eagle and Child pub and elsewhere in Oxford throughout that decade, of which Lewis and Tolkien were the principal members.[5] Bullett is exactly the kind of writer who would have interested them, even if they might not have agreed with his ‘liberal socialist’ politics; he wrote Christian apologetics, among other things, and poetry of a slightly old-fashioned kind, the kind of which they might have approved. Moreover, one of the novels Bullett wrote in the 1930s was about Adam and Eve (Eden River, 1934), a mythic story Lewis took up nine years later in his second science fiction novel, Perelandra (1943); he might well have read Bullett’s story with attention. The Happy Mariners was another story that contained material potentially attractive to the Inklings, above all in its use of fantastic tropes and dreamscapes made real, as well as in its rich deployment of literary allusions.

In the opening chapter of Bullett’s book, the Robinson family is visited by a strange man who brings a gift for one of the children – Elizabeth – which turns out to be a ship in a bottle. The children take the ship to a pond in a brickfield (a site where bricks are made) and launch it in its glass container, then throw stones at the bottle to free the craft from bondage. As soon as the glass breaks the children find themselves at the edge of a high cliff, looking down on a full-scale version of the vessel floating in the sea beneath them. After managing to get on board, they learn that the ship is in fact a Spanish caravel which has been captured by a solitary English mariner, who wakes up after a sleep of three hundred and fifty years or so and helps them steer it across the ocean to an uninhabited island. The island closely resembles an island the children drew on a map at the beginning of the novel to provide a focus for their games. As they explore the place they find that all the details they included on the map are present, from a log cabin for shelter to a trail of footprints and a trove of buried treasure, which includes cake and a large stone sundial. Also present are some comic but threatening pirates and some comic but friendly Pacific Islanders, and the novel ends, after various adventures, with the defeat of the first and the bequeathal of the treasure to the second (with strict instructions to bury it again at a site of their choosing). The children then return home in the caravel. In the course of the journey the mariner who helped them sail it returns to his long sleep, and having got them safely home the ship returns to the size it was at the beginning of the story, ‘eight inches from prow to stern’ (p. 248). The novel, in other words, describes a there-and-back-again trajectory, which is the only other thing it has in common with The Hobbit.[6]

Bullett’s book holds many echoes of earlier fiction for children. The fact that there are four child protagonists – three boys and a girl – recalls the plural child protagonists of Edith Nesbit’s novels, and the magic that takes place in a claypit used for making bricks may remind us of the industrial sandpit in which Nesbit’s four children (not including the baby) discover the Psammead in Five Children and It (1902). Bullett’s frequent shifting of point-of-view between one child and another similarly recalls Five Children and It, as does the humorous tone of their frequent squabbling. The Elizabethan sailor awakened after long sleep recalls Nesbit’s rudely-awakened Psammead, a sand-fairy who grants the five children their wishes, all of which come true with awkward consequences unforeseen by the wisher; the sailor is much less grumpy than the sand-fairy, and the magic he and his ship unleash is less awkward in its effects, but the parallels are clear enough. The island, meanwhile, has much in common with the Neverland of J M Barrie’s novel Peter and Wendy (1911). Barrie tells us that the Neverland is based on the map of a child’s mind, which nearly always takes the shape of an island,

with astonishing splashes of colour here and there, and coral reefs and rakish-looking craft in the offing, and savages and lonely lairs, and gnomes who are mostly tailors, and caves through which a river runs, and princes with six elder brothers, and a hut fast going to decay, and one very small old lady with a hooked nose. (p. 73)[7]

The mixture of adventure story and fairy story in this description exactly matches Bullett’s ‘island of the map’. So too does the fact that Barrie’s Neverland has different contents depending on which child is dreaming it. ‘Of course the Neverlands vary a good deal’, Barrie tells us, so that John’s has a lagoon with flamingos flying over it, for instance, while Wendy’s has a ‘house of leaves deftly sewn together’ (p. 74). Bullett’s island, by contrast, is a response to the collective imaginations of the four children who drew the map on which it is based; but the different children each have specially tailored adventures on it. The youngest child, for instance, seven-year-old Martin, finds his way at night into a ‘Forest of Fairy Tales’ which none of the other children encounter (Chapter 14), though they get taken home in the end by a friendly cuckoo he met on this solitary adventure – remembered, perhaps, from Mrs Molesworth’s The Cuckoo Clock (1877). The island also contains elements from Stevenson’s Treasure Island (1881-1883), most obviously in the siege of the log cabin by pirates, which invokes the siege of the stockade in the earlier novel (the eldest child, Rex, ‘had just been reading Treasure Island’ before the book begins, p. 2). The footprints leading to the treasure recall the famous footprint in Robinson Crusoe (1719), a book which is also invoked by the children’s surname; and the attack on the pirates by the Pacific Islanders recalls a similar attack in R. M. Ballantyne’s The Coral Island (1857), as do the many lavish descriptions of tropical vegetation. All these echoes of earlier fiction for children must be deliberate, I think, and suggest that Bullett read the map of children’s minds as dominated by their reading, supplemented by conversations with adults, especially their businessman father. Even the Elizabethan sailor, Phineas Dyke, comes from an episode in British history much read about by British children in the age of imperialism: the defeat of the Spanish Armada in 1588. Phineas’s awakening from long sleep summons up the many characters from history brought back to life by the fairy Robin Goodfellow in Rudyard Kipling’s Puck of Pook’s Hill (1906) and its sequel, Rewards and Fairies (1910), to tell their stories to two British children, just as Phineas tells the story of his capture of the real Spanish caravel to Bullett’s child protagonists. The Happy Mariners reads in fact like a journey through a library; the kind of journey recounted by Walter de la Mare in his first novel, Henry Brocken (1904), which tells of its protagonist’s travels in the ‘Rich, Strange, Scarce-Imaginable Regions of Romance’.

The originality of Bullett’s story derives from its passages of rich description, a series of dreamy set pieces which mark it out as a novel written after the advent of Freudian psychoanalysis.[8] Each of these passages is sensually vivid, but also self-evidently unrealistic, full of details that can’t be explained by conventional logic. Here, for instance, is Elizabeth’s first impression of life on the ship:

She had known every inch of the ship so well when the ship was in its bottle that she was filled with astonishment at finding everything a thousand times bigger. Here was the half-deck, higher by four feet than the other; here, on their swivels, were the two guns (faulcons, as Father had called them); and here was the cook’s galley. All was exactly as her father had shown her, and as she herself had seen when, with the ship in her hand, she had studied and admired its every part. The beams of the deck were slippery; two or three times she nearly lost her footing, and once only saved herself from falling by clutching at a gigantic coil of rope, rope thicker than her arm in a coil as tall as herself. The great lantern that swung and swayed half-way up the mizzen mast held her attention for a wondering moment. How did it come there, and who had lit it? Perhaps Rex had found it in the course of his explorations. The question did not occupy her for long, for she was enraptured with the taste – the salt and tarry taste – of this adventure; the sight of stars moving overhead; the feeling of the ship, like a live thing, under her; the rhythm and music of the ploughed sea; the sound of the canvas that was like the beating wings of a gigantic bird. She felt that she, like a queen, was riding the ship, and that the ship was riding the sea, and that the sea itself, with its myriads of leaping waves, was racing round the world. Speed and air, music and starshine, were  mixed in one glorious cup for her. (p. 54)

The passage mingles accurate marine vocabulary – half-deck, faulcons, cook’s galley, beams and so on – with elements of arrant fantasy, such as the sudden growth of an eight-inch model of a ship into a craft ‘a thousand times bigger’, or the fact that a lantern is somehow burning on the ship’s mizzen mast without having been lit by anyone (though there may be a rationale for this – ‘Perhaps Rex had found it’). Elizabeth’s attempts to rationalise the lantern get quickly subsumed by her enjoyment of the sensory richness of her adventure; it has a ‘salt and tarry taste’, the stars look as though they are moving along with the ship, the ship’s movements make it feel ‘like a live thing, under her’, the sea sounds like music, while the flapping of the sails sounds like the wings of a giant bird – everything around her is endowed with life by each of her senses in turn and together. Her intense sensory awareness convinces her that she can feel the sea itself ‘racing round the world’ – which it may well be, though the ability to sense that world-encompassing motion could be regarded as a supernatural gift. The passage ends with the idea that all her senses together contribute to her general delight, the ‘glorious cup’ from which she is drinking. Delight trumps conventional logic, then, on Elizabeth’s maiden voyage, despite (or because of) the promise of imminent danger held by the faulcons on their swivels.

Part of the dreamlike aspect of this passage derives from the fact that it’s written from the perspective of a young girl of the 1920s. Elizabeth’s delight in the ship stems from a fascination with maritime adventure which makes itself felt in the careful study she has made of the model gifted to her by a kindly-eyed sailor. The model’s release from its glass bottle and expansion to full size enables Elizabeth to realise her dreams of adventure, a dream stimulated, it would seem, by the books she has read – the books I’ve listed, some of which are directly referenced in the text. All these books are directed at boy readers rather than girls, but Elizabeth finds a way of reading against the grain to incorporate details from those books into her games with her siblings. For instance, she’s the one who draws the outline of the island on the children’s map, after a first abortive attempt by her younger brother; she’s also the one who first and most vividly brings the ship to imaginative life: ‘In fancy she sailed under a copper sky down a broad river that ran through the dark and sleeping forest; she saw panthers gliding among the trees, and monkeys leaping from branch to branch pelting each other with coconuts, and scarlet parrots that started screaming at her ship’s approach’ (p. 16); and it’s from her imaginings that her male siblings get inspiration: ‘Her brothers […] caught fire from her eyes’ (p. 19). She’s the one who succeeds in breaking the bottle with a well-cast stone, ‘though it is notorious that girls can’t throw straight’ (p. 23), and thereby wins the captaincy of the craft inside; and she knows more about that craft than the other children (‘“You seem to know a lot about this ship,” said Rex, almost complainingly. “You haven’t been on her before, have you?”’, p. 35). By the time we read the paragraph I’ve just cited, Elizabeth is both captain and ‘queen’ of a captured warship, leading her siblings on a quest to an unknown island of their own invention. She’s in a position, in other words, which outside this book she could only dream of, and her delight in riding the ship around the world is intensified, one might guess, by the fact that she could never enjoy these experiences under ordinary, non-magical circumstances.

At the same time, however, Elizabeth is constantly being relegated in Bullett’s novel to roles traditionally assigned to women under patriarchy: looking after her younger brother, cooking in the ship’s galley, being sent below when a storm blows up at sea while her brothers help man the vessel, sewing clothes in the log cabin and so on. Yet she is steering the ship when the children first encounter the pirates, takes an active part in the defence of the log cabin during the siege, and befriends the chief of the Pacific Islanders, thereby saving herself and her siblings from the evil designs of the buccaneers. Elizabeth, in fact, is a kind of in-between figure, both capable of acquitting herself well in situations formerly reserved for boys, and unable to free herself from the narrow range of roles available to young girls in her lifetime, above all as future wives and mothers. Elizabeth’s delight in the ship shows her to be willing and eager to embrace roles far beyond this narrow range, but she sometimes accepts the limitations imposed by men, as embodied by her oldest brother. That brother’s name – Rex, which is Latin for king – seems to identify him as more ‘naturally’ worthy of a leadership role than she is, despite her own name’s connection to a woman who famously had the ‘heart and stomach of a king’; and when the children land on the island Elizabeth soon hands over the captaincy to Rex. She occupies a liminal position, neither equal with her brothers (despite the promise of equality held out by the Equal Franchise Act of 1928) nor willing to accept her unequal status.

It’s for this reason, perhaps, that Elizabeth often seems most aware of the rules that govern the ‘salt and tarry’ adventure in which the children find themselves caught up. For instance, when the model ship first changes size she suggests, ‘Perhaps […] it was a big ship all the time, really. But we couldn’t see it. It was in the bottle, and the bottle was magic’ (p. 51). Later, when they discover the log cabin on the island in exactly the place they put it on the map, she suspects at once that it came into being when they imagined it:

‘Why, it might have been built yesterday,’ said Guy, ‘by the look of it.’
‘Perhaps it was,’ said Elizabeth thoughtfully.
‘What on earth do you mean?’
Elizabeth shook her head. ‘I don’t know.’ (p. 139)

Later still, she thinks she understands how and why Phineas unexpectedly vanished from the island and reappeared on board the caravel:

‘He belongs to the ship, don’t you see? He’s lived on her for three hundred years. It’s his home, and he’s helpless and kind of lost anywhere else. That’s why he came back, I’m sure. He just forgot all about us and went back to his old ship without quite knowing what he was doing. Like people walking in their sleep.’ (p. 242)

Elizabeth’s in-between state, not bound to the rules of ‘realistic’ adventure stories as her older brother is (the younger boys abide by different rules, as we’ll see), makes her at ‘home’ on the ship and the island, as he is not. She rarely gets worried or frightened, as the boys do, and finds herself able to sympathize both with the wicked pirate chief when they pick him up at sea and with the chief of the Pacific ‘cannibals’ when she finds him injured outside the cabin; in fact, her willingness to set aside convention to make friends with the latter ensures that their adventure gets a happy ending. Thanks to her experiences as a girl in a society dominated by men, she is acutely conscious from the start that the children are engaged in events that have little to do with the rules of physics or social conventions – though those rules and conventions are always at work behind the scenes. In the end it seems clear that the whole adventure could not have happened without Elizabeth’s involvement, and in this she is closely related to Barrie’s Wendy, for whom Neverland and all its adventures are engineered by Peter Pan; though Elizabeth’s greater agency is reflected in the fact that she engineers the island for herself by sketching out its contours in the opening chapter. That the adventure is predominantly Elizabeth’s is also suggested by the fate of the pirate chief, who has his head cut off by Phineas in single combat on the deck of the caravel, but spouts only sawdust from his injuries, making it clear that he cannot feel them and so no longer needs Elizabeth’s sympathy (which she bestowed on him freely on his earlier visit to the vessel). The sawdust conveys the fact that the whole adventure was only ever a brief holiday from ‘real life’, and that this interval of play – when living and breathing human beings can be filled with sawdust like a child’s dolls – will soon be over, giving way once again to the world we call ‘real’. Of all the children, Elizabeth seems most aware of the evanescence of the adventure, since she has most to lose by its coming to an end. She’s the first to note, after the pirate chief’s beheading, that they will likely be home in time for tea (p. 246); but she is also the last to leave the island, lingering as long as she can to say goodbye to her friend the chief of the Pacific Islanders (pp. 236-7). Her in-betweenness persists to the novel’s final page.

Interestingly, the boys in the story too exist in an in-between state, caught both between childhood and adulthood and between conventionally ‘male’ and ‘female’ attributes. The eldest boy, Rex, is the most maddeningly masculine of the three, constantly seeking to assert his greater knowledge and strength over those of his siblings. He addresses his youngest brother, Martin, as ‘my lamb’ (p. 6), telling him that ‘When you’re a bit older’ he’ll learn to fear pirates as well as yearn for them. On one occasion he calls his other brother Guy ‘my little man’, like a tiresome adult, while ‘thrusting two hands mannishly into his trouser pockets’ and giving ‘a scornful laugh that was very impressive’ (pp. 17-18). At the same time, Rex is not yet wholly given over to the patriarchy, since he is willing to cede his ‘natural’ place as leader from time to time by consenting to the best ideas of his brothers and sister: ‘That was the pleasant thing about Rex,’ Bullett tells us; ‘even though he was the eldest he was never above taking suggestions from the others’ (p. 6). His genial compliance derives, no doubt, from his secure position as presumptive leader of the Robinson children.

The youngest boy, meanwhile – Martin – lives equally in his imagination and the material world, being wholly devoted to his older sister, his cat Fandy, and a broken cuckoo clock he treats as a toy. Unlike Rex he is not yet fully aware of the distinctions between his dreams and desires and the reason-based universe adults expect him to inhabit; and this is best exemplified by his solo adventure in the ‘Forest of Fairy-Tales’ to which he finds his way on the island, where he meets a dwarf who offers him three wishes in time-honoured fashion (pp. 152-4). Martin has just passed a beautiful orange tree in the forest, and wishes for that; at once he finds it growing next to him, and his next wish is to be able to take it away with him when he goes home. The dwarf suggests he carry it away in a pot, but Martin is horrified: ‘But it won’t be the same in a pot!’, he cries in distress. The dwarf then offers him the forest as well, to keep the tree in its ideal context; Martin agrees at once, and his second wish is duly granted. After this, Martin pauses to consider his final wish. He would like, he says, to eat the oranges, but also doesn’t want to ‘spoil the tree’ by plucking them. Unfortunately the dwarf ignores the second part of his wish and plucks all the fruit, after which ‘The tree was bare; the oranges lay scattered on the ground’, and Martin finds himself ‘on the verge of tears’, realising that the tree he loved no longer exists in the state that made him fall in love with it. Martin’s desires, he learns, are unattainable in the ‘real’ world, something that’s made clear to him through his inability to formulate his wishes satisfactorily (shades here, again, of Five Children and It). In recompense the dwarf offers him one more wish – forgetfulness – and Martin at once forgets the lesson; perhaps Bullett thinks him too young, as yet, to have learned it. The youngest Robinson goes on to have other fairy-tale adventures that night – in a snow-bound village where he meets the cuckoo from his broken cuckoo-clock and Cinderella – and he tells his siblings all about them when he gets home; but he never again mentions the vexed conundrum of the orange tree.

All the same, there are hints elsewhere in the text that Martin is fully aware at times of the disconnect between his desires and the ‘actual’ world he lives in. When the children first come aboard the life-size ship, Martin quickly learns he may not be much help in its handling. ‘I’ve got a feeling I’m not going to like this trip very much,’ he tells his sister. ‘I wanted to help with the ship, but they said I was too little’ (p. 59). Soon afterwards he adds, ‘I think it would be rather nice to go home. You could come too, couldn’t you? They don’t want girls here, you know. As Rex said, this is a man’s job’ (pp. 59-60). Martin is, in fact, the only one of the brothers who directly recognises the convention that makes Elizabeth an unusual member of a ship’s crew, and he does so because he finds himself in the same position; unlike the older boys he cannot pretend to be a man. It takes all of Elizabeth’s ingenuity to persuade him that they can’t go home in the ship’s boat, rapidly explaining that ‘it was impossible, that she couldn’t row, that it would spoil the fun, that she must stay with her brothers, and that Martin was going to have the time of his life on the Resmiranda’ (p. 60). If Martin, at his young age, is tied to convention, Elizabeth has the wherewithal, here as elsewhere, to find imaginative ways around it.

Rex, then, is almost a maddening sort of man and Martin is very definitely a child; but the middle brother, Guy, is more ambiguous in his role. First, he is Elizabeth’s twin, and very fond of his sister – something that Rex finds it necessary to tease him about from time to time (‘real’ men, in Rex’s opinion, don’t side with girls in every family disagreement). His relative plumpness makes him less suited to the ‘male’ life of high adventure; when he slides down the rope that leads from the cliff-top to the newly life-size ship, his weight causes the rope to break and he falls into the sea, which means he is forced to spend the first few hours on board without his clothes as he waits for them to dry; a humiliating situation for any would-be mariner. His position in the family between his brothers and between a child and an adult comes across most clearly in the adventure he has on his own, when he decides to leave the log cabin to spy out the land without consulting his siblings. This comes straight after Martin’s solitary adventure, and we’re told that Guy is the only one of Martin’s siblings to fully believe in his adventures in the Forest of Fairy Tales, since in Guy’s opinion

This island […] was not an ordinary island; it seemed to be a place where things you thought of had a queer trick of coming true when you least expected it. And not only things you thought of, but things you half-thought of, things you had forgotten, and perhaps – who could say? – things that lay buried inside you under all the other thoughts. (p. 178).

This makes it sound as though the island releases things from your Freudian unconscious (or ‘subconscious’, as Bullett calls it in his essay Dreaming); and sure enough, Guy feels the pull of the unconscious on his own solitary adventure, much as Martin did in his encounter with the dwarf. As he hurries towards the highest point on the island he abruptly feels a strange inclination to take a detour towards a nearby spot where his dreams might come true, like Martin’s:

As he came closer, a warm breath of intoxicating scent floated up into his face, and phrases of distant music stole upon his senses. The leaves of all the trees began to quiver and glow, as though little lamps had been lit inside them; and the whole forest seemed to be singing, murmuring. At any moment something strange and delightful might happen, for near him, within hand’s touch, he was aware of another world, a world both inside and outside the forest that he saw, the sea that he remembered, and the home that he had left so long (it seemed) ago; and he felt that some trifling happy chance – a step, a movement, the flicker of an eyelash, or a single word if only it were the right word – might release him into that world. (p. 179)

This enchantment of Guy’s has much in common with Elizabeth’s feeling of sensory pleasure on the ship; each of Guy’s senses is caught in turn by the ‘other world’ that seeks to draw him to itself, from smell (‘scent’) and sound (‘music’) to sight (the ‘little lamps’ of the leaves) and touch (hand’s touch) – only taste is missing. The accumulation of these sense impressions brings with it the potential for delight of the kind embraced by Elizabeth (‘something strange and delightful might happen’), but Guy has a mission and, as a boy, suspects that what tempts him to abandon it must be wrong, running counter to the values boys and men are supposed to embrace. He therefore resists delight as Elizabeth did not, hurrying past the place of enchantment towards the hilltop where he hopes to be able to see all round the island. A second time he is tempted – this time by the sudden realisation that the treasure must be buried nearby, where they located it on the map – and this time he succumbs to temptation, digging for a while until his ‘conscience’ strikes him again and he hurries on to Look-out Hill (p. 180-1). Even here he finds himself revelling in the pleasure of seeing the island laid out below exactly as he and the other children conceived it, and realising that ‘it was the map itself come beautifully and marvellously true’ (p. 181). In the face of this beauty, the need to arm himself with ‘information of immense stragetical (or was it strategical?) importance’ (pp. 181-2) seems only supplementary to the pleasure of simply living in the present. For a while, in fact, he completely forgets his patriarchal role as the male scout on whom his family depends, enraptured by another assault on his senses, beginning with the ‘slow lazy rhythm’ of waves breaking on the shore:

Guy listened to this music crashing and echoing round the coast, and stared in delight, forgetful of danger, at the rippling water, which, though near at hand crested with tiny waves, in the distance seemed so smooth and blue that he could scarcely tell where the sea ended and sky began. (p. 182)

Throughout his adventure, then, Guy finds himself torn between the vision of the fairy tale forest afforded to Martin, the sensory delight afforded to Elizabeth, and his responsibility as the male protector of women and children, who must set aside visions and pleasures for practical ends. The sight of the approaching canoes of the Pacific Islanders recalls him to his position within the patriarchy, so that he starts taking practical measures – ‘he took bearings’ (p. 182) – in an effort to judge how far away they are and how much time he has to warn the others about them. Patriarchal values, however, have just as great a tendency to lapse into fantasy as a delight in one’s physical surroundings, or a conviction that another, more beautiful universe exists ‘both inside and outside the forest he saw’. As he watches the canoes Guy is seized by an impulse to attack them all by himself, like a rogue bull; but he comes back to earth with a bump when he suddenly realises that even ‘he and old Rex’ together ‘would be hard put to it to protect those youngsters’, Martin and Elizabeth – his twin sister being relegated to the status of youngster ‘by virtue of her sex’ (p. 183). He hurries back to the cabin, and after that all his various fantasies get swept away by the urgent need to defend their stronghold against both pirates and Pacific Islanders. During the siege, Elizabeth’s relative ‘youth’ too gets forgotten, and she takes up a musket with just as much confidence and skill as the boys.

Guy’s wavering between the values of the child Martin, his sister Elizabeth, and his older brother Rex, encapsulates the experience of reading The Happy Mariners, which slips easily between sophisticated descriptions of bodily responses to the sea and the island and passages of comic melodrama, like the absurd behaviour of the pirates Bill Murder and Nautical Tallboy in Chapter Twelve; between moments of life-and-death urgency, like Guy’s race to inform his siblings of the Islanders’ approach, and moments of outright fantasy, like the sudden arrival of the wooden cuckoo from Martin’s cuckoo clock at the exact moment when she is needed to transport the children from island to ship at the end of their island adventure. Bullett’s point, it would seem, is that all these ingredients play an active part in the lives of adults as well as of children; a view confirmed by the fact that the children are as much influenced in their thinking by their businessman father as they are by their reading. Claims that one or other set of values belongs exclusively to children or to adults, to boys or to girls, seem to be undermined by the shared nature of so many of the children’s experiences; though the novel also pays due attention to the pressure on boys and girls to adopt exclusively masculine or feminine habits, on children to ‘grow out of’ their weakness and imaginative playfulness, and on everyone to pay less attention to the delight of the moment than to the useful plans they ought to be making for the future. Bullett’s alertness to this pressure lends the novel an atmosphere of gentle mournfulness – the children must surely succumb to such pressure at some point – despite its seeming endorsement of bodily and imaginative pleasures over the demands of duty and convention.

Running through the novel is another theme to which Hodge’s picture, ‘Night in the Forest’, alerts us: cats. I mentioned before that Martin’s favourite companion, besides the wooden cuckoo in his cuckoo clock, is the cat Fandy; and somehow Fandy pervades the children’s adventures with his presence. He accompanies them on the visit to the pond in the brick field which opens the novel, sitting near them ‘languidly washing his face’ as they discuss the island in the pond that inspires their map. On the map, the island takes on the shape of a ‘crouching leopard’, so that all events within its confines could be said to exist within the confines of a feline body. The absence of the Fandy cat and the cuckoo clock from the ship (Martin drops the clock as he climbs on board) is what makes the youngest Robinson wish to go home (pp. 59-60), and the discovery that the cat is in fact on board is what decides him to stay (‘Martin was delighted to have Fandy with him again, and he said no more about wanting to go home’, p. 65) – in spite of the fact that Fandy gave them all a fright with his gleaming eyes in the dark of the hold (pp. 63-4). The loss of Fandy on the island makes Martin miserable again, and it’s in search of Fandy that he sets off on his journey into the Forest of Fairy Tales, where he finds the cat again in the house of Cinderella, as if the island had always been the cat’s home (or one of them). Later, when Bill Murder creeps into the log cabin and prepares to stab Guy, Fandy jumps on him ‘from his hiding-place in the shadows’ and scratches his face ‘quickly and furiously with all his sharp claws at once’, thus saving Guy’s life and perhaps the lives of the other children. After this the cat recedes into the background for a while, reappearing at the precise moment when the cuckoo arrives to carry them back to the ship, when Martin points him out sitting on the beach nearby, ‘unconcernedly washing his face’ (p. 240). On returning to the ship Fandy vanishes once more, before turning up in the final sentences of the novel, ‘busy washing his face’ again; as the narrator observes, ‘There never was a cleaner cat than Fandy’ (p. 248). Martin’s cat, then, frames the story in at least two senses: he appears at the beginning and the end, and his shape provides the ‘frame’ or outline for the island which lies at the heart of their adventures. In the course of the narrative, he keeps vanishing and reappearing, as if calling in question the laws of physics; and he is sometimes scary (as he is in the hold) and sometimes heroic (as he is in the log cabin), as unconcerned about being consistent as he is about being always present.

Which brings us back to Hodges’s illustration, ‘Night in the Forest’. The picture shows the children by a fire in the forest at night surrounded by wild animals, the same wild animals they earlier insisted should be present on their island of adventure. Long before night fell, they encountered similar animals in the jungle: ‘once a huge yellow beast sprang out of its hiding-place into their path, stood for an instant grinning and glaring at them and lashing its tail, and then loped off with an angry laugh’ (pp. 108-9). Rex claims that this beast is a hyena – presumably because of its laugh – but its capacity for springing out of hiding-places and its glaring eyes might remind us of Fandy. Elizabeth seeks to defuse the fears the hyena inspires by reminding the others they have made it up: ‘Of course we did say there’d be wild beasts, when we drew the map. So we’ve only ourselves to thank for it. But I hope they won’t be too wild’ (p. 109). But more beasts emerge after nightfall, when only Rex and Guy are awake, all of them definitely ‘too wild’: first a ‘sleek hissing snake’ (p. 116), then ‘distant shapes’ beyond the firelight, at one point distinguishable as ‘a prowling beast of prey, a spotted yellow thing, lithe and sinuous, baring its cruel fangs and sniffing the human scent’ (p. 117). This creature’s spots and sinuous body evoke a leopard, like the one that inspired the shape of the island, and the impression is reinforced later when the boys see ‘a huge black cat-like creature with blazing emerald eyes’ (p. 118) approaching the fire, which Rex fights off with a blazing branch in time-honoured hero fashion, like Mowgli fighting off Shere Khan. Hodges’s picture shows the beasts as lithe black cats, despite Bullett’s later reference to them as ‘howling’ (p. 121), and the feline ears he gives them reappear in Tolkien’s drawing of the trolls.

What Hodges’s picture does not show is how the beasts are finally dispersed. ‘Suddenly,’ Bullett tells us,

There was a stir among the beasts, a flicker of fear in the bright cruel eyes. A heavy pad-pad, a mighty earth-shaking roar, and into their midst leapt a huge lion. The boys, transfixed with fear, sat for one instant staring at the creature, saw it leap upon its prey and plunge its claws into the soft fur. What animal it had chosen they could not discern; they could only see that it was almost as big as the lion itself, and they gave a gasp of astonishment to see the lion, like a monstrous cat, take up the struggling creature in its jaws and carry it away without effort as though it had been a mouse. All the other animals had fled, and now the lion was gone, and it was unlikely, said Rex, that he would bother to visit them again. (p. 121)

The beasts that threaten the children, then, and the beast that scares them off, are both clearly modelled on cats, and hence on Fandy. Disappearing and reappearing throughout the text, sometimes as a terrifying threat, sometimes as a protective guardian, always implicitly present even when the narrator fails to mention him for many pages at a time, Martin’s animal companion embodies the workings of the unconscious better, perhaps, than any other component of the novel. Even the lion that saves the children remains ambiguous in its motives. After it leaves with ‘the struggling creature in its jaws’ Rex is not wholly sure it will not come back to eat them, too: ‘Even lions are afraid of fire’, he tells Guy reassuringly, but adds a qualification: ‘I expect’ (p. 121). The simple adventures undergone by the children, where goodies are goodies and baddies are baddies, hides another world in which the distinction is not so clear, in which lions are not simple allegories of imperial might or divine strength, love and wisdom.

The appearance of the lion in the forest, just after the moment pictured by Hodges in his illustration, is perhaps the episode in the book with clearest associations with the work of C. S. Lewis. Lewis’s allegorical representation of Christ (or Christ’s qualities) in the Narnia books is of course the great lion Aslan; and Aslan has a way of appearing and disappearing unexpectedly, leaving humans and sentient animals for long periods to fend for themselves; after all, he’s ‘not like a tame lion’, as Mr Beaver tells the child protagonists in The Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe (1950).[9] He’s also liable to reappear in different guises; for instance, in Prince Caspian (1951) he is at first invisible to all the child protagonists except Lucy, and in The Voyage of the Dawn Treader (1952) he manifests himself successively as a picture in a book (p. 133), an albatross (pp. 158-9) and a lamb (pp. 208-9).[10] Closest to Bullett’s cat theme is the version of Aslan in The Horse and his Boy (1954), which sees the great beast transform into several felines of different sizes, from the two or more lions who first bring Shasta and Aravis together (pp. 29-32) to the solitary lion who chases Shasta and Bree to the Hermit’s garden (pp. 128-9) or the friendly cat who comforts Shasta among the tombs (‘big and very solemn […] Its eyes made you think it knew secrets it would not tell’, p. 80).[11] In this, Lewis’s version of the Thousand and One Nights, Aslan is a recurrent but various presence, exactly as Fandy is in The Happy Mariners.

There are other echoes of Lewis’s work in Bullett’s novel. The ship that begins as a miniature version of itself anticipates Lewis’s ship the Dawn Treader, which the children in that book first encounter as a picture on a wall. That ship, too, becomes full size by magic after a destructive act, in this case a furious attack by a boy called Eustace. ‘I’ll smash the rotten thing,’ Eustace cries as he rushes at the picture (p. 14), but in doing so he hurls the child protagonists into the world of Narnia, just as Elizabeth’s well-cast stone, which breaks the bottle, hurls Bullett’s child protagonists into the world of their dreams. The island where dreams come true, meanwhile, finds an echo in The Voyage of the Dawn Treader, where the protagonists come across a ‘Dark Island’ in which all dreams, including nightmares, are made real; something Lewis represents as the worst of horrors: ‘Do you hear what I say? This is where dreams – dreams, do you understand – come to life, become real. Not daydreams: dreams’ (p. 156); an idea the crew of the Dawn Treader find they cannot face. Guy’s wrestle with his conscience on the way to Look-Out Hill finds echoes in several Narnia books, in which children get tempted in various ways and either succumb to temptation or successfully resist it. Diggory in The Magician’s Nephew (1955), does both, first releasing an evil witch from an age-long enchantment, then successfully resisting her blandishments in a Narnian Garden of Eden.

Most strikingly of all, perhaps, Bullett’s young Martin learns in the Forest of Fairy Tales that the place resembles a series of boxes of the sort widely known as Chinese boxes. His friend Cinderella calls these boxes ‘Indian’, but explains what they are with helpful clarity:

‘It’s like those Indian boxes,’ she said, ‘all different sizes, one inside the other. The forest of firs was like the first box; inside that was the snow country; and inside the snow country was the little town of moonshine where I live. The funny thing is, that they get bigger instead of getting smaller. And the one in the middle is biggest of all.’ (p. 168)

The passage, of course, foreshadows the final Narnian chronicle, The Last Battle (1956), in which Lewis’s children find their way to a succession of new worlds, ‘world within world, Narnia within Narnia’, like an onion, ‘except that as you go in and in, each circle is larger than the last’ (p. 181).[12] Once again, these echoes of Bullett’s novel in the work of Lewis seem to me more than coincidental, and I find myself suspecting that Tolkien’s friend may have known it better than Tolkien himself.

It seems to me too, however, that Bullett’s cats have very different connotations from Lewis’s Aslan. My suspicion is based on another work by Bullett, a collection of poems he published as an undergraduate at Cambridge under the title Mice and Other Poems (1921), only six years before the first version of The Happy Mariners. In his introduction to Mice and Other Poems, the critic and poet Arthur Quiller-Couch pointed out that many young men who had fought in the Great War turned to writing poetry, and that their verse – including the verse contained in ‘this pamphlet’ – often displays a not unnatural ‘bitterness of resentment’.[13] The first poem in Bullett’s collection both explains its title and manifests the ‘bitterness of resentment’ born from the horrors of industrialised warfare. Here it is:

Mice

I see the broken bodies of women and men,
Temples of God ruined; I see the claws
Of sinister Fate, from the reach of whose feline paws
Never are safe the bodies of women and men.

Almighty Cat, it sits on the Throne of the World,
With paw outstretched, grinning at us, the mice,
Who play our trivial games of virtue and vice,
And pray—to That which sits on the Throne of the World!

From our beginning till all is over and done,
Unwitting who watches, pursuing our personal ends,
Hither and thither we scamper… The paw descends;
The paw descends and all is over and done.

In this early poem, written during or soon after his experience of combat in the Great War, cats embody an indifferent Fate wholly unlike the stern but cheerful lion-god of the Narnian chronicles; the sort of Fate that could condone casual slaughter on an industrial scale. In his essay Dreaming Bullett directly associates this sort of nightmare-cat with army life, referring to a dream of his in which a ‘cat-faced demon […] dressed in military uniform with all his buttons hideously shining, leaped out of a boiled egg at the tap of my spoon and ordered me to stand to attention’ (p. 12). The presence of war lurks in the background of The Happy Mariners, too. Phineas Dyke, the Elizabethan sailor who wakes from long sleep aboard Elizabeth’s ship, is the only survivor of a naval action in which all his fellow combatants died, friends and enemies alike, leaving him in sole charge of the caravel. Sleep fell on him as soon as the action ended, and his extended period of unconsciousness could be read as a kind of self-induced coma, offering a welcome escape into dreams from the horrors of war at sea. The cats in the novel, more often friendly and protective than terrifying, could represent the sort of softening or mellowing which Arthur Quiller-Couch hopes will take place in the young soldier-poets who have endured so much. But their terrifying aspect lingers, and the belligerent tendencies of the three boys in Bullett’s novel may have added to the melancholy undertones of the novel, especially for an adult reader who remembered the massive loss of young male life (and female too, as ‘Mice’ reminds us) in Flanders and France. These boys are already shaping up to provide perfect cannon fodder for the next outbreak of global warfare in 1939.

But I’d like to end with a more cheerful thought on Hodge’s illustration, ‘Night in the Forest’. Bullett’s essay, Dreaming, intersects in several ways with his novel for children, most obviously in its various lyrical meditations on the possible ways of viewing dreams. In the first section of the essay, Bullett tells us about his childhood theory that every person consists in fact of two people, each of whom is awake when the other is asleep; consciousness and dreams, according to this theory, have equal value, which means that Elizabeth’s dream life as captain and queen is as valid as her waking life as a girl from suburbia. In the second section, Bullett suggests that a person’s dream life exists in seamless continuity with their waking life, both being made up of identical elements, memory and thought, but in different proportions, with organising thought being almost absent from dream, while by contrast organising thought dominates any act of conscious recollection. A daydream or reverie, for Bullett, inhabits a liminal place between waking and dreaming, and its essential quality, translated into visual terms, most closely resembles ‘that quivering glaze of heat, colourless and transparent, that we sometimes see in summertime rising liquidly from the dry ground’; while in terms of hearing it invokes ‘the warm hum – the very voice of magic – with which sun-saturated woods are filled at noon’ (p. 18). Lying in such woods under such conditions – on a hot day in summer, with the trees rendered ‘at once more bright and less solid than reality’ – a person may entertain ‘a long procession of fancies’, among others that what we take to be ‘real’ is in fact no more stable or rational than what we take to be imaginary. This perception, if applied to the dream- or play-world of the island – made up as it is of memories – and the ‘real’ world from which it offers an escape, would again suggest that neither is more real or concrete than the other, each being susceptible to conditions that render them ‘less solid than reality’; conditions that include the darkness of midnight as well as summertime heat ‘rising liquidly from the dry ground’ at noon.  Elizabeth’s experiences on the ship and the island, in other words, are as positively real and valid a component of her memory – and of the personality of which her memory forms an essential part – as any of the seemingly inflexible rules and reasons imposed on her by education and convention. Both are equally real, while at the same time both form part of the same ‘long procession of fancies’. The same is true of Martin’s experiences in the Fairy-Tale Forest, or of Guy’s delight in his senses as he hurries through the woods or stands on Look-Out Hill, exulting in the sight and sound of the waves breaking on the shore. There is hope, in other words, that Elizabeth and her brothers will emerge from the woods of their island more ‘equal’, at least in each other’s eyes, than they were when they first went in. Their shared experience there, which is as real as their time in the suburban house Hodges pictures at the beginning and end of Bullett’s narrative, makes them comrades in spite of the accidents of gender, age, or personal disposition.

To adopt another idea from C. S. Lewis – that of the Wood Between the Worlds in The Magician’s Nephew, which is full of ponds (like the pond in the brick field where the Robinsons’ adventure started) that offer gateways into other worlds – the children may possibly emerge from the woods on the island into a world which is slightly better than the world that spawned the Great War. We know from history, of course, that they did not, and that the rise of Nazism and the Second World War were just around the corner. But the hope endured, given shape and legal form by the Equal Franchise Act of 1928. So when we look at Tolkien’s drawing of the trolls in the woods, we might think about Bullett’s woods as pictured by Hodges in The Happy Mariners, the woods of daydream in Bullett’s essay on Dreaming, and Lewis’s Wood Between the Worlds; and we might take this ‘long procession of fancies’ as an invitation to go wandering in the woods of our own waking and sleeping dreams, from which we too might emerge with our hopes intact – and possibly even rendered a little more accessible.

NOTES

[1] My edition of The Hobbit is the 50th Anniversary edition (London and Sydney: Unwin Hyman, 1987), and the picture of the trolls can be found on p. 43.

[2] See Spufford, The Child That Books Built ( London: Faber and Faber, 2003), pp. 64-71.

[3] Spufford mentions the non-authoritative nature of Tolkien’s illustrations (for himself as a child) in The Child That Books Built, p. 71: ‘Illustrations – I decided – were limitations’. I felt the same way about some books but not about others; Pauline Baynes’s illustrations for the Narnia books, for instance, seemed to me of a piece with the text, and indispensable.

[4] All references in this post are to Bullett, The Happy Mariners, illustrated by C. Walter Hodges (London: J. M. Dent and Sons, 1956).

[5] See Humphrey Carpenter, The Inklings: C. S. Lewis, J. R. R. Tolkien, Charles Williams and Their Friends (London: Unwin Paperbacks, 1982).

[6] There and Back Again is of course the subtitle of Tolkien’s novel.

[7] Quoted from Barrie, Peter Pan in Kensington Gardens and Peter and Wendy, Oxford World’s Classics (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999).

[8] Bullett’s keen interest in and admiration for Freud are clearly evident in his essay Dreaming, published as a pamphlet in 1928, the year after The Spanish Caravel (The Happy Mariners). The complete pamphlet can be found here: https://archive.org/details/dli.ernet.470223/mode/2up.

[9] Lewis, The Lion, the Witch and the Wardrobe, Puffin Books (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1959), p. 166.

[10] Lewis, The Voyage of the Dawn Treader, Puffin Books (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1965).

[11] Lewis, The Horse and His Boy (London: Geoffrey Bles, 1959).

[12] Lewis, The Last Battle (London: The Bodley Head, 1958).

[13] References are to The Project Gutenberg eBook of Mice and Other Poems, transcribed from the Cambridge University Press edition of 1921.

The Fantastical World of Mervyn Peake: Islands and Seas

[This is the text of the talk I gave at the British Library on 24 February 2024. The talk was designed to accompany a mini-exhibition of the same title, itself designed to supplement the major exhibition Fantasy: Realms of Imagination which came to a close that same weekend.

This explains why the post is so image-rich; I couldn’t make my case without the use of multiple pictures. Some of the images aren’t too good, since the recent cyber-assault on the British Library website meant they couldn’t send me files containing the images I needed. As a result I had to use photos from books I owned, and in two embarrassing cases, photos taken in the mini-exhibition itself. Please forgive the results!]

Cover of first edition of Treasure Island illustrated by Peake.

The writer-artist Mervyn Peake had a lifelong obsession with islands; G. Peter Winnington’s seminal monograph on Peake, The Voice of the Heart, includes a whole chapter about them.[1] Peake’s favourite book as a boy was Treasure Island (1883), and the place he kept returning to throughout his life was the Island of Sark, a one-time nest of pirates off the coast of Normandy. He first lived on Sark as a member of an artists’ commune in the 1930s, went back to live there with his family between 1946 and 1949, and visited several times in the 1950s.[2] Mervyn Peake’s most famous literary creation, Gormenghast Castle, is a building so vast that nobody can ever know it in its entirety; it’s landlocked, but Peake keeps comparing it to an island, cut off from history by its resistance to change, cut off from the outside world by its steadfast refusal to recognize that world’s existence. In the second of his three great Titus novels, Gormenghast (1950), it even becomes an actual island after a flood. His other works are filled with islands of one sort or another: from the pink island to which the pirate Captain Slaughterboard retreats with the love of his life, the Yellow Creature, in Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor (1939), to a floating lump of ice the size of Kent on which a nameless explorer and his companion, a ‘turtle-dog’ named Jackson, find themselves stranded in Letters from a Lost Uncle in Polar Regions (1948); from the many strange and colourful islands Peake painted in the illustrations to his book of nonsense poetry, Rhymes Without Reason (1944), to the boat fraught with all the animals and people in the world in his play of the 1950s, Noah’s Ark. In this talk I’d like to suggest that his love of islands, and of the strange seas in which his islands are located, tells us something important about his love affair with Fantasy. In a number of ways, I think, both Mervyn Peake and many other people of his time were islanded – a word Peake used in his poetry; and their islanding found its most potent expression in the impossible worlds they conjured up, many of which feature in the Peake mini-Exhibition in this building.

Kuling, early 20th century

Peake was born in 1911, in a resort for missionaries called Kuling (now Guling) in Jiangxi Province, eastern China. He lived the first eleven years of his life in Tientsin, now Tianjin, in northern China, where his father, a missionary doctor, ran the MacKenzie Memorial Hospital.[3] In this port city the Treaty of Tientsin was signed in 1858, at the end of the Second Opium War, a conflict started by the British and French; the treaty opened several new Chinese ports to foreign trade, permitted Christian missionary work in China – of the kind Peake’s parents practised – and legalized the importing of Opium, which gave the British a crucial advantage in the Chinese market by literally addicting Chinese people to the products of the British Empire. The Peake family was effectively islanded in Tientsin, since they lived inside the hospital complex, a rectangular chunk of late Victorian Britain segregated from China by a protective wall. Peake’s Tientsin childhood was islanded from the rest of his life by what he calls a ‘misty sea of time’, so that he later felt ‘severed’ from it, since ‘the pictures in my mind seem not to be part of me, but are like some half-forgotten story in a book’, containing adventures that happened to an entirely different child.[4] Having spent several years of my childhood in Singapore I know what he means; the images I have of that part of my life are remarkably vivid and resonant, but stand out from the rest of my memories precisely because they have so little in common with anything that happened after I came to live in Britain. Peake coming to Britain from China at the age of eleven, in 1922, may have felt profoundly islanded from the bulk of the British population who had not been through these experiences – though he went to a boarding school full of similarly islanded children, Eltham College, which catered for the sons of missionaries like himself.

Peake, The Ancient Mariner

The book-like quality of Mervyn’s memories of China helps explain, I think, his willingness to turn to illustrating books in the Second World War – something that happened, he claimed, because he couldn’t get hold of paint after he had been drafted into the army. Many of the books he illustrated feature protagonists severed from the world they know: from the Baker, the Banker and the Billiard-player in Lewis Carroll’s poem The Hunting of the Snark (1941) to Coleridge’s Ancient Mariner (1943), adrift in a ship full of corpses; from Carroll’s Alice books (1946) to Johann Wyss’s The Swiss Family Robinson (1949), where an entire middle-class family finds itself stranded on an impossible island crammed full of beasts from all five continents.[5] Immersion in books like these tends to isolate the reader, especially the child who is capable of cutting themselves off from the world for as long as a story lasts. Peake describes this childhood reading experience with amazing intensity in a poem he wrote in 1942, when a nervous breakdown led to him being hospitalized in Southport. Patients at the hospital were distinguished from the general population by the distinctive sky-blue suits in which they were dressed. Here’s how he sums up his state of mind at this difficult time of personal isolation in the middle of the Second World War:

Blue as the indigo and fabulous storm
Of a picture book long lost where islands burst
Out of the page, exploding palm on palm,
Are we, whom the authorities have dressed.
For we are bluer than the fabulous waters
That lap the inner skull-walls of a boy
So that his head is filled with brimming summer’s
Dazzling rollers which make dull the day
Surrounding him, like an un-focused twilight,
Such waters as uplift a rippling acre
Of naked jelly through the sunfire drifting
With at its centre a vermilion ember
Across whose fire the transparent eyelids rove
O fiercer than the azure lights that flare
At the lit core of fantasy.[6]

I love Peake’s comparison of the boy’s mind while reading to the mind of a swimmer caught in tropical breakers, his eyes squeezed shut against the salt water but still able to see the sun shining through the ‘naked jelly’ of the waves as a ‘vermilion ember’, reddened by the veins in his eyelids. The eyelids themselves are rendered ‘transparent’ by sunlight, and move or ‘rove’ in response to the movements of the eyeballs behind them. That’s a glorious image for the sensation of reading or remembering particularly vivid picture books, which spark an inner light that makes ordinary daylight into ‘an un-focused twilight’. That inner light, Peake tells us, is ‘fiercer than the azure lights that flare / At the lit core of fantasy’; fiercer, perhaps, because the images in illustrated stories are more focused than those conjured up by the unaided imagination. Peake’s retreat from the humiliating experience of being in Southport Hospital, and of leaving the hospital building to be paraded along the esplanade in a bright blue suit with an orange tie, was to retreat to this realm of exploding islands where his imagination could have free play, like the swimmer no longer constrained by the law of gravity. In fact he retreated to his own picture book quite literally in Southport. As therapy for his breakdown, the staff there encouraged him to write the later chapters of his first novel about Gormenghast Castle, Titus Groan (1946). Part of the process of composition involved drawing pictures of the major characters, some of which you can see in the Fantasy Exhibition next door.

Peake, illustration from The Swiss Family Robinson (c. 1949)

The final picture in the Peake mini-Exhibition, showing a boy from the Swiss Family Robinson lassoing a turtle from a raft amidst the foaming tropical seas (c. 1949), perfectly complements this account of the boy whose mind is shaped for the life of an island castaway by vivid pictures in books. It bursts with youthful energy, straining to escape the page’s rectangle. Notice how the curves of the turtle’s head and shell are echoed by the curves of the barrels and sail on the raft, how the raft and its users have been tilted to one side by the waves and the straining turtle, how the waves themselves are exploding into lacy shawls of foam while the boy who holds the rope hauls with all his might against the turtle’s direction of travel. The picture is dominated by the diagonal line of the taut rope that slashes across the middle and the two tilted right angles it strains between, the hard right angle of the mast and the soft right angle formed by the turtle’s neck; the hardness on the one side and the softness on the other show clearly who is going to win this tug of war. The brilliance of the tropical sunshine is conveyed by the shadows that conceal the boy’s eyes, the shadows on the upper rims of the barrels on the raft, the shadows on the underside of the turtle’s neck and flipper. Peake’s art was shaped by the work of an artist who specialised in illustrating action scenes like these in books for boys, Stanley L. Wood, and in early days he signed his pictures Mervyn L. Peake as if in homage to his idol.[7] Another favourite book of his, Under the Serpent’s Fang (1922-3) by J. Claverdon Wood – about pirates on the island of New Guinea – was illustrated by Stanley Wood, and Peake pays homage to Wood’s strenuously energetic pictures for the novel in a talk he gave on book illustration in the 1940s. This picture strikes me as one of Peake’s most Wood-like images.

Stanley L. Wood, Frontispiece to Under the Serpent’s Fang (1922-3)

Peake’s islanding, as I’ve described it, was not exclusive to himself. Throughout his life he gravitated to other people who had been islanded in one way or another. The Irish nationalist writer James Stephens, author of the Fantasy classic The Crock of Gold (1916), who emigrated to England after Irish independence because he was disappointed by the kind of country Ireland had become. Gordon Smith, Peake’s best friend, whose childhood had also been spent in northern China. The avant garde sculptor Jacob Epstein, an American Jew who suffered from British conservatism and antisemitism and whose work Peake defended in a poem.[8] The Eltham schoolmaster Eric Drake who founded the Sark Group of Artists in the 1930s, and who was another child of Chinese missionaries. The writer Maurice Collis, another Irishman, who found himself at odds with the British imperial project he was expected to uphold as a civil servant in Burma, and whose version of the Ramayana, The Quest for Sita, Peake illustrated in 1949;[9] and many more. Maeve Gilmore, Peake’s artist wife, was herself islanded, first by her strict Catholic upbringing, then by the many pressures on her as a woman artist and a mother of two in wartime, whose husband was first drafted into the army then invalided out of it. Peake describes Gilmore’s particular kind of islanding in one of his poems:

Always you are remote and islanded
In silences that so belie the ardent
Torrents that course beneath your gentle clay[.][10]

Only recently have the ‘ardent / Torrents’ of Gilmore’s creativity been heard and seen as they deserve to be, thanks to a major exhibition of her work at the Voltaire Gallery in 2022.

Peake, ‘Floating Islands on the Waves’ (c. 1928)

Countries, too, were in some sense islanded in Peake’s lifetime by seismic events that severed them from the past. China was severed from its long imperial history by the revolution of 1911, the year of Peake’s birth, which established the Chinese Republic. Britain was severed from its own imperial past by the trauma of the First World War, which lent urgency to the radical questioning of imperialist values that found expression in artistic movements between the wars, Surrealism, Vorticism, Cubism and the rest. Starting with Ireland, Maeve Gilmore’s father’s birthplace, the British dominions were breaking away like floes breaking off a Polar ice cap. The sense of having been cut off by these seismic breakages from the colonial past – like Arctic explorers stranded on one of those ice floes – is what gave rise, I think, to the genre of fantasy as it developed between the wars. The first picture in the mini-exhibition (c. 1928), which shows floating islands precariously balanced on heaving waves, encapsulates the experience of having been uprooted and come adrift which many people shared in the 20s and 30s. It invokes, as the notes suggest, Hokusai’s famous print ‘The Great Wave off Kanagawa’ (1831);[11] but Hokusai’s picture is stabilized by the presence of Mount Fuji in the background. Peake’s seascape is all upheaval and turbulence, with no stable land in view; though its cartoonishness, the pastoral calmness of the floating islands and the single drop dripping off the crest of the biggest wave suggest that the young artist was untroubled, as yet, by the turbulent world he had inherited. There’s no indication that his islands have been colonised or subjected to missionary activity, and this may explain their pastoral appearance. The imagination could invent countries where the toxic inheritance of imperialism could be offloaded onto goblins or dragons, as it is in Tolkien’s The Hobbit (1937), which takes place in a world that’s fallen to pieces after some bygone quasi-mythical age of unity and prosperity, leaving a trail of islanded settlements in its wake.

Hokusai, ‘The Great Wave off Kanagawa’ (1831)

Peake’s own imagination inclined to piracy. Pirates can be seen as enemies of imperialism, though they can of course also serve as its parasites and stooges. They have a contempt for human laws, national and international, and a well-earned reputation for random acts of violence; but they’ve also been linked to anarchism, the political movement that rejects authority of all kinds. The seventeenth-century pirate Roberts drew up a celebrated set of egalitarian laws to be observed on the ships he commanded, while the most famous example of pirate anarchism on land is Libertalia, a democratic pirate republic set up on the Island of Madagascar by a Frenchman, Captain James Misson, in defiance of the Empires that were carving up the world between them at the time. The story of Captain Roberts is told in The General History of the Pyrates (1724) by Captain Charles Johnson, thought by some to be a pseudonym for Daniel Defoe; Johnson’s account of Libertalia comes in the second volume (1725). Peake may well have known the General History, which is a source for his favourite novel, Treasure Island, and his interest in Madagascar may also have been piqued by the fact that his grandparents and uncle were missionaries there – that it was in some sense the ‘family island’.[12] In fact Peake uses Madagascar as a metaphor for the process of making a family, in a poem he wrote after the birth of his first child, Sebastian, in January 1940. Addressed to Maeve, the poem represents birth as a process of islanding for everyone who experiences it:

Grottoed beneath your ribs no longer, he,
Like madagascar broken from its mother,
Must feel the tides divide an africa
Of love from his clay island, that the sighs
Of the seas encircle with chill ancientry;
And though your ruthful breast allays his cries,
How vulnerable
He is when you release him, and how terrible
Is that wild strait which separates your bodies.[13]

By this point in Peake’s life, after the outbreak of the Second World War and having been called up for military service – he was awaiting mobilization as he wrote – the sea surrounding each human island has mutated into something much more ‘terrible’ than the comic-book waves of the first picture we looked at. And the island metaphor he chooses for his son – that of Madagascar – is associated with the precariousness of piracy as well as its anti-authoritarian credentials. Captain Misson’s pirate republic, Libertalia, is said to have been destroyed in an attack by Malagasy warriors; Misson himself drowned at sea a short time after. Captain Roberts was killed in a skirmish when struck in the throat by grapeshot. Piracy for Peake, as for many others, always had two aspects, the spirit of freedom, adventure, egalitarianism and loyalty on the one hand, the spirit of violence, random cruelty, treachery and imminent sudden death on the other. The strain between these two aspects of piracy is key to the power of Peake’s fantastic imagination, which rejects simplistic dualisms of good and evil while retaining a deep consciousness (as the son of a missionary must) that these dualisms govern many understandings of the way things work – including, at times, his own. Peake repeatedly represents himself as an uneasy double figure, made up of a ‘rebeller’ and a ‘conceder’, as he puts it in his wartime poem ‘They Move With Me, My War-Ghosts’ (1941) – a conceder being someone who concedes to or is complicit with the horrors being perpetrated in Europe.[14] He embodies these two aspects of himself in the figures of a cold angel and a fiery, sensuous centaur or devil – though these figures don’t neatly align with the notions of rebelling and conceding, or bad and good. He locates this ‘double cargo’, as he puts it, in a ship,

[…] half love,
And half, that rides
The self-same sea-groove with wild laugh
Across these fickle, these infested tides.[15]

That the ship is a pirate ship seems likely enough, given that it’s invoked by a writer-artist who dressed as a buccaneer in the 1930s (complete with earring) and whose obsession with pirates is still startlingly present in his late novels Mr Pye (1953), about an eccentric missionary on Sark who takes to wearing a piratical bandanna to conceal a pair of growing horns,[16] and Titus Alone (1959), in which the self-exiled Earl of Gormenghast becomes the unofficial leader of a loosely-knit anarchist rising against the authorities of a nameless state, seconded by a man called Muzzlehatch with a rudder nose and a one-time sailor called Anchor, both of whom have a pirate’s hatred for the law and its instruments.

Mervyn Peake, illustration for Treasure Island (1949)

The dual nature of pirates, as deeply attractive emblems of adventure and resistance and as murderous salt-water thieves, was visible everywhere in the pirate books being published in the first half of the twentieth century, from William Hope Hodgson’s The Ghost Pirates (1909) to John Masefield’s Lost Endeavour (1910), J M Barrie’s Peter and Wendy (2011), Under the Serpent’s Fang (1923), Gerald Bullett’s The Spanish Caravel (1927), Richard Hughes’s A High Wind in Jamaica (1929), Arthur Ransome’s Peter Duck and Missee Lee (1932 and 1941), Daphne du Maurier’s Frenchman’s Creek (1941) and Eric Linklater’s The Pirates in the Deep Green Sea (1949). These divide themselves broadly into texts that favour the pleasures and perils of piracy and texts that celebrate the victories of agents of the imperial law against piratical opponents. Often the same book does both. Treasure Island, for instance – the granddaddy of them all, along with R M Ballantyne’s The Coral Island (1857) – adopts the point of view of the order-loving upper and middle classes, embodied by the shipowner Squire Trelawney, the physician Dr Livesey, and the cabin-boy Jim Hawkins, a family friend of the Doctor’s. Trelawney and Livesey regard their quest for buried treasure as wholly legitimate, since any profits will go to themselves, members of the ruling elite. But Stevenson also represents their class enemy and rival in the treasure hunt, the sea-cook and pirate Long John Silver, as a deeply charming man, capable of drawing middle-class medics and upper-class shipowners into the web of his geniality as easily as he seduces his working-class shipmates into mutiny against them. To the Squire and the Doctor, Silver poses as a loyal member of the servant classes, well content with his station; to his fellow pirates he is a cunning, ruthless killer; but to everyone he is admirable, including the reader, who delights in his capacity to switch sides and personalities whenever it suits him. Even his willingness to murder people who resist his advances offers evidence of his astonishing energy, versatility and poise. When Silver kills the sailor Tom for refusing to join his mutiny he first seeks to sweet-talk him with honeyed words, then suddenly leaps away ‘with the speed and security of a trained gymnast’ and hurls his crutch to knock Tom down, charging after it ‘agile as a monkey, even without leg or crutch’ to bury his knife ‘up to the hilt in that defenceless body’.[17] Peake’s full-length picture of him in the mini-Exhibition (from 1947-1949) wonderfully invokes his seductiveness. He’s got a beautiful face, with heavy lids, prominent eyelashes and a fine head of curly hair, and he peers sideways out of the picture with a smile, suggesting his capacity to extend his influence well beyond his physical proximity. His powerful body is visible through his clothes, and there’s a general sense that he’s disorienting, conveyed both by the way his body tilts in two directions as he leans on his crutch (his leg, left arm and head tilt in one direction, his torso and right arm tilt in another), and by the shading in the background, whose lines begin to curve sideways as they rise from ground level, passing from the horizontal through an area of cross-hatching until they’re diagonal to the rectangular frame of the picture at the level of Silver’s head, so that everything seems in motion and off-balance.

Silver’s politics are interesting, too; it would be easy to see them as rooted in the Enlightenment ideal of rational democracy, as against the feudalism of the Squire. Silver abides by the Roberts code of piracy, being elected captain by his messmates, giving them the vote on key decisions, and assuring them that all will have an equal share in the buried treasure. The name he and his pirates give themselves – gentlemen of fortune – makes them equals, unlike the Squire and Doctor, who embrace the class distinction between themselves as gentry and the commoners who work for them. No wonder the hero of the book, Jim Hawkins, seems to fall in love with Silver, like Peake in his boyhood. Every picture of Jim in the exhibition has him tilted at all angles like Long John Silver: tossed on the waves in Ben Gunn’s coracle…

clinging to the bowsprit of the Hispaniola…

aiming his pistols at Israel Hands as he leans from the Hispaniola’s crow’s nest:

In each picture he comes closer to being a pirate, culminating in the moment when he runs his fingers through the treasure of Captain Flint in Ben Gunn’s cave:

The pirate Silver coveted that treasure, the former pirate Ben Gunn dug it up, the half pirate Jim Hawkins got a share of it; what really divides them? In Peake’s pictures, as in Stevenson’s book, Jim is tainted with Silver’s anarchism. John Silver is the embodiment of resistance to the authorities that frown on exploratory teenagers like Jim – though the pirate also claims to have plans to become a conventional gentleman, and even a member of parliament. Not too conventional, however. In an age when slavery was legal in the British Empire, Silver’s lover – who we never meet in the book – is Black. The sea-cook roves far more freely beyond the imperial frame, it’s implied, than most of his white British male contemporaries.

Map of the Three Principalities, as featured in The Dusky Birron (1929-31)

There’s a queer element to piracy, as anyone knows who’s followed the HBO series Our Flag Means Death. Peake seems well aware of this fact, and the two pirate books he wrote and illustrated – The Dusky Birron and Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor – attest to his awareness, whether or not he acknowledged it openly. The unpublished Dusky Birron (1929-31) was a project he developed with his friend Gordon Smith, and it has a distinctly Chinese quality, as the two authors drew imaginatively on their shared experiences of China. Smith wrote the words, Peake drew the pictures, and the book begins with a sailor man being marooned by pirates on a group of islands, whose monosyllabic names – Soz, Ho, Foon, Chee – bear a faint resemblance to Mandarin, which both Smith and Peake could speak. The first picture from the book in the exhibition shows a European ship sailing through a giant flooded forest, possibly the pirate ship that marooned the sailor…

while the second shows the pirates themselves, looking thoroughly European…

Apologies for the quality of this photo!

But the next two pictures show some very Chinese-looking rocks and mountains…

Lawrence Bristow-Smith, a former British diplomat in China, compares the rock where the Maranesa sits to the rock formations in traditional Chinese gardens, ‘slabs and blocks of stone assembled to form a fantastic, exaggerated landscape with water, paths, steps, bridges and carefully-planted shrubs and trees’.[18] The mountain scene, meanwhile…

Apologies for this photo too!

recalls the Chinese practice of shan shui hua, ‘mountain water art’, as exemplified by Huang Gongwang’s ‘The Remaining Mountain’:

…so that the place where the sailor man finds himself contains a variety of aesthetic elements assembled, like those Chinese gardens, into a ‘fantastic, exaggerated landscape’. In Gordon Smith’s account of the book, the sailor-man’s guide through this fantastic landscape is the Dusky Birron, a naked man with flowing hair and the beard of a prophet:

and the two companions spend most of the book looking for the ideal place to set up house together. They find it at last in Chee, the most laid-back island in the archipelago….

This is not, then, a story of colonisation but of companionship between people of different cultures, in a land full of exiles; the Maranesa, for example, comes from Borneo, but seems happy living in Soz alone on his ‘pointed stone’, as Smith’s words put it. The sailor, by contrast, finds a friend to share his life with, as his mentor and fellow adventurer. There’s a Chinese connection here, too, I think. Peake’s surviving notes for an unwritten book about China – sometimes conceived as an autobiography, sometimes a work of fiction – are full of such cross-cultural friendships, from the Chinese boy who lures a red-haired British boy from his bed into the world beyond the hospital compound, to the one-eyed Russian boy with no shoes whom Peake calls his ‘God’; from Peake’s friend Tony Liang, who ‘did drawings which were copies of Lawson… dogs and parrots and monkeys’ – probably Lawson Wood, who drew animals for The Boy’s Own Paper – to the Chinese boy befriended by a British girl called Laura on a winter’s journey across the mountains.[19] These relationships are full of the seduction of the unfamiliar, something that works both ways in the case of the boy with red hair, whose appearance marks him out as exotic to his Chinese guide.

That seduction turns boldly queer in Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor (1939). The Captain sails his ship, the Black Tiger, between ‘little green islands’ on the ‘bright blue ocean’, accompanied by a crew of bizarre eccentrics clearly inspired by the crew who sailed with Captain Hook in Peter and Wendy.[20] Billy Bottle the bosun, for example, has arms so long that he can knock ashes out of his pipe without bending down; Hook’s shipmate Noodles has equally unusual arms, since his ‘hands were fixed on backwards’. Timothy Twitch is ‘the most elegant in battle, his left hand especially’, just as Hook’s shipmate Gentleman Starkey was ‘once an usher in a public school and still dainty in his ways of killing’…

Slaughterboard’s shipmate whose portrait we see in the exhibition, Charlie Choke, ‘covered all over with dreadful drawings in blue ink’, is closely related to Hook’s shipmate Bill Jukes, ‘every inch of him tattooed’…

Slaughterboard seems immune to the charms of these men, even the elegant Timothy Twitch, but when he spots a Yellow Creature through his telescope he can’t resist its beauty…

That his attraction is erotic as well as aesthetic (he spends hours, we’re told, admiring the butter-yellow colour of the creature against the blue of the ocean) is implied by the fact that many commentators think Peake modelled its face on the face of his wife, Maeve Gilmore, who posed for him hundreds of times throughout their marriage; Maeve also features, if you look closely, among the tattoos on Charlie Choke’s left arm.[21] The creature’s gender is indeterminate – Peake sometimes gives it the pronoun ‘it’ and sometimes ‘he’ – as is its species, since its ears and bristly horns are not quite human. Slaughterboard’s first reaction to it is that of the colonial slave-trader or collector; he sends his men to catch it, then carries it off for his own amusement. On board his ship, too, he at first treats the Creature as an exotic object to be displayed to his fellow sailors, who quickly grow tired of being urged to admire it…

But as time goes by, the power dynamic begins to shift. One by one the crew is killed off until only the Captain and the Yellow Creature are left, and by this time they behave as equals: they dance and eat together…

…and the Captain begins to show an interest in the Yellow Creature’s home environment, the island where he found it, and eventually turns the ship in that direction. The book ends with the Captain and the Creature living together in married bliss; the Creature does the cooking, and they both enjoy the company of the other islanders, or lazily fishing for wonderfully strange fish from the island’s ornamental-looking piles of stones. As Peake’s son Fabian points out in his introduction to the 70th Anniversary edition, the pair of them seem to have found utopia. More specifically, they have found their Libertalia, complete with its stock of unprecedented fauna. The anthropologist David Graeber has recently argued, in his book Pirate Enlightenment, or The Real Libertalia, that the roots of Libertalia lie in the fusion of pirate culture with the indigenous people of north-east Madagascar; just one of the many cultural fusions that have shaped the island’s history.[22] Captain Slaughterboard and the Yellow Creature duplicate this fusion, their gleeful rejection of apartheid or segregation placing them a million miles from the British imperial project. Or the German one, of course; the book was published in 1939, and the first edition was mostly destroyed in a German bombing raid.

The magic of Captain Slaughterboard is its refusal to embrace the sort of conventional moralising that dominated contemporary children’s narratives. The Captain exists outside the imperatives of Empire all the way; his initially colonial actions are a personal choice, and he seems free to dispense with colonialism whenever he feels like it. In J M Barrie’s Peter and Wendy, Captain Hook is tormented by social anxieties, brought on both by his public-school education and by Peter Pan’s self-evident superiority as a pirate and an anarchist to himself. Stevenson’s Long John Silver is intensely conscious of the forces of the social hierarchy ranged against him – of the power of the ruling classes and the disastrous lack of discipline among his fellow pirates – which means he suspects from the start that things can’t possibly go his way. By contrast, Captain Slaughterboard rules his narrative ‘every inch’, as he rules his ship. There are no naval officers, squires or missionaries in his story, just the strangest of sea-wolves and the weirdest of creatures. Instead of moral trajectories, Peake’s book is full of limbs and torsos getting out of control, clothes flying in all directions, bursts of sea-spray, spurts of cannon-smoke or pipe-smoke, and a ship that expands and contracts like a living organ, its decks covered in writhing bodies, flapping swathes of canvas and unbalanced bottles of rum…

The Captain’s resistance to moral imperatives makes him wholly indifferent to the slaughter of his men – we never hear how they died, and he never mentions them again after their deaths. He only pays attention to the fascinating details of the Yellow Creature’s appearance – its delicate body, arms and legs, its enormous eyes, its long, drooping nose, which offer the perfect foil to his own massive body and hands, his button nose, his tiny eyes….

The Captain’s eyes look at everything with cunning; even when introduced by the Yellow Creature to its friends on the island he watches them slyly as if measuring their market value…

But his cunning consists in the recognition that the only treasure he needs is what gives him pleasure: his brightly-coloured lover and the seemingly infinite variety of creatures on the island and around its shores.

Peake: poster for the movie Black Magic, with Sidney Toler playing the detective Charlie Chan in ‘Yellowface’ (see the novel by R F Kuang)

Peake was familiar, of course, with the racist caricatures of Chinese culture that circulated between the wars, from the fictions of the so-called Yellow Peril – such as Sax Rohmer’s tales of Dr Fu Manchu – to the crude pastiches of China that featured in British pantomimes like Aladdin, or Albert Arlen’s play The Son of the Grand Eunuch (1937), for which Peake designed the costumes.[23] He also had friends like Maurice Collis who had a serious interest in South and East Asian art and history, and a father with similar interests who brought him brushes from Hong Kong after the war, giving him a chance to experiment seriously with Chinese painting techniques. Captain Slaughterboard embraces Peake’s childhood in China by representing a kind of queer marriage between formerly hostile cultures, as well as between Chinese and European schools of art. As a statement about its particular moment in British history – on the cusp of the Second World War, when the earth itself was tilting off balance – this picture book seems to me well worth revisiting in our own unbalanced times.

[For an account of pirate references in the Titus/Gormenghast books see my blog post ‘Mervyn Peake and the Poetics of Piracy’.]

NOTES

[1] See Winnington, The Voice of the Heart: The Working of Mervyn Peake’s Imagination (Liverpool: Liverpool University Press, 2006), chapter 3, ‘Islands’.

[2] For more on Peake and Sark see my blogposts ‘Mervyn Peake on Sark’ and ‘Mervyn Peake and the Queering of Sark’.

[3] The best account of Peake’s life is Peter Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies: The Illustrated Biography (London and Chester Springs, PA: Peter Owen Publishers, 2009).

[4] For Peake’s ‘Notes for a Projected Autobiography’ see Peake’s Progress: Selected Writings and Drawings of Mervyn Peake, ed. Maeve Gilmore (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1981), pp. 469-487.

[5] The dates given here are those of the first editions of Peake’s illustrated versions.

[6] For the full poem see Mervyn Peake, Collected Poems, ed. R. W. Maslen (Manchester: Carcanet, 2008), p. 120. For more on Peake’s Southport experience see my blog post ‘Mervyn Peake at Southport’.

[7] See Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 56.

[8] See my blog post ‘Fantasy 1939: Mervyn Peake and Jacob Epstein’.

[9] See my two blog posts, ‘Maurice Collis and Mervyn Peake, Quest for Sita (1946)’, Part 1: Text and Part 2: Drawings.

[10] ‘Tides’, in Peake, Collected Poems, p. 129.

[11] See Mervyn Peake: The Man and his Art, p. 36, which cites Peake’s friend Gordon Smith describing the Puy de Dôme near Clermont-Ferrand in France as ‘a most charming hummock, like a miniature Fujiyama’. Smith and Peake saw this ‘charming hummock on a French holiday together in 1930, two years after the date assigned to the picture, ‘Floating islands on the waves’. For a full account of the holiday see Smith, Mervyn Peake: A Personal Memoir (London: Victor Gollancz, 1984), pp. 14-20.

[12] See Winnington, The Voice of the Heart, p. 57, footnote 1: ‘it was the family island, so to speak’.

[13] Peake, Collected Poems, p. 78.

[14] Peake, Collected Poems, p. 93.

[15] Peake, Collected Poems, p. 94.

[16] See Peake, Mr Pye (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1978), p. 205.

[17] Robert Louise Stevenson, Treasure Island, illustrated by Mervyn Peake (London: Methuen, 1976), pp. 96-97.

[18] Lawrence Bristow-Smith, ‘The Chinese Puzzle of Mervyn Peake’, Peake Studies, Vol. 3, No. 3 (Winter 1993), pp. 37-39.

[19] Peake, ‘Notes for a Projected Autobiography’, Peake’s Progress, pp. 471, 474, 477-478, 483.

[20] All quotations are taken from Mervyn Peake, Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor, 70th Anniversary Edition (London: Walker Books, 2009). This edition is not paginated.

[21] See Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 130.

[22] David Graeber, Pirate Enlightenment, or the Real Libertalia (Dublin: Allen Lane, 2023).

[23] See Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 107.

The Ecofantasies of Mary Fairclough, Part 2: The Blue Tree (1960)

[This is the second of two blog posts on a genuinely lost writer-artist, Mary Fairclough, who seems to me to be a genuinely major practitioner. You can find the first blog-post here. The book described in this, the second part, could hardly be more relevant to our situation at this particular moment in the twenty-first century.]

Fairclough’s dustjacket for The Blue Tree, illustrating the ancient Iranian art of wrestling.

After finishing Little Dog and the Rainmakers, Mary Fairclough waited more than a decade before publishing her next novel. In the intervening years the Cold War tightened its grip on the world, and the United Nations found its ideals of international cooperation and respect for human rights on the verge of obliteration. As a result, perhaps, The Blue Tree is a much more complex book than its predecessors, and this may account for its disappearance from the collective memory of readers and book historians. Socialist-internationalist politics and a powerful green undercurrent tie it to its predecessors, Miskoo the Lucky and Little Dog and the Rainmakers. Its interwoven plot, however, featuring a vast array of characters from different classes, cultures and religions, marks a radical advance in literary technique, while its focus on a single setting – a small local space that gradually emerges as having economic, ecological and spiritual ties with every corner of the continent that holds it – sets it apart from the tales of long journeys at the centre of Fairclough’s earlier fictions. Journeys are still present, of course, but each one begins and ends in a small city-state on a plain surrounded by mountains. Fairclough’s mother urged her to ‘Do your best in your own little corner’, and Fairclough responded many years later with the crucial question, ‘where does one’s own corner end?’, not overturning but radically building on her mother’s philosophy.[1] The local is always and everywhere also the global, her words suggest, and The Blue Tree – a fiction for the United Nations, if ever there was one, though without any formal ties to that organization – provides the perfect illustration of her point.

It’s hard to say what age-group The Blue Tree is aimed at. Fairclough published it with her own illustrations, and this may have marked it out for many as a book for children. It contains Djinns and sorceresses, protective amulets and magical curses, and these too may have confirmed it as a fairy tale for younger readers. But it can also be read as a book that challenges the paradigm of adult fantasy set by Tolkien’s Lord of the Rings, which had been published a few years previously, in 1954-5, but had not yet gained the level of global popularity it would achieve in the 1960s. Fairclough’s book is set not in Europe but Western Asia – specifically Mesopotamia, the ‘Land of the Two Rivers’ as it’s known in Greek and Arabic (p. 7) – a place where a rich diversity of peoples and cultures converge, exchange ideas and live together in cooperative interdependence. It concerns, not a journey across a little-known landscape, but a city seeking to throw off the shackles of oppression; not a picked band of questers, chosen by an unelected Council of the Wise for a secret mission, but a network of friends from different classes and cultures drawn together by similar needs, whose mutual affection helps them turn the tide of tyranny and fashion a brief but brilliant Golden Age for their interlinked communities. The outcome of the book hinges on, not a single grand gesture that liberates the world from the threat of spiritual annihilation – casting the Ring into the Crack of Doom – but the continuous, exhausting, satisfying process of maintaining a small society in good order, as far as possible under the historical circumstances. A Ring is present in Fairclough’s novel, but it’s a Ring that once belonged to a just, wise ruler, not a despot, and for most of the book it’s assumed to have been lost, an apt metaphor for the fragility of just governance in a world where powerful people see the powerless as animals, and animals as commodities without rights or feelings. In addition, Fairclough’s Ring is not singular; it is one of multiple tokens and talismans which bind one community to another in a network of trust and affection – as against the bonds of fear and sorcery that bind the subservient rings in Tolkien’s text to the One Ring that controls them. Like Tolkien’s, Fairclough’s novel is exquisitely plotted, with a design like the richest of Persian carpets (though Fairclough’s illustrations call to mind miniatures, not rugs). And it draws attention at every point to the complementarity of art, politics and the natural world: a subject clearly close to Fairclough’s heart throughout her lifetime. In this, it serves as a perfect summary of the qualities that define her as an artist ahead of her time.

Anonymous miniature, 1431: Majnun in the desert with wild animals, from The Hermitage, St Petersburg. Click for details.

The book is divided into three parts. The first and longest (Chapter 2; I count Chapter 1 as a prologue) tells the tale of the Wazir Barmek, a shepherd from the mountains who finds himself unexpectedly appointed first minister to the new Sultan of Kashkot, an imaginary city-state somewhere in the north of the so-called ‘island’ between the great rivers Tigris and Euphrates.[2] The Sultan is an indolent young man called Khalid, Barmek’s best friend since childhood, who has himself been elevated from mountain shepherd to head of state with equal suddenness. Abruptly transplanted by the hand of God from his upland village to the city, from herding sheep to herding people, Barmek is forced to seek support from as many people in Kashkot as he can manage to make his friends: from the merchant Ali Houssain, to whom he once sold fleeces, to Hafiz, the Librarian of the Royal Palace; from Daresh, the Captain of the Sultan’s Royal Guard, to the bandit-rebel Khalidad; from the young dam engineer Farhad to the misanthropic caravan-master Austa Muthanna. His efforts to create a more or less equitable society are opposed by the Sultan’s wife, a sorceress who uses magic to pervert the city and its occupants into tools in her scheme to install her dead father Douban, the former Wazir, as Kashkot’s absolute ruler. Her machinations come to a climax with the transformation of Barmek into a Ram and his banishment from the city. The Wazir’s disappearance leaves her with unchallenged control over the Sultan, whose lazy self-indulgence plunges the city-state into tyranny as the Sultaness tightens her grip on its unfortunate people.

The second part, shorter than the first (Chapters 3-7), tells the story of various individuals who find themselves in exile from Kashkot before and after Barmek’s transformation. Chief among them is Zeid, the young Prince of Kashkot, who flees the city to escape the Sultaness’s schemes to sacrifice him in a bid to restore her father to life through sorcery; and Barmek’s young daughter Saffiya, who flees from the Sultaness’s machinations with her mother, guiding her to safety in Barmek’s old home in the mountains before setting off on a lonely quest to find the lost Wazir. The paths of these two young exiles eventually lead them back to Kashkot, and it’s there that the third and final section of the book takes place (Chapter 8), as the various threads of the narrative combine to bring about the restoration of Barmek to human form, the fall of the Sultan and Sultaness, and the installation of Zeid and Saffiya as joint rulers of the city. Their placement on the Sultan’s throne marks the transformation of Kashkot into a kind of Utopia; but as with Fairclough’s other stories this effect is achieved only after a book-long struggle, and its stability is not guaranteed. By that stage in the novel we have learned too much about the historical forces ranged against all Utopias to believe that any one of them can last for ever.

My summary describes what could be called the human aspect of Fairclough’s plot; but running through the book is a second thematic strand, devoted to the troubled relationship between humans and animals. Fairclough’s Mesopotamia is dependent on beasts of many kinds, from the sheep tended by mountain shepherds like Barmek to the donkeys, mules and camels that make up the caravans that traverse the great trade routes across the whole of Asia. At the same time, many of the Mesopotamians despise the nonhuman creatures they rely on, especially the dogs who guard their sheep and homes from the depredations of wolves both real and metaphorical. There is a similar disdain among many of Kashkot’s citizens for the lower orders of human beings who keep their homes and businesses running. Like other city-states in medieval times, Kashkot relies on slaves as well as beasts for its essential needs, and treats enslaved humans with as little dignity as dogs, mules and donkeys.

The same attitude prevails among the inhabitants of the spiritual realm that forms the third thematic strand in Fairclough’s novel. The lower orders of spirits are enslaved and treated like beasts by their more powerful superiors, with some notable exceptions such as the legendary sorcerer King Solomon, who might have served as a model of decent governance were it not for his failure to abolish the practice of slavery altogether. The presence of enslaved people and abused animals throughout Fairclough’s narrative gives it a darker tone than either of her previous works of fiction, and ties it more closely, perhaps, to the dark times it was written in.

The Lord of the Rings, First Edition.

The Lord of the Rings draws largely on European sources, from Beowulf to the Icelandic sagas, from the romances of William Morris to the quirky fantastic narratives of the first half of the twentieth century. The Blue Tree takes inspiration from a very different set of texts. These include The Thousand and One Nights, the Persian epic the Shahnameh, and the work of the great Iranian poets, such as Sa’adi – whose uncompromising advice to rulers is effectively embodied in the words and deeds of the Wazir Barmek – or Nizami, whose epic treatment of the legendary lover Majnun is mentioned in relation to the Wazir’s forced separation from his wife and daughter (p. 109). The Thousand and One Nights provides a model for the book’s interwoven narratives and themes, which run through each of its three sections, while the Shahnameh appears in the text as ‘The Book of Kings’, which is slowly being embellished with sumptuous illustrations under the direction of Hafiz, the royal librarian. The folktales of the incomparable Mullah Nasruddin may well have fed into Fairclough’s confection, relying as they so often do on Nasruddin’s friendly proximity to animals, especially his beloved donkey, which he is said to have ridden backwards while dispensing witty words of wisdom. Animals feature prominently in Iranian art and literature, from miniatures depicting the insane lover Majnun being protected by wild beasts to rugs like the Wagner Garden Carpet in Glasgow. All but two of Fairclough’s thirteen illustrations for her novel – a frontispiece in colour, the rest black and white – feature animals or mythical creatures as well as humans, thereby pointing up the three narrative strains – human, beast and mythic – that run through the text.[3]

The Wagner Garden Carpet, from the Burrell Collection, Glasgow. Click for details.

Another source is the many legends of King Solomon, as collected in St John Seymour’s Tales of King Solomon (1924) and elsewhere. Solomon’s legend was perhaps best known to British readers of Fairclough’s generation from its presence in H. Ryder Haggard’s bestselling novel King Solomon’s Mines (1885). One can detect Haggard’s influence on The Blue Tree in the presence both of a hidden kingdom next to Kashkot – the tiny realm of Lamissar, ‘a warm, sleepy valley ringed round with high mountains, whose people mined rubies while their lords practised magic’[4] – and of a powerful sorceress with power over life and death, who is referred to not by her name but as ‘the Daughter of Douban’, just as Ayisha in Haggard’s She (1887) is known for the most part only as She-Who-Must-Be-Obeyed. Fairclough’s novel, however, comes across as a critique of Haggard rather than a homage to him. At the beginning, the mountain kingdom of Lamissar is joined with the city on the plain, Kashkot, through marriage, as the Lamissar-born sorceress, the Daughter of Douban, weds Barmek’s boyhood friend Khalid, the new Sultan of Kashkot. Lamissar, then, never exists in a state of mysterious seclusion, unlike Haggard’s Kukuanaland; it is tied to the world by multiple strands or channels, some of them literal, such as the canal that carries water from a waterfall in Lamissar to the Kashkot Plain. In addition, the Lamissar sorceress’s bid to become She-Who-Must-Be-Obeyed is successfully resisted, not by a pair of upper-class British adventurers, but by a diverse collection of rebels from all classes and cultures united by their friendship for Barmek. Instead of a colonial quest into a hidden kingdom at the heart of the colonised territories, Fairclough’s story concerns (among other things) certain residents of that hidden kingdom, who then become residents of the neighbouring city and exert their influence over it. Besides the scheming Daughter of Douban, these include her fellow Lamissar native Abu Misimir, a ‘serene and efficient’ steward who becomes one of Barmek’s closest friends and imparts to him the magic talisman, the Blue Tree of the title, which protects him against the sorceress’s machinations. The mines of Lamissar serve not to enrich its rulers, or some white adventurers who penetrate its secrets, but to meet the needs of the people of both kingdoms under Barmek’s wise governance. Fairclough’s anti-lost-world romance is a work of social inclusiveness and multiculturalism rather than a bid to romanticize the exploits of British colonists.

Indeed, the only mention of European people in the book is as a distant crusading menace. In the second part of the novel, male members of a nomadic Bedouin tribe, the Beni Hillal, set off to combat that menace in support of the legendary commander, Salah-ed-Din or Saladin (p. 152); and at this point their adoptive son, Prince Zeid, returns to Kashkot to fulfil his destiny, symbolically turning his face away from Europe and towards the complex ecology of Asia. Kashkot, then, represents the polar opposite of a colonial narrative, and its exclusion of English or even European elements affirms Fairclough’s repudiation of the imperialist aspects of her British heritage.

In support of this anti-imperialist agenda, it’s worth noting that The Blue Tree embraces an unparalleled richness of different cultures, none of which gains precedence over the rest. These cultures are encountered not one by one, as they are in Tolkien’s there-and-back-again narrative journey, but as interacting with one another at each stage of Fairclough’s novel, and as coming together to spark off a popular insurrection in its third and final section. Within Kashkot’s territory there are the tall, proud folk of the mountains among whom Barmek grew up, cut off from Kashkot by snows throughout the winter months and fiercely independent in their characteristics and customs; the people of Lamissar, whose Zoroastrian heritage survives in the magic they secretly practise; and the Gamru Khel, small, tough men and women who wear knives even in bed, and who subsist in the poorest part of Kashkot’s demesnes by mining and working iron. Representatives of each of these peoples live in the city, alongside Jewish merchants – represented by the wise and empathic Ben Ephraim – and folk from distant lands – like the so-called ‘Black Pearl’, whose African tribe is known for producing ‘very great warriors’ (p. 103). All Kashkot’s inhabitants, including the enslaved Lamissar steward Abu Misimir, Kalidad the leader of the Gamru Khel, Ben Ephraim the Jew and the African Black Pearl, are drawn into the network of friendship that surrounds Barmek. Beyond Kashkot’s borders we meet the nomadic Mongols, waiting patiently for the moment when they will rise up to build the greatest empire in the world; the intellectuals of Ispahan, a city ‘seething with scholars, mad for learning, [and] drunk with argument’ (p. 45); the Children of Han in distant China, represented by the Chinese engineer who teaches the young Kashkot nobleman Farhad how to build canals; the Beni Hillal Bedouins, with whom young Prince Zeid finds shelter in exile; and the Mongolian shaman, Kamut-Shann the Merry, whose reputation for wisdom and magic extends from the Arctic north ‘where the white falcons breed’ to the ‘roof of the world’ – the Himalayas – and beyond, into ‘Hindostan’ (p. 179). All these people, too, find a place in Barmek’s story, sometimes at two or three removes. The Beni Hillal tribe, for example, are connected to Barmek through their rescue and raising of Prince Zeid, who ends by marrying Safiya, the Wazir’s daughter. The Children of Han are linked to Barmek by inspiring Farhad to build his canals – Farhad being the Wazir’s young protégé and friend. Little Dog learned in his quest how four different human peoples in North America were interconnected, and how they interacted in diverse ways with beasts and the land. The Blue Tree incorporates multiple cultures and communities into its portrait of a single city, refusing to privilege any one perspective, in direct defiance of the British imperialist tradition.

 

Many of Fairclough’s cultures have a special relationship with particular animals. Barmek’s mountain people, for instance, are shepherds, and so have a high regard for dogs: ‘although the Prophet (may Allah bless him!) did not like them,’ Barmek observes, ‘I have known many excellent dogs’ (p. 39). The Mongolian herdsmen privilege their horses above most humans. The Beni Hillal favour camels, and pass on their affection for these unruly beasts to their adoptive child, young Prince Zeid. Unusually close relationships with animals feature prominently in another text from Fairclough’s time associated with Solomon: Konrad Lorenz’s bestselling book Er redete mit dem Vieh, den Vögeln und den Fischen (1949), translated into English in 1952 as King Solomon’s Ring. The book’s English title references the Ring or Seal of Solomon, which certain legends identify as the source of his magic powers, while others affirm it gave him the power to communicate with animals. Lorenz’s book describes his own attempts to communicate with birds and beasts while developing the theories of animal psychology that eventually led to his being awarded the Nobel Prize. Fairclough’s interest in Grey Owl could well have led her to read King Solomon’s Ring as a natural follow-up to Belaney’s account of his relationships with Canadian beavers (she could not have known, in the 1950s, of Lorenz’s membership of the Nazi party, nor of his early linkage of his theories to the pseudo-science of eugenics). The Ring of Solomon features in The Blue Tree, though more as a source of magic than as a means of translating animal languages. Unlike Miskoo the Lucky or Little Dog and the Rainmakers there are no talking animals in Fairclough’s last novel; communication with beasts is achieved only by careful and sympathetic observation, of the kind Lorenz advocated. But Fairclough’s Ring does represent a covenant or agreement between a monarch and his people, a promise on the part of the king to protect his subjects – among whom he numbers animals and spirits as well as human beings – from oppression by the powerful. And her story of the Ring, and of that other protective talisman, The Blue Tree, features human-animal relations throughout its length. The topic is not foregrounded as it is in Fairclough’s other narratives, but emerges in the end as a crucial theme – perhaps the central theme – of this work of art.

The novel opens with a reimagining of the story of Solomon’s Ring (Chapter 1, which serves as a prologue). King Solomon, here named as Hazrat Suleman, is flying around his kingdom on his magic carpet, which also carries representatives of his various subjects: humans, animals, birds and spirits. At each corner of his carpet stands one of these representatives – the Prince of Men, the Prince of Demons, the Prince of Beasts and the Prince of Birds – keeping it ‘steady’ and the world in equilibrium (p. 7). Suleman’s generous understanding of the term ‘subject’ arises from the fact that in his lifetime the world is bigger than it is today, ‘with room in it for other races besides the race of men’ (p. 7). Indeed, the first use of Suleman’s Ring we witness – the only use, in fact – is to protect a nonhuman being, a Djinn from the island of Zanzibar, off Africa, who is being pursued by a malevolent Peri or female spirit, who wishes to enslave him. The Djinn is not Suleman’s subject, but he is a jeweller of great skill, a manufacturer of works of art in metal like the Ring on Suleman’s finger; and the King, we are told, has great sympathy for artists under duress, being a ‘fine architect’ himself who has been forced to make ugly buildings at the behest of his many wives (p. 8). The Peri, on the other hand, has terrible taste in jewels – her bracelets and bangles make Suleman ‘wince’ when he sees them (p. 10) – and no interest in artistic or personal freedoms, since she wishes the Djinn to fashion jewels exclusively for her. Suleman agrees to protect the Djinn by sealing him up in a mountain cave for a thousand years, using his Ring as a magic key. By the end of this time, he hopes, the Peri will have ‘found another jeweller and forgotten you’ (p. 8). Unfortunately, however, the King reckons without two things: that he may lose the Ring, which he needs to release the Djinn, and that the Peri may have a long and vindictive memory. The occurrence of both these eventualities triggers Fairclough’s plot. But before saying more, we need to dwell for a moment on that opening fable.

Fairclough, King Suleman’s Magic Carpet. Note the four representatives of Suleman’s subjects standing by the king, and the Djinn in the foreground clinging to the edge of the carpet.

The tale of the loss of Suleman’s Ring is a parable of multicultural open-mindedness pitted against capitalistic self-centredness and greed. The focus of this opening story – an artist threatened with slavery –  sets the problem of making good art in a troubled and unequal world at the heart of the novel that follows. Suleman understands the artist-jeweller’s problem as his own responsibility, regardless of boundaries between nations, races, classes or indeed species. He does his best to resolve it, suitably enough with a work of art he possesses, the Ring: using jewellery to save a jeweller, so to speak. Not long afterwards, however, he loses the Ring that will release the imprisoned artist, an incident based on Arabic sources (according to one legend, Solomon’s Ring was stolen from him by the demon Asmodeus, who ruled in Solomon’s place for forty days while the King wandered the earth in rags, before being restored to his throne by the Ring’s recovery). As a result, the Djinn finds himself alone and in darkness for over a thousand years; an apt metaphor for the condition of art under oppressive regimes. Such art and its practitioners do not cease to exist; they are merely locked away and rendered inaccessible, waiting for the moment when conditions are right for their release. Suleman, too, is lost in this period, since he dies not long after he imprisons the Djinn, and with him dies the art of equitable governance. With him, too, dies the sense of the world as something more than the province of human beings, as well as the sense of one’s responsibilities as extending beyond the interests of one’s nation, city, species, class, or self. Fairclough’s book addresses all these losses and the attempt to recover them; and as an artist, she represents that recovery in terms of art.

Like the term ‘subject’ in Suleman’s lifetime, which has a wider compass than ours, Fairclough’s understanding of the term ‘art’ extends far beyond the work of self-identified ‘artists’. Among the craftspeople she celebrates in her novel are the Librarian, who spends his life working on a true history of his times to counter the sanitised official version; a canal engineer, who seeks to construct a water system to irrigate the Plain of Kashkot and bring much-needed water to the city; the Captain of the Guard and one of his guardsmen, who specialise in the arts of combat, including wrestling; a caravan master who is also an adept in the art of travel; two women (Barmek’s wife and mother) who practise the art of running a household; and many more. As Wazir of Kashkot, Barmek becomes patron and enabler of all these forms of art, showing as much appreciation for, say, the art of training horses or the art of wrestling as he does for the telling of tales and the weaving of carpets.[5]

Fairclough’s painting of Keynsham in Keynsham Library. My thanks to Tim Whyte, Keynsham Library Manager, for taking the photo. Click for details.

Fairclough’s own appreciation of the arts extended well beyond the conventional province of the art school graduate. A substantial painting she produced for Keynsham Library – which can still be seen there – embraces a range of specialist activities, from music and spinning to chocolate-making and playing with a ball. There is a portrait of the composer Handel, who is said to have gifted Keynsham church with a peal of bells in exchange for its organ; a cinema showing Walt Disney’s great animated feature, Bambi (1942); a workman manufacturing the brassware for which Keynsham was once famous; a huntsman on horseback chasing deer; a chocolate maker at Fry’s factory in Keynsham; a footballer and a cricket player; a soldier arm-in-arm with a dragon, which could represent the Keynsham Mummer’s play of Saint George, in which the saint is killed by a soldier called Slasher (although there is no Dragon in this version of George’s story);[6] a blacksmith shoeing a horse; and many industrial workers and farm labourers. All these people could be described as artists in their own practices, and Fairclough’s enshrining of them in a work of art unites them all under art’s umbrella, celebrating their craftsmanship just as Barmek celebrates and supports the craftsmanship of Kashkot’s diverse citizens.

Along the bottom of Fairclough’s Keynsham painting runs a series of animal paintings (badger, stoats, fox, rabbits, squirrel and otter), as if to confirm nonhuman beings as the roots or foundations of human life. Animals are scattered through the painting, too, including sheep in a field and on a boat. The sheep may remind us that the foundations of the Wazir Barmek’s success as a ruler lie in his skills as a mountain shepherd, an intermediary between humans and beasts. In his home village he is not a leader, but rather ‘one of those reliable people to whom other people leave all the work’ (p. 13), especially the work of looking after his indolent friend Khalid, the care of the community’s flocks, and selling fleeces in the Kashkot market. He knows the vagaries of the seasons, moving his flocks from high ground to low as winter turns to spring.  He knows the practical needs of his people: as he transports his fleeces to market he keeps going over the shopping list his community has given him, which includes salt, coffee, rice, and ‘a fine copper coffee-pot for my mother’ (p. 13). And he knows the needs of the mules that carry the fleeces. When a cheeky melon-seller pops his load of melons onto the lead mule’s back, hoping to cadge a free ride, Barmek tells him to transfer the melons to another beast because ‘This mule is loaded heavily enough’ (p. 15). When he reaches Kashkot and finds it buzzing with excitement at the prospect of the selection of a new Sultan after the death of the old one, Barmek again thinks first of his mules – ‘a string of restive mules […] not used to crowds’ (p. 16) – and makes sure they are soothed and watered while Khalid rushes off to enjoy the spectacle. Fairclough’s attention to the detail of Barmek’s work with animals tells us at once about the man’s personality; he takes less care for himself than for the needs of the people and creatures who depend on him, and his particular care for animals identifies him as humane as well as well-organised, two qualities that prove essential for his political career.

Fairclough: Barmek watches from a distance at the ceremony of the choosing of the Sultan. Note the drummers on black camels and the white horse bearing Khaled, the new Sultan. Click for details.

As I’ve already suggested, animals permeate The Blue Tree, and while this may not be obvious at once to Fairclough’s readers, Barmek proves unusually attentive to their presence. For instance, Barmek’s perception of the ceremony for selecting the new Sultan is entirely mediated through his response to the nonhuman beings involved. He notes how there is a horse at the centre of the ceremonial parade, and how ‘so glorious was the horse […] that although its bridle was purple and its headband set with rubies, yet they looked cheap upon it’ (p. 17). He notes too that the leading actor in the selection process – a Hawk whose choice of Sultan must by tradition be respected by Kashkot’s citizens – is a ‘slim small streak of a bird, white and lovely as the horse’ (p. 17). When the Hawk turns its head towards him, he promptly bows as though ‘to a small and terrible king’. Barmek’s values, the scene suggests, are based on his personal judgment of living creatures, not on conventional human priorities or hierarchies, and the creatures and people he values respond to Barmek’s qualities as he responds to theirs.

For Barmek, animals are foundational to his working life as well as to the political life of the city. His recognition of their importance is reflected in his treatment of them, just as his treatment of people reflects his recognition that every one of them forms an integral part of the community he belongs to; for instance, he has a fountain in the city constructed so that animals as well as people can drink from its waters (p. 110). His acknowledgement of the kinship between beasts and humans stems from the fact that he sees himself as no more than equal to the animals that serve him. His job as the new Wazir, the chief minister and effective ruler of the city (p. 20), represents a great sacrifice on his part – he would much rather go back to his life in the mountains, with sheep, mules and dogs; and this makes him effectively the Sultan’s indentured servant for the term of the Sultan’s life. In the end, in fact, it makes him the Sultan’s slave, since he is increasingly treated as a slave by the Sultaness, who first deprives him of wife and daughter by sending them into exile using her sorcery, then transforms Barmek himself into a speechless Ram. As a result, Barmek has a high regard for his fellow servants – who include animals like the Hawk, the white horse, and a ferocious stallion known as Blood-for-Breakfast (p. 98) – and for the enslaved human people who become his friends.

The new Sultan, Khaled, fights with the Wazir Douban, as he seeks to consolidate his hold on the throne. Note the vultures overhead, which Fairclough discusses in detail on p. 31.

Indeed, the Wazir ‘reads’ human beings as animals repeatedly. For him the Captain of the Guard, Daresh, resembles a dog, who worries at problems ‘like a dog with a burr in his tail’ (p. 22). So does the steward Abu Misimir, though he also has characteristics of a sheep (p. 39). Barmek’s friend the Khan of the Southern Marches has a close physical likeness to the eagles he hunts with (p. 51). The loyal guardsman Dhiab first recalls a dog (p. 60) and later a mule (p. 70); the Keeper of the Royal Treasury calls to mind a ‘tortoise in a cave’ (p. 66); Barmek’s wife Najla resembles ‘a duck on a swift current’ as she rides to her wedding (p. 82); and the warrior-brigand Kalidad has the reflexes of a feral cat (p. 91). All these people are Barmek’s allies, but his enemies too have nonhuman qualities. The carpet-seller Ibrahim, whose lack of talent as a maker of carpets leads him to despise and betray more talented people out of envy and self-interest, resembles a crow: one of those ‘crows that follow many ploughs, the makers of patch-work, taking an idea here and a colour there, a form of words, another man’s methods, and striving to make a new thing without power to create’ (p. 112). The analogy ties him to the unscrupulous crow Kahgahgengs in Little Dog and the Rainmakers, who thieves from his fellow animals and endangers children’s lives for his own amusement. The Daughter of Douban, meanwhile, shifts her animal nature as it suits her, sometimes recalling a ‘wicked cat’ (p. 36), at others a bat (p. 104), and ending her days as a bird in a cage (p. 105), suitably enough for a person who has specialised in caging others. Like Ibrahim, however, she most closely resembles Kahgahgengs the self-serving crow. When she contrives to send Barmek’s family into exile, Barmek forces her to observe them every day through her magic powers, like the wicked Queen in Snow White (1937), reporting back to him on their wellbeing, though she cannot tell him where they are or what they are doing (pp. 104-5; p. 167). In the same way, the Jossakeed of Lost Lake in Little Dog forced Kahgahgengs to keep an eye on Little Dog’s progress across the continent in search of rain, reporting every day on his wellbeing, though the crow too could not say where the boy was or what he was up to. As with Ibrahim, the Sorceress’s willingness to make other people her instruments ends by condemning her to becoming an instrument herself, a fate all the more terrible for her in that she has no concept of self-sacrifice for the common good, unlike Barmek and his friends.

Barmek, on the other hand, is concerned with the wellbeing of the whole community, not just himself and his family, and repeatedly finds common ground with his fellow citizens. At one key point in the novel, for instance, he makes friends with a dishevelled young man who resembles ‘a trapped, half-starved animal’ (p. 42) of the kind he might have encountered in the mountains. The Wazir is drawn to this young man when he sees a model the boy is making out of mud in the palace garden, which he recognises at once as a model of Kashkot and its territories, with a non-existent canal running through the middle. Barmek can ‘read’ the model, so to speak, thanks to his shepherd’s training (‘Every hillman has an eye for country, and having once seen a place can recognise it again, even from a different direction’, p. 42), just as he can ‘read’ the young man’s character thanks to his shepherd’s instinctive sympathy for ill-treated beasts. He ‘tames’ the wild young man, whose name is Farhad, by kindness, ‘moving and talking quietly as if he were dealing with a frightened animal’ (p. 43); and in the process learns that Farhad’s father was put to death by the former Wazir, after which the boy and his brothers sought to avenge themselves ‘like wolves on the world that had killed him’ (p. 47). For their insurrection against the corrupt old Sultan and his wicked minister, Farhad’s brothers were executed, while Farhad was made a slave for Douban’s amusement. The wolf analogy links him to the young warrior Steals-in-the-Snow in Little Dog, who likewise seeks revenge for the death of his family. Steals-in-the-Snow and his older brothers resemble ‘gaunt […] winter wolves’ or ‘lone wolves who have been turned out of the pack’ (Little Dog, pp. 92 and 100), and all of them meet a violent end. Farhad, on the other hand, finds safe haven with Barmek: he is embraced by the new Wazir, restored to freedom and given a useful job. In recompense, Barmek finds in Farhad an expert engineer, whose plan to supply Kashkot with fresh, clean water transforms the city and its environs, bringing new birds and crops to the area formerly known as the ‘Waste of Kashkot’ and ensuring that the Wazir can install his lifesaving fountains in the city streets. Barmek’s sensitivity to beasts and beast-like people, in other words, helps revolutionize Kashkot’s ecology, making it a byword for good land management in twelfth-century Asia.

Barmek’s future wife, Najla daughter of Daresh, watches as Barmek and Farhad ride by on their horses. Najla drops snow on Barmek’s head to draw his attention.

Before joining his brothers’ rebellion, Farhad learned his engineering skills in Ispahan (now Isfahan), an Iranian city ‘seething with scholars [and] drunk with argument’ (p. 45). Here he met a Chinese engineer, with whom he travelled for three years through Mesopotamia, studying the ancient canal systems that criss-cross the land between the Tigris and the Euphrates. The young man, then, embodies the pan-Asian connections between different human cultures that enable Kashkot to flourish. Another of Barmek’s unlikely friends, the caravan master Austa Muthanna, embodies the pan-Asian connections between human beings and animals. Indeed, animals are responsible for all pan-Asian connections, providing as they do the locomotive energy for the caravans that link Kashkot to Samarkand, Charchan and China (p. 72). Farhad and his Chinese teacher must join caravans to travel safely through Mesopotamia; the merchants of Kashkot, including Ben Ephraim, rely on caravans to send their goods to distant clients; and Austa Muthanna is the most trustworthy caravan master the merchants know of. He is hard on the human ‘riff-raff’ who travel with his caravans, but looks after his animals with the tenderness of a father, and ‘never, never, has he been known to lose one bale of merchandise entrusted to him’, Barmek learns (p. 73). Between them, Farhad and Austa Muthanna confirm Kashkot’s reliance both on its wider Asian context for its prosperity, and on its nonhuman associates to maintain ties with its distant collaborators.

But Austa Muthanna also confirms how far this urban civilization has gone from the easy interdependence between humans and beasts that characterised Fairclough’s first two works of fiction. Animals ‘afflicted of Allah and men’, such as dogs and donkeys, flock to Muthanna in their droves whenever he visits Kashkot, their injuries bearing witness to the violence with which they are handled (p. 72). Barmek sees the caravan master tending to their wounds and speaking to the ‘wolfish’ dogs of Kashkot ‘as to his friends, or his children, his voice rising and falling in a soothing growl’ (p. 75). This makes Muthanna the sole remaining custodian of the ability to communicate with animals that seemed to be common to all humans in Miskoo the Lucky and Little Dog. Muthanna’s own body testifies to equal ill-treatment at some undisclosed period in his past: ‘His face was […] evilly scarred, with one eyelid drooping, a long crooked nose and a bitter mouth’ (p. 75), and the only human associate he can bear is a disabled henchman whose face recalls that of a ‘wistful monkey’ (p. 75), making him ‘as like to an animal as might be’ (p. 76). Muthanna’s disgust for all other human company suggests that the abuse of beasts (and unfortunate human beings) is prevalent across the continent, every part of which he has visited in his travels. The Daughter of Douban’s propensity for diminishing people, as she sees it, by treating them as she treats animals – which is what made Farhad ‘wolfish’ – and the Peri’s delight in making them actual animals through her magic, would seem to be symptomatic of a wider breakdown in relations between human peoples and their nonhuman neighbours, of the kind Grey Owl exposed in the Canadian wilderness.

Barmek, looking out of the window, yearns for the mountains. Beside him is one of the Peri’s magic carpets, which will shortly change him into a Ram.

As one might expect, Barmek’s own understanding of animals allows him to gain the respect and trust of the misanthropic caravan master, and with it some of the insights he has gained from his travels. Being a close and impartial observer of the ebb and flow of the natural world, Muthanna lays claim to the role of a historical commentator like the Royal Librarian, Hafiz, who writes an accurate account of his times in secret while simultaneously preparing a doctored version for the eyes of his tyrannical master, Sultan Khalid. Muthanna is able to speak with authority from a number of positions unavailable to a scholar confined to his library: ‘as the Caravan-master, responsible for lives and merchandise; as the traveller whose eyes are open for the use of a lively and open mind; and as that sometimes terrible thing, the historian who sees the inescapable pattern reaching from the past into the future’ (p. 108). His most striking insights come from an inspection of the condition of the Asian grasslands, on which nomadic horse-herders graze their beasts and whose health or sickness determines their movements. ‘A great, torn, patched green cloak lies over the earth from the Land of the Bright Emperor to the lands of the Feranghis [the European foreigners]’ he tells Barmek, ‘the cloak of the grass’ (p. 108). ‘Out on the cloak of the grass,’ he goes on,

moving with the seasons, were villages, colonies, townships of felt-covered yurts, each owning some Khan as leader to whose war-banner they would rally. And round each cluster of yurts were the herds, the unbelievable herds of the horses, and where the grazing was, there the herds must go. […] For it is the grass, look you, nothing but the grass. Neither love of wealth nor hatred of their enemies will move those hordes, but grass for their horses. They ride into Bokhara and Samarkand, they sell hawks in learned Ispahan, and what do they see? Land that is wasted, for there are cities and gardens on it instead of grass. (pp. 108-9)

One day, Muthanna warns, the dwellers in yurts will decide to clear away these urban centres to make new grazing grounds for their animals; and on that day ‘Bokhara shall become a mud-heap and Thaikan a salt-lick and Ispahan a pile of skulls’ (p. 109). When Barmek thanks him for this warning, Muthanna laughs his laugh ‘like the scream of a peacock’ (p. 106) and reassures him this will not happen for generations. He has told Barmek the story only to comfort him with the thought that after his death the city he ruled will be swept aside, helplessly subject to the changing climate and its consequences. Muthanna has noted the sadness in Barmek’s face, born from the loss of his wife and daughter, and wishes to help him as best he can – including with a bag of pearls, which later supports the poor of Kashkot through a harsh winter, and the gift of another Ring, a ‘great carved emerald’ as green as the grasslands, which the Wazir keeps as a token of their friendship (p. 106). Barmek’s post-loss bitterness chimes with Muthanna’s, but both men find comfort in the knowledge that in the other they have found ‘faith and compassion and courage’ in a human being, and not solely ‘among the four-footed and the winged’ (p. 110). At this late moment in the first section of the novel, Barmek has come to recognise that such qualities are rare among humans and to treasure them all the more wherever he finds them.

The child Prince Zeid rides on a donkey as part of Austa Muthanna’s caravan. A dervish who was once King Suleman walks beside him and Muthanna can be seen in the distance.

The Daughter of Douban, meanwhile, deploys her magic skills not to complement the natural order but to supplant it. She aims to resuscitate her father, killed – or placed in a magical state of suspended animation – by Barmek’s arrow in the course of the fighting that followed Khalid’s selection as Sultan. After she marries Khalid, as part of her plot to install Douban on the Kashkot throne, her first work of enchantment is to make roses grow from pots in winter, their fragrance serving to confuse the senses of those who are exposed to it for any extended period:

from each briar sprang sprays of small green leaves, from each spray a stalk of golden buds, and each golden bud opened into a white velvety rose with a golden centre; and from the last rose to open flew a golden bee and lit on all the other nineteen briars in turn, so that each of them split and budded and blossomed, and the whole Palace was filled with their scent (p. 52).

These roses, the Sorceress claims, will bloom every day while Khalid lives, counting out the days till she can replace him with her resurrected father. They emit the scent of death, not life, and on the day of Khalid’s assassination their corrupting nature becomes apparent as they wither and stink while continuing to grow, ‘filling the Hall, reaching, spreading’, in mimicry of the Sultaness’s relentless quest for power (p. 191). Her second act of enchantment after her marriage is to fashion a Figure of wax and pierce it with pins, thereby wracking Barmek’s body with pain and making him lose a wrestling match in front of the assembled courtiers (p. 60). As a consequence of this incident, Barmek’s friend Abu Misimir gives into his keeping the talisman known as the Blue Tree, which protects him for the rest of his time as Wazir from the worst effects of the Sultaness’s sorcery (p. 64). The talisman confirms Barmek as the Daughter of Douban’s polar opposite, just as his possession of Muthanna’s green Ring identifies him as an ally of the so-called ‘Watcher of Grass’ (p. 108). By the end of the first section of Fairclough’s narrative, the opposing factions have been established and the stakes they play for have been identified. These are nothing less than opposing ways of relating to the environment, which the Sultaness would exploit for her own advantage, while the Wazir would render it hospitable for all his subjects, human and nonhuman alike. The next two sections of the novel trace the complex processes by which the Wazir’s vision emerges victorious from the conflict.

The child Saffiya leads her amnesiac mother towards the house of Barmek’s mother. One of the few pictures in the book with no animals in it.

Human-animal relationships are key to this unlikely victory. The Wazir’s transformation into a Ram is effected by the wicked Peri, as she seeks to impose her will on the children of men in open mockery of the equitable government of Hazrat Suleman, by turning people into what she sees as the nearest equivalent animal. But the Daughter of Douban and the Peri are clearly allies from the start, their green-painted eyes and pleasure in self-adornment and self-serving magics linking them long before we learn, in the third section of the novel, that they count each other as ‘kindred spirits’ (p. 168). Suleman, meanwhile, passes on his wisdom as ruler to Barmek (p. 38), who thereby becomes his successor in the art of just governance. This means that Barmek’s removal from power serves the interests of both Peri and Sultaness. His bestial transformation forms part of a larger scheme on the Peri’s part to transform representatives of four ‘races’ of men into beasts, in formal pastiche of the four strange beings that sat at the corners of Suleman’s carpet – the Prince of Men, the Prince of Demons, the Prince of Beasts and the Prince of Birds. She effects the transformations with her own form of magic carpet, commissioned from the crow-like carpet-weaver Ibrahim: four carpets, to be exact, each sporting a pattern as hideous as that of her jewels, with a closed eye at the centre (to signify the shutting down of the senses and the mind) and a swarm of black and red beetles all around (to signify the Peri’s perception of human beings as no better than insects). With these magic carpets the Peri hopes to entrap in animal form four individuals from the major human religions: the Christian monarch Richard the Lionheart; an anonymous man from Confucian, Buddhist and Taoist imperial China; a member of Suleman’s own Jewish nation; and of course the Muslim Wazir. Her plans go awry in several ways. Instead of Richard, the Sultan’s lost son Prince Zeid is accidentally transformed, Barmek goes missing after his transformation, and one of the carpets is seized by the Mongolian shaman Kamut-Shann. But the metamorphoses of Barmek into a Ram, Prince Zeid into a Camel and Ben Ephraim into a Monkey provide perfect working models of the demeaning philosophy of the Peri and the Sultaness, both of whom see their fellow human and nonhuman creatures as animated objects to be exploited for gain. In this they resemble the post-war profiteer and murderer Harry Lime, memorably played by Orson Welles in Carol Reed’s movie The Third Man (1949), who sees his fellow men as no better than the insects they resemble when viewed from the summit of a Viennese Ferris wheel.

Ranged against these potent demeaners of living creatures are the individuals who cherish beings of other species.  Suleman, Barmek and Austa Muthanna are three of these, along with that lover of eagles, hawks and horses, the Khan of the Southern Marches. But the younger generation, too, includes its share of animal lovers. Prince Zeid, for instance, as a child on the run from the Sultaness, takes an injured donkey to Muthanna for treatment, thereby endearing himself to the caravan master as far as any human can. Muthanna responds by smuggling him out of Kashkot with his beasts of burden, but is later tempted to sell him in Baghdad for a bag of pearls – the same pearls he later presents to Barmek in partial compensation for his betrayal of Prince Zeid. The boy, meanwhile, is rescued from slavery by Muthanna’s beastlike henchman, Ahmed, who spirits him away to be adopted by the Bedouins; and it’s among the Bedouins that Zeid develops a deep knowledge of and affection for camels. Indeed, his love of camels leads to his transformation, as he seeks to lighten the load of a beast which is carrying one of the Peri’s magic carpets (p. 154). The carpet’s magic is unleashed as soon as he touches it, and Zeid becomes, for a while, one of the camels he loves, before being freed from camel form by a young woman who can see ‘human’ qualities in animals. Zeid’s narrative, in other words, is determined as much by his own and other people’s humaneness towards beasts as by the willingness of other humans to show humanity to a lost child – that is, to see themselves in him and to see him as one of themselves.

Prince Zeid after being raised as a Bedouin. One of his beloved camels can be seen in the background, as well as his adoptive sister.

The woman who restores Prince Zeid to human form is Saffiya, Barmek’s daughter. Saffiya shares with her father a lifelong affinity with nonhuman creatures, especially dogs. Driven from Kashkot with her mother Najla by the Sultaness, she finds her way to a haven in the mountains, where three dogs appoint themselves guardians for Najla, whose memory has been suppressed by the Sorceress’s magic. The three dog-guardians are joined in their task by the doglike wrestler-guardsman Dhiab, who was also banished from Kashkot by the Sultaness; and with these four highly qualified sentinels watching her mother, Saffiya feels free to set off alone to seek Zeid, with whom she forged an unbreakable bond in early childhood. In her wanderings she makes friends with a colony of Bats, the ‘leather-winged children of the night’ (p. 157), who first liberate her from the fortress of an assassin master, Hasan-i-Sabbah, then escort her to the cave where the Djinn is imprisoned – another nonhuman being with whom she bonds. One year later, the same Bats inform her of the transformation of Prince Zeid, which can only be reversed by someone who can recognise the victim and ‘without hesitation declare their love for him’ (p. 158); in other words, by someone capable of seeing beyond the surface ‘ugliness’ of a beast. The Bats lead Saffiya from the cave to a valley dominated by the statue of a human-nonhuman hybrid, a lama or sphinx that represents a dead monarch who combines the human virtues with the virtues of the beasts with which he is melded. The image unites ‘the powerful lion’s body, the great bird’s lifting wings, and the serene watching head of a man’ (p. 159), recalling the four Princes on Suleman’s carpet who took the shapes of a human, a more-than-human being, an eagle and a lion. The statue, then, could stand for Suleman, the dead king who still has a hand in human affairs; and it could also stand for Saffiya’s father Barmek, Suleman’s living representative. Studying the statue, Saffiya sees in it characteristics of the lost Wazir; and moments later she recognizes a passing Ram as Barmek himself, though she cannot make him human because that is a task for her mother. Soon afterwards, however, she recognizes a Camel as Prince Zeid, the young man she has been looking for; and she is able to humanize him at once. Like Zeid’s, then, her story is driven by her capacity to embrace human-nonhuman relations as an integral part of what makes her herself. In this, the second section of Fairclough’s narrative (Chapters 3 to 7), bats, camels, donkeys, lions, dogs and eagles combine with the efforts of human beings to bring Zeid and Saffiya together. And in the third and final section (Chapter 8), revolution itself becomes a matter of collaboration between human and nonhuman entities, making common cause against the forces of oppression.

The third section is also dominated by climate catastrophe, which here as in Little Dog and the Rainmakers has potentially disastrous consequences for humans and animals alike. Hafiz the Librarian remarks on the rainfall in every entry of his clandestine annals of this late period in the Sultan’s reign. He notes, too, the Sultan’s failure to respond to the dangers this rainfall embodies – the greatest danger being that the dam constructed by Farhad to feed his canals will burst and overwhelm the city. Farhad orders raw materials from distant lands to help shore up the structure, but the materials are commandeered for the Sultan’s purposes, and anyone who resists his orders to repurpose them gets tortured or killed. As a result, parallel with the mounting floodwaters runs the mounting resentment of the people, to which we are given access through the eyes and feelings of Barmek’s friends. One after the other these friends conclude that the Sultan himself must be killed: the Librarian Hafiz, whose knowledge of the Book of Kings is supplemented by eavesdropping on the dire goings-on in the royal palace; the Lamissari merchant Ali Houssain, who keeps tabs on the city’s failing economy; Farhad the canal engineer and former rebel; Kalidad, the chieftain of those knife-wielding ironworkers, the Gamru Khel; the blacksmith Mushtaq the Ironmaster, who is one of his relatives; and the caravan master Austa Muthanna, who finds himself caring for Kashkot because of the good Wazir, now lost, who once ruled it wisely. Each of these people except Hafiz have been linked in the past to some form of hostility against Kashkot’s rulers – and as a historian, Hafiz is intensely conscious of the causes and effects of this kind of hostility. While Barmek held power, the Wazir succeeded in uniting them in communal work on behalf of their fellow citizens; but in his absence they begin to realign themselves (still on behalf of their fellow citizens) as enemies of the Sultan. Flood and rebellion, then, threaten the land like aspects of each other; and Austa Muthanna links this sense of an imminent dual catastrophe to a second approaching crisis caused by the climate: the prophesied attack of the Mongol hordes, as their horses consume the resources of Asia’s grasslands and they begin to look elsewhere for pasturage. Muthanna is concerned that Kashkot will be destroyed alongside grander cities – Samarkand and Isfahan – in that human deluge; but the concern he feels for the little city state brings it hope even as he expresses it, in the shape of Muthanna’s one close human friend, whom we only meet in this final section, as he pours out to her his fears for Barmek’s kingdom.

Austa Muthanna with the shaman Kamut-Shann, whose animal guests include a fox cub and a fawn. Surrounding them are the horses which will change the course of world history.

That human is the Mongolian shaman Kamut-Shann the Merry. We first meet Kamut-Shann at her yurt in the company of an abandoned fawn and a wolf-cub – natural enemies united under her aegis, like the scriptural lion and lamb. Her appearance in the narrative signals the confluence of all the many narrative strands Fairclough has so far kept in play; in each case, these strands reach a point of crisis in this third section, and Kamut-Shann the Merry represents the hope that they may be resolved and their many characters and communities reconciled, as the wolf and fawn have been reconciled in the shade of her yurt. As a Mongol, Kamut-Shann is well aware of the imminent rising of the Mongol hordes, and she makes no promises that she can fend them off from Kashkot: after all, she tells Muthanna, ‘shall one woman and a [shamanic] drum turn aside the armies of Jenghis Khan?’ (p. 180). But she willingly gives her aid in the smaller conflict with the Sultan, the Sultaness, and their supernatural patroness, the Peri, and with Muthanna she begins the long journey from the grasslands where her yurt is pitched to the plain where the city stands. On the way they pick up members of Barmek’s household – Abu Misimir and the Black Pearl, Saffiya and her lover Prince Zeid – as well as a ‘small shimmering cloud’ of migrant butterflies, which spontaneously joins the growing pilgrimage in homage to the shaman (p. 186). The resolution of political crisis, Fairclough implies, cannot be achieved without reconciliation with the natural world, whose delicacy and energy is perfectly captured in the ‘small shimmering cloud’. And it cannot be achieved, she also implies, without paying attention to the politics of the household. Kamut-Shann’s nomadic existence – transferring her yurt from place to place, while her fame extends from polar regions to the Himalayas – makes the local global, while the presence in her household of wild animals as well as people extends the definition of the home far beyond the walls that enclose its traditional occupants. Kamut-Shann, in fact, embodies the ever-changing interface between humans, animals, the climate and the land, and her appearance at the point of crisis signifies the resurgence in Fairclough’s text of utopian possibility; a possibility based on a more inclusive philosophy than even Barmek embodied in the book’s first section.

Together, Muthanna and the shaman, Barmek’s family and his friends converge on Kashkot, bringing with them the potential for a Tolkienesque eucatastrophe – the sudden turn from certain disaster to unexpected joy, as expressed in Tolkien’s essay ‘On Fairy Stories’. At this very moment, other strands of Fairclough’s narrative converge. First, the Captain of the Guards, Daresh – the first friend Barmek made in the palace after his appointment as Wazir – makes up his mind that his loyalty is to the people rather than the Sultan, and stabs Khaled to death at the foot of his throne. At the same moment, the small, fierce people known as the Gamru Khel – as famous for fighting as for working iron – attack the city, aiming to bring down the oppressor. At the same moment the climate crisis comes to a head. Farhad’s dam bursts its boundaries, unleashing its waters on the Plain of Kashkot. Daresh and the royal Guard, mounted on their horses, head for the dam; so too do the Gamru Khel. In a gesture of collective self-sacrifice Daresh, the Guard and their horses hurl themselves at the gap in the dam, staunching it with their dying bodies, while the Gamru Khel use their skills as engineers to consolidate the temporary repair. Self-sacrifice and artistry or craftsmanship combine to save the city, just as self-sacrifice and ritual artistry ended the drought in Little Dog.

So much for the human strand that plays its part in this final section (though the horses of the Guard play a crucial role in this strand, too). The animal strand follows, as Austa Muthanna enters Kashkot – riding, like the palace Guard, on a beloved horse – to deal with the Sultaness. He has been sent on ahead by Kamut-Shann to marshal the natural world as it exists within the city walls against the city’s oppressor. At his invitation, the despised dogs of Kashkot descend on the palace ‘like flood water’ to drag the Sultaness from her private chambers to the public square (p. 192), where she is caged like an abused animal in full view of the citizens and beasts she has persecuted. The day of her defeat becomes known as the Day of the Dogs, reversing the centuries of marginalization and abuse that have been visited on them by inscribing their species into the annals of history. Her reduction to the level at which she measured both beasts and disempowered humans coincides with the restoration of the final victim of the Peri’s magic to human form, as the merchant Ben Ephraim is recognised and embraced – despite the monkey shape into which the Peri changed him – by his nephew. Meanwhile the shaman, when she arrives, subjects the Daughter of Douban to the magic of the Peri’s carpets, allowing the sorcery which has so far served the Sultaness so well to transform her into the humiliating shape of a goose. Trapped by her own strategies in the shape of a being she has always considered base, the Sultaness is given her freedom by Kamut-Shann, liberated to fly wherever she wishes after leaving the city. But her own philosophy, which drives clear wedges between human and nonhuman, ruler and oppressed, ensures that she will never enjoy that freedom, unless by some revolutionary upheaval in her mind she can reconcile herself to a new, inclusive way of thinking.

Najla recognises her husband Barmek in the shape of a Ram. Her now elderly guard dogs can be seen in the foreground, while the one-eyed Guardsman Dhiab watches from above.

Meanwhile, the animal strand of the narrative comes full circle as the white Hawk flies twice to select a new Sultan to replace the old one, in obedience to the ritual function it fulfilled in the early pages of Fairclough’s novel. Before the revolution began, readers saw it land on the chest of the newly-restored Barmek (p. 166), whose wife Najla had earlier recognised him in the shape of a Ram, expressed her love for him, and dissolved the spell that held him, confirming as she did so that she had fully recovered her memory. We learn a few pages later that the Hawk left the palace when Muthanna set fire to it on the Day of the Dogs (p. 193). Barmek, in other words, plays no direct part in the revolution that brings down the Daughter of Douban – though the revolution might never have taken place without the friendships and alliances he forged. His principal gesture, in fact, is a repudiation of involvement in politics, as he gives up the position of Sultan bestowed on him by the Hawk and instead sends the bird flying towards Prince Zeid, the last Sultan’s son (p. 197). Zeid’s face is so like Khalid’s that at first Barmek takes him for Khalid himself, before realising that he is young and uncorrupted – a Khalid as he might have been under different circumstances. The Hawk, then, ends the book by correcting the false course it took in the opening pages, settling on Zeid and inaugurating a new era for Kashkot, an era in which Saffiya replaces the Daughter of Douban as Sultaness; an era when the Sultan is guided by his wife’s empathy for both human and nonhuman creatures. A bird and some dogs, along with the horses that carry Barmek, Mouthanna and the Guard, usher in Kashkot’s new era, just as a horse and a Hawk ushered in the old one.

The supernatural strand of the narrative, meanwhile, arrives at a state of eucatastrophe before ever Muthanna or Barmek reaches the city. Before entering Kashkot, Kamut-Shann stages a final showdown with the Peri, summoning the spirit to her with a whistle like the ones shepherds use to call their dogs (p. 186). There follows a fight between Peri and shaman (p. 187), a duel of magic that evokes the duel between Merlin and Madam Mim in T. H. White’s The Sword in the Stone (1938), or the Wizard Howl’s duel with the Witch of the Waste in Diana Wynne Jones’s Howl’s Moving Castle (1986). Fairclough’s duel, however, is between two female practitioners of magic, not a male wizard and a female witch, a form of combat which invariably ends in the death of the woman. It is fought out in the form of beasts and other forces of nature – ‘waves of the sea, […] two fishes in a stream, two ants in the grass, two hawks in the sky’ (p. 187) – before the shaman brings it to an end by striking her opponent in the form of a thunderbolt, destroying her utterly. The Peri’s destruction unleashes a shower of tasteless jewellery, including the Ring she purloined many years before from Suleman; resurrected as an ascetic wandering Dervish, the King has been searching for this Ring for more than twenty years, and all the time it has been hidden up the Peri’s sleeve, reduced to an object as worthless and impotent as her bangles. With the Ring’s help the King is able at last to release the Djinn, though the prisoner has in fact been free to leave his cave for many years, ever since the waterfall that veiled its entrance was diverted from its course to feed Kashkot’s canals (pp. 155-6). The Djinn may yet refuse to leave, Kamut-Shann points out, from ingrained habit (p. 188); as the Daughter of Douban showed in her form as a goose, freedom is as much a state of mind as a physical condition.

Saffiya and Prince Zeid confront a small green beetle, next to the statue of a lama or sphinx.

The freedom state of mind can be summed up by a look at the beetles in Fairclough’s text. As we’ve seen, beetles feature prominently in the Peri’s malicious acts of magic, swarming out of each magic carpet she sends to an intended victim as if to convey the Peri’s contempt for bug-like mortals. But beetles also feature in a benevolent act of sorcery worked by Barmek’s mother, who provides Najla and Saffiya with magic necklaces to protect them from the Sultaness’s malice. Part of the process of making the necklaces involves throwing six beetles to six passing bats, who discard ‘bright shards’ of beetle shell as they consume them, which the Widow Zora then incorporates into the necklaces (p. 138). Long afterwards, a colony of Bats notices the necklace Saffiya wears, and stop her as she is about to jump from the window of a fortress to escape the attentions of its owner, the assassin Hasan-i-Sabbah. ‘We perceive,’ two of the Bats point out in chorus, ‘that you wear round your neck a blue thread bearing the shards of Beetles. You are therefore under our protection’ (p. 146); and they proceed to guide her to the Djinn’s cave, where Hasan cannot find her. A year later, just after she has rescued Prince Zeid from camel form, Saffiya sees the Prince looking fearful when he spots a passing beetle, associating the harmless insect with the magic that changed him. She at once scoops up the beetle and shows it to him, confronting his fear with a close-up view of the creature that terrifies him, but which most people barely notice. It is ‘Little and green as Paradise,’ she points out, ‘the same as the ones whose shards I wear around my neck’ (p. 160). Those shards, she adds, made the Bats befriend and free her. Meanwhile the beetle on her hand has feelings and an agenda of its own: ‘The beetle with an inquiring wave of its feelers, crawled from one hand to the other, and suddenly brisk, scuttled up a finger; finding nowhere to go, it snapped its wings open and zoomed upwards’. Zeid sums up the incident by wondering: ‘Do all fears become so small [and] without harm when one faces them?’ Close attention to any living creature, it would seem, confounds all attempts to make it Other – either as an instrument of oppression, a tiny monster, or nourishment for passing Bats. This series of encounters with representative specimens of Coleoptera, the largest of animal orders (comprising about a quarter of all known species) despite the tininess of its members, charts a progression from the warped perspective of the Sultaness to the loving attention applied to the natural world by the curious child, the naturalist or the artist.

The progression is a kind of magic, and sets itself up in opposition to the necromantic powers of wicked Sultanesses and other oppressors, embracing anarchistic equality between all beings instead of feudalism or any other form of hierarchy. Kamut-Shann describes this form of magic in conversation with Muthanna: ‘There is magic of the open sun and the grass growing, as well as of the darkened room and the reluctant dead’ (p. 186), she tells him, and adds that one day ‘men will grow out of the second, but it will be sorrow to them if they forget the first, for the one can fight the other and save them from the dark’. She goes on to illustrate the point by defeating the Peri, in a struggle that also illustrates the wholesome effects of living in collusion with the natural world. Kamut-Shann derives her power from this collusion, as she explains just before the duel: ‘I am she who drums in the spring, and the grouse drum also, and the wild geese fly up from the south. I am she who whistles in the autumn and the ptarmigan whistle and the fur of the ermine turns white and they play in the snow. I am the Friend of the Mares’ (p. 187). Her self-description does not elevate her above the land and its animal inhabitants, or the seasons they respond to; she claims no agency over the spring, merely that her drumming echoes the springtime drumming of the grouse and the geese’s wings, her whistling the whistling of the ptarmigan in autumn, and her transformative powers the power of the ermine as it changes colour to prepare for winter. Intimacy with nature’s transformations bestows a power superior to anything available to self-serving, solitary sorcerers – the collective, empathetic power that propels the Kashkot revolution.

The Captain of the Guards, Daresh, abandons the game of chess he was playing with the librarian Hafiz, having made up his mind to kill the Sultan.

In the course of the duel, Suleman’s Ring is restored to him, but its restoration has little impact on the narrative. As we’ve seen, the talisman is not even needed by this time to free the Djinn, whose prison has been unlocked by an accident of history rather than by any individual act of heroism or mercy. Other items of personal jewellery prove far more effective than the Ring in Fairclough’s narrative, but not one of them is effective by itself. The Blue Tree, for example – the protective talisman given to Barmek by Abu Misimir (p. 41) – works for many years to shield him from the Sultaness’s magic, but cannot shield him from the magic of the Peri. The Black Pearl gives Saffiya another amulet to shield her in exile from the dangers of the road, a so-called ‘Safety’ that takes the modest form of a black berry ‘worn on a string round her neck, which her mother gave her out of Africa’ (p. 103). But the Safety cannot rescue the girl from Hasan-i-Sabbah’s fortress; for this she needs the necklace of beetle shards given her by Barmek’s mother – as well as a ring given her by Hasan-i-Sabbah himself, which she keeps ‘to remember him by’ (p. 146), and which ensures the master of assassins does not send killers after her or her father in revenge for her escape. Hasan-i-Sabbah’s ring, too, loses its point once Saffiya has been reunited with Prince Zeid, so she buries it ceremoniously at the foot of the sphinx. The green ring given to Barmek by Austa Muthanna has no magic in it at all, but betokens a friendship between them which helps set off the Kashkot revolution; so it could be said to hold the promise of power through collective action, though Fairclough does not mention it again when the revolution happens. The pearls that Muthanna seeks to obtain by selling Prince Zeid into slavery turn out to have been intended as a present for Kamut-Shann (p. 180), but they never fulfil that purpose; instead they provide a seemingly miraculous delivery from hunger for the poor of Kashkot, when Muthanna gives them to Barmek in compensation for his wicked intentions towards the Prince. The silver headpiece made for Saffiya by the Djinn during her year-long stay in his cave has no function at all except to express his appreciation of her beauty (p. 158). Each of these items of jewellery serves as part of an organic network of friendships, intimacies and alliances, forming a great tree with many roots and branches which may well be what Fairclough is referring to in the title she gave her novel – the wholesome counterpart of the corrupting web of magic roses planted by the Daughter of Douban in the royal palace.

Each of these items of jewellery, too, can be seen as an expression of the function of good art. Most of the items I have listed are either kept hidden by their owners, in recognition of the need for secret relationships and clandestine promises to sustain communities in times of oppression, or accorded little value in the marketplace; in fact none of them even enters the marketplace apart from the pearls, which Muthanna sees as having been blemished by their role in his efforts to sell a young child into slavery. Their value derives instead from the people who present them as gifts: a descendant of great warriors, the Black Pearl, who is herself named after a jewel; a defender of abused animals, Austa Muthanna; a loyal household servant, Abu Misimir; a wise mother-in-law, mother and grandmother; an imprisoned craftsman, grateful for an unexpected friendship; and so on. As works of art they participate actively in the unfolding lives of their possessors, much as decorative illustrations participate in the unfolding of Fairclough’s interweaving plots. Fairclough’s novel itself, as a work of art, presents itself to its readers as an active intervention in their lives, offering hope for a new dream of the United Nations which enshrines the rights of the natural world alongside the rights of human beings of every class and culture. Jewellery in general, as an embodiment of craftsmanship, takes a central role in her narrative, not any single jewel such as Suleman’s Ring or Abu Misimir’s Tree.

The best way of understanding Fairclough’s book, in terms of her philosophy of art as I’ve just described it, is through its representations of the books in the royal library, the books written and embellished by Hafiz, the royal librarian. The finest of these books, in Hafiz’s opinion, is the Book of Kings, and this can be taken as a kind of miniature working model for the fictional city of Kashkot, Fairclough’s major achievement in fantastic world-building. Seeing Hafiz’s illustrated copy of the Book of Kings for the first time, Barmek is overwhelmed, describing it as a potent work of enchantment. ‘I think there is here a miracle,’ Barmek observes:

That you should be able to show an ignorant man such as I, not just people and horses, rocks and flowers, but – but the idea of these things together, making a new thing. For it seems to me that these pictures are not – not just the images of things in heaven and earth, such as the Prophet (on whom be the Blessing) forbade us to make, but something new in the world, something with its own laws. (p. 24)

This ‘new thing […] in the world’ is what the Wazir seeks to establish in Kashkot during his time as Wazir; though he only sees it fully embodied in the new Kashkot that rises from the ashes of the revolution, after he has given up the role of Wazir and returned to being a shepherd in the mountains (p. 200). Fairclough gestures towards this new Kashkot at the end of the book, but we never see it in any detail; after all, Utopia means nowhere, and has not yet been described to anyone’s perfect satisfaction.

If Utopia were to be described it would need a new form of writing, incorporating visual aids as well as words, much as Hafiz’s Book of Kings incorporates miniatures as aids to the understanding of its text. Hafiz finds it hard enough to record the utopian episode of the Kashkot Revolution, also known as the Day of the Dogs, in his history of the city. ‘How shall I describe these days?’ he asks himself:

In the simplest and purest words; in the most exquisite script, the ink powdered with gold-dust (I have a little left); leaving ample space and margin for adornment; all that is obvious. But – but what words, out of all the many upon the tongues of men? (p. 189).

The answer is given him by a young man who happens to have been recently selected as the new Sultan. This man directs him to write in a way that is ‘quite simple’; to give honour to the simple, ordinary people who collectively preserved Kashkot from inundation and tyranny; and to refrain from addressing the young man himself with unnecessary honorifics (‘could you not, sometimes, say to me simply, O Zeid?’, p. 191). History, then, is ideally written in collaboration, just as historical acts are collaboratively accomplished. History can never be utopian, since it remains bound by problematic conventions handed down from earlier epochs. The young man remains a Sultan, for all his dismissal of honorifics, and he neglects to mention the role of animals in the Day of the Dogs (though the name of that day implies that they will in fact get an honorable mention), or the role of a woman in defeating the Peri. But history can afford glimpses of possible utopias; and fiction too can afford these glimpses, as can works of visual art such as miniatures, jewellery, paintings, and woven carpets.

Works of art of this kind deserve to be treasured. Let’s treasure the remarkable art of Mary Fairclough.

Barmek wrestles with the Guardsman Dhiab. Barmek is the man with the red beard, who is clearly winning. Note the lions woven into the carpet, and the four officials, one at each corner, recalling the four beings on Suleman’s magic carpet.

APPENDIX

The Sons of Adam are limbs of each other
Having been created of one essence.
When the calamity of time afflicts one limb
The other limbs cannot remain at rest.
If thou hast no sympathy for the troubles of others
Thou art unworthy to be called by the name of a man.

From Sa’adi, Gulistan (The Rose Garden) (1258), translated by Edward Rehatsek. The stanza is woven into a carpet gifted to the United Nations in 2005 by Mohammad Seirafian of Isfahan, which can be seen in the United Nations Headquarters in New York.

The carpet woven with the words of Sa’adi, on display at the United Nations Headquarters in New York.

NOTES

[1] See my previous blog post, The Ecofantasies of Mary Fairclough, Part 1, note 2.

[2] Another name for Mesopotamia in Arabic is Al-jazira, meaning island or peninsula.

[3] Another likely influence is a novel by Betty Bouthoul (Betty Vera Helfenbein), Le Grand Maître des Assassins (1936), which introduced the European world to the legendary Master of Assassins Hasan-i-Sabbah, whose motto is ‘rien n’est vrai, tout est permis’ – nothing is true, everything is permitted, a phrase popularised by William S. Boroughs and the Assassin’s Creed video games. Hasan features in the second part of Fairclough’s novel when Safiya briefly becomes a houri in his Garden of Paradise, before escaping from his fortress with the help of some Bats (pp. 142-147).

[4] Fairclough, The Blue Tree (London: Gerald Duckworth and Co., 1960), p. 11. All quotations are from this edition.

[5] Fairclough refers to wrestling as an art on p. 52 (‘There was one art, much loved in Kashkot’), and graces the dustcover of her novel with a picture of Barmek wrestling with his friend the Sultan. In this way she effectively joins the art of wrestling to the art of the miniature maker. She refers to wrestling in metaphors throughout the novel, in fact, making it an integral part of her fiction; see e.g. p. 157, ‘A wrestler’s shoulder may touch the ground once and twice, yet the last throw be his’. For a summary of Iranian wrestling in relation to politics and religion see Anon, ‘Wrestling in Iran: From Mysticism to Politics’, here [https://fanack.com/culture/sports-and-politics/wrestling-in-iran/]. Elsewhere, Barmek’s personal support of both craftspeople and artists is specifically mentioned: ‘There were in those days many artists and great craftsmen in Kashkot, for the Wazir revered them’ (p. 112).

[6] You can read the Christmas Play of Keynsham here.

The Ecofantasies of Mary Fairclough, Part 1: Miskoo the Lucky (1947) and Little Dog and the Rainmakers (1949).

[This is the first of two blog posts on a genuinely lost writer-artist, Mary Fairclough, who seems to me to be a genuinely major practitioner. The follow-up blog-post can be found here. I am grateful to the following for making it possible: Beth Whalley, Development Officer for the Sustainable Communities Directorate, Bath and North East Somerset Council; Tim Whyte, Keynsham Library Manager; and Richard Dyson, Chairman of the Keynsham and Saltford Local History Society. I feel as if I’ve forged a permanent link with Keynsham by embarking on this little project of recovery and hope.]

Mary Fairclough, Traveller Woman.

All lovers of bookshops have the same dream: to stumble across a book you didn’t know existed and find that it’s something special. For me, second-hand books have a particular fascination. An unknown book may light up a period of history – often, in my case, nineteenth- or twentieth-century history – and slightly redraw the map of the past you held in your head. A recent visit to the legendary Bookshop in Wigtown, which I’ve known since it was owned by the equally legendary John Carter, long before Wigtown was crowned Scotland’s Book Town, yielded a treasure: Mary Fairclough’s West Asian fantasy novel The Blue Tree (1960). I very nearly didn’t pick it up, distracted by more familiar titles on nearby shelves. Luckily, though, I glanced at a couple of rave reviews online before moving on (thank you Academe and L Mart!), and added it to my pile on the strength of these, though I hadn’t any great expectation of having the readers’ ravings confirmed when I started to read.

My copy of The Blue Tree, cover picture by Fairclough.

They were more than confirmed. I was utterly bowled over. The book changed the shape of my knowledge of fantasy in the mid-twentieth century, and introduced me to one of the finest author-illustrators of the period. I don’t know much about Mary Fairclough, but everything I do know adds to my respect for her.[1] It’s clearly time she was brought back into focus, not least because she is one of the great writers of eco-fantasy at a time well before the green movement began to gather momentum. My preliminary research suggests that she was a lifetime socialist, that her perspective was international, that she cared as much for beasts as for people (indeed she often refers to animals as people), and that she was infinitely curious about cultures and places not her own. They also suggest that she lived all her life in a small town near Bristol – Keynsham – where she co-founded the Keynsham and Saltford Local History Society; so she clearly had intensely local interests as well as international ones. I have no idea if she travelled in body, but a talk she gave in April 1989, at the age of 75, makes it clear that she travelled in mind. She cites the words of her mother, Rose Fairclough: ‘Do your best in your own little corner’, and asks the question: ‘where does one’s own corner end?’ The implied answer is nowhere. Fairclough’s talk also cites the words of La Pasionaria, Dolores Ibárruri, hero of the Spanish Civil War: ‘Better die on your feet than live on your knees’. For Fairclough these words invoke her time as a Bristol art student in the Depression, when locals from all over the world made their way to Spain to fight alongside Dolores in defence of Spain’s Republican government against the Falangist fascists. Fairclough may not have fought in Spain, but her whole career was spent making the international local by embracing other people’s local spaces and struggles as her own through the medium of her art.

Mary Fairclough, Native American Woman with Horses.

I’m not sure I can think of any other writer or artist who did this with such consistency. In the course of her seemingly secluded life – she never married, she never moved from Keynsham, where her grandfather owned a dye mill and her father worked as a clerk for the tobacco firm Wills and Co. – she made pictures of Roma women, Indigenous people of America, cattle drovers on the road to the Indian city of Varanasi/Benares, Malaysian schoolchildren, and a Japanese politician – and these are only the subjects I’ve stumbled across on random websites. She wrote and illustrated three books, the first featuring a friendship between an Inuit child and a Sámi family, the second a series of encounters between four different Indigenous American peoples, the third an invented country in Western Asia during the Golden Age of Islam, which serves as an imaginary meeting point for a dazzling diversity of global religions and communities. Each picture and each book gives evidence of careful research into the culture depicted; Fairclough clearly took considerable pains to adapt both her verbal and visual styles to her chosen material. At the same time, she does what she can to avoid falling into the pitfalls of a colonialist perspective. Each of her books involves little or no contact between the chosen culture and the peoples of Europe – indeed, her Native American novel takes place before first contact – thus imaginatively shutting out the dominant culture whose language she uses. Each makes use of terms from the chosen community’s language, forcing the British or American reader to learn and perhaps afterwards to seek further knowledge of the ideas, actions and customs these terms embody. No non-Indigenous reader has the right to judge if she succeeds in her aim of resisting colonialism; but the aim, I think, is clear, and confirms Fairclough as a key British practitioner of a fantasy that is truly international in its perspective – the very obverse of the Anglocentrism of much post-Tolkienian fantastic fiction in the Twentieth Century.

Mary Fairclough, illustration for The Road to Benares.

Her ecological concerns come across in the 1989 talk I mentioned earlier, a lunchtime address to the Rotary Club of Keynsham with the title ‘The Environment’.[2] The talk is as much concerned with phraseology as it is with ecopolitics. It begins with a rejection of the cant term ‘Doom and Gloom’, which was currently being used by reactionary politicians to dismiss the concerns of green campaigners: ‘It’s the sort of phrase that’s invaluable in elections if you can suggest that your opponent is indulging in it – rhythmic, catchy, sticks like a burr and somehow belittles the subject’. She goes on to point out the anxiety caused to politicians and voters when vague promises to address green issues confront calls to genuine action, because this involves ‘spending money – losing money – it will touch our sacred pockets’. Time, she insists, is running out, and compares the urgent need to address current concerns (she lists ‘Acid Rain, the Ozone Layer, the Rain Forests, the Greenhouse Effect’ among them, deliberately using the key ‘buzzwords’ of the contemporary green movement whose familiarity could be seen as making them seem less ‘real’) with the same urgency she had felt, along with other young people, to confront the rise of fascism in the 1930s. And she underlines the sense of time running out by bringing environmental concerns back home to Keynsham. She describes how Keynsham has been increasingly damaged in her lifetime as its population expanded. Without idealizing the past (the ‘orderly beauty’ of the village in her childhood was, she knows, based on the prevalence of ‘cheap labour’, just as the democratic system of ancient Athens was based on a tacit acceptance of slavery) she laments the loss of the care and beauty once manifested everywhere, adapting the lyrics of Pete Seeger’s anti-war song (1955), ‘Where have all the flowers gone?’, to the context of Keynsham’s lost treescape: ‘Where are all the orchards gone? Gone to car-parks, every one’. Change, she acknowledges, is essential to all living things, and ‘Being a living Place we had a necessity to change’, but it should be for something better, not for something worse, as has happened all too often to the architecture of Keynsham’s High Street:

[W]e have destroyed and continue to destroy small, unimportant but comely things, odd windows, doors – an entrance to an old stableyard that was still perfectly adequate when the stable became a garage, but it was demolished and the new entrance is an eyesore by any standard. (p. 33)

I love that phrase ‘small, unimportant but comely things’; the word ‘comely’ has a fine dignity, not overstating an object’s claim to be beautiful but insisting on its suitability for the needs and desires of its users. The same term could, I think, be used to describe the emphasis on attractive objects, places and customs in all three of her works of fiction. ‘Cumulatively,’ the talk goes on, ‘these things are part of the Environment of a small town and we should be wise to preserve them until we can put something better in their place’ (p. 34). Her talk, then, moves from the macro-economics of global climate change to the micro-economics of small-town geography, and similar sweeping conceptual or physical movements from the large to the small, and conversely from the small to the global, can be found throughout her writing. In Miskoo the Lucky (1947) a young boy makes his way across the polar regions from Canada or Greenland to Scandinavia and back again, without much idea of where he is going, but forging lasting emotional connections between these far-distant places as he goes. Little Dog and the Rainmakers (1949) sees a young Indigenous boy travel southwards through North America from Canada to New Mexico in search of a solution to a climate catastrophe that threatens all the continent’s inhabitants, human and nonhuman alike. And The Blue Tree takes a snapshot of inter-relations between all the countries and ecosystems in medieval Asia as it paints a picture of a tiny city-state, a kind of utopia. The success of all these endeavours depends not on parties or politicians but on inter-personal relationships, though these are solidly based on the material needs of the communities among which they take place. And The Blue Tree culminates in a collective effort by the whole city-state to avert yet another climate-driven catastrophe, the bursting of a dam. Like the books she wrote and illustrated, Fairclough’s 1989 talk is couched in simple, witty and slightly world-weary language (she adds at the end, since it is a lunchtime speech, ‘Gentlemen I hope I haven’t given you indigestion’, p. 33), but betrays a complex political consciousness, and a philosophy of the local as the global that had much to teach the listening ‘Gentlemen’, if they were able to hear it.

Mary Fairclough, Corn Stacks, 1937.

Interestingly, for someone who showed such respect in her work for other people and cultures, Fairclough’s interest in ecopolitics may have had links to a famous fake: a man who appropriated colonised cultures for his own purposes, albeit (from his own point of view) for the best of reasons. The author Grey Owl, who claimed Apache and Scottish ancestry, was in fact an Englishman from Hastings named Archibald Stansfeld Belaney. His books, films and broadcasts made him something of a global superstar in the 1930s; my grandmother owned a number of his books. Belaney spent many years working as a trapper in the forests of Canada, and his account of his conversion from trapper to conservationist, Pilgrims of the Wild (1935), ascribes his change of heart to the concerns of his second wife Anahareo, a Mohawk Iroquois who made him understand the destruction men of his trade were doing to the Canadian ecosystem. He also credits four beavers he raised with accelerating his conversion, dubbing himself, Anahareo and the animals the ‘Beaver People’ to stress the kinship between them. ‘The Beaver People’ became the title of the first film to feature Grey Owl (1928), and Pilgrims of the Wild could well have influenced Fairclough’s practice of calling animals ‘people’ in her books. Most of Belaney’s books became international bestsellers, their sales boosted by his hugely popular lecture tours as Grey Owl in Canada and Britain. Richard and David Attenborough were two of his early admirers; Richard made a movie about his life in 1999, with Pierce Brosnan playing Belaney. Fairclough seems to have been another. In the year of his inaugural tour of Britain, 1935, she made a black-and-white linocut print of ‘Grey Owl’ in his persona as an adopted Ojibwe, and two of her colour linocuts from the same period (‘Woman with Three Horses’ and ‘Bark Canoe’) draw on similar First Nations subject matter. As I’ve indicated, her fascination with the Indigenous people of North America endured; in 1949 she published her children’s novel Little Dog and the Rainmakers, whose action opens with a people who seem to be based on the Ojibwe, judging by the words and customs she describes, and goes on to draw on the languages and customs of Indigenous peoples elsewhere on the American continent. Her fascination with Indigenous communities is also present in her first self-authored picture book, Miskoo the Lucky (1947), which tells of the young Inuit boy who gets swept away by an iceberg, is rescued by some of his animal friends, and finds his way to Sápmi (formerly known to the British as Lapland), where he learns to live as an active member of a Sámi family. Each of these books has what might be called a green agenda, and throws light on the similar agenda that underlies Fairclough’s masterpiece, The Blue Tree. And the context of Miskoo the Lucky also suggests that her green sensibilities were honed by the experience of living through the Second World War.

Mary Fairclough, Grey Owl, 1935.

 

Making Your Luck in Miskoo the Lucky (1947)

In his final book, my late colleague Stephen Prickett – author of a seminal monograph on Victorian Fantasy – mentions Miskoo the Lucky as an example of the very different fates that befall different exemplars of fiction for children. ‘Who now remembers,’ Prickett asks, ‘Mary Fairclough’s Miskoo the Lucky, a beautifully illustrated book published to great critical acclaim in 1947?’.[3] Prickett clearly remembered it – perhaps he was given a copy as a child (my own copy was given to a boy by his father in 1948) – but he is right about the acclaim that greeted its publication, and he is right too about its subsequent disappearance from the collective memory. Fairclough’s picture book won the children’s section of the inaugural United Nations Literary Competition – with prize money of £10,000 – which was sponsored by the publishers Hutchinson’s in 1947. The existence of this competition seems to have dropped out of history along with the names of its winners, if its absence from the internet can be taken as evidence; I’d love to know more about it. The UN was founded in 1945, only two years before the book’s publication, with the objective of preventing future wars by maintaining ‘international peace and security’, developing ‘friendly relations among nations based on respect for the principle of equal rights and self-determination of peoples’, and achieving ‘international cooperation in solving international problems of an economic, social, cultural, or humanitarian character, and in promoting and encouraging respect for human rights and for fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion’, to quote from its first Charter (p. 3).[4] The judges of the UN Literary Competition seem to have recognised that Fairclough’s picture book spoke to these objectives; but Fairclough also introduced into the mix certain key green concepts that were absent from the UN Charter. For Fairclough, equal rights extended from human beings to their fellow creatures, and the need for ‘self-determination’ and ‘cooperation’ embraced ecosystems that take no account of national boundaries.

Mary Fairclough, Miskoo the Lucky (1947).

Miskoo the Lucky shares with the work of Grey Owl the conviction that a human life well lived needs to take full account of the needs of the nonhuman peoples who share our space. The little boy, Miskoo, acquires his nickname, ‘the Lucky’, after playing with a pair of polar bear cubs and meeting their mother; as the narrator observes wryly, ‘If you live in a country where there are Bears, and you get on well with Bears, you are lucky’ (p. 7), and Miskoo’s parents agree when he gets home that ‘he was very lucky indeed not to have been chewed up’ (p. 11). Miskoo’s good relations with bears builds on his good relations with his family’s dogs, who must be included in any account of his family, the narrator insists, because they pull the sledge on which the Inuit depend for transport in winter. The mother polar bear in turn makes little distinction between her own cubs and the cubs of an Inuit mother: she tells off Miskoo for ‘Wearing holes in those fine red Kamiks [i.e. traditional sealskin boots] your poor Ma must have spent no end of time on’ (p. 10). Later Miskoo’s knack of making friends with animals saves his life, when he gets himself stranded on a small iceberg and must rely on a series of beasts to push him ashore: first a seal called Arrk, then Worrug the Walrus, and finally a whale called Beluga, who carries Miskoo, Arrk and Worrug to the coast of Lapland (as Arrk calls it), where Miskoo spends some time with Aark’s family at the foot of a cliff. Taking leave of Miskoo, Beluga gives the boy some advice that might have come straight out of the books of Grey Owl:

‘You might remember one thing […] if you really want to be g[r]ateful. Your people eat whale-meat, which comes from my brothers and sisters; and they carve things out of tusks, which they get from Worrug’s brothers and sisters, and make clothes out of skins from Arrk’s brothers and sisters. Well, that’s all right. I eat Plankton, the little tiny creatures in the sea, and Worrug and Arrk eats [sic] fish […] Everything […] has to eat something, and usually somebody, and as I say, it’s all right, BUT NEVER TAKE MORE THAN YOU NEED.’ (pp. 31-32)

Miskoo takes this advice to heart. After scaling a cliff and tramping through a wood to reach a human family, he refuses their offer of more to eat than he really needs, mindful of the promise he made to Beluga (p. 62). Fairclough drives home the whale’s words about eating and being eaten on this occasion, too, with characteristic directness; the food on offer is a stew made from the ‘forty-second cousin’ of Kakil, a reindeer belonging to the Sámi family who cooked it (p. 62). The interrelatedness of human life with the many beings who share its space could hardly have been pointed up with greater honesty.

Mary Fairclough: Miskoo and his family, with wolves in background, dogs in foreground.

As a former trapper, Fairclough’s ecological mentor Grey Owl/Belaney came to recognise the damage being done to the wilderness he loved by the fur trade, and to regret his own part in the massacres of beaver populations in pursuit of needless profit, which left tracts of Canada’s wilderness bereft of the national animal. In Miskoo the Lucky the role of the predator who takes more than they need is assumed not by trappers but by wolves, the one animal species with which Miskoo’s father warns him not to make friends. ‘Wolves aren’t really animals,’ his father insists, ‘they’re just Bad Luck on four feet, with a lot of teeth’ (p. 14); and the picture that accompanies his words shows the wolves as disembodied heads menacing the Inuit family’s igloo, their severance from their bodies suggesting the severance of the wolves from the ecosystem that embraces all the Arctic’s other inhabitants. Later in the book, Miskoo and his new Sámi friend, a girl called Gullmag, are attacked by wolves while gathering wood, and are rescued by the animals they have befriended: a fox called Yipyap, a pair of reindeer (one of whom is Kakil), and an owl called Nyktia. Wolves, of course, have had a terrible press in fable and fiction, but their position in this book is carefully considered, in an artistic sense at least. Fairclough’s illustrations emphasize both the difference and the close resemblance between the wolves and those family members known as dogs. Gullmag’s family, which includes the reindeer, also includes an elderly dog called Yokk, too old to do anything much except guard against wolves at night. Yokk and the wolves are represented in Fairclough’s pictures in more or less identical ways, the sole exception being that her wolves have empty eyes, as if bereft of emotion and thought. The wolves’ destructive instincts can even turn against each other: when attacked by the owl and the reindeer they soon attack their fellow wolves, leaving only three of the pack alive; this makes them the obverse of a family like Miskoo’s or Gullmag’s, which survives on cooperation. Yet the wolves are the dogs’ alter-egos, and so also the alter-egos of those human beings who depend on dogs, since humans and dogs in this book are effectively kin. Distinctions between one category of animal and another are hard to make; the dog Yokk dislikes the fox Yipyap, who is a friend of Gullmag’s, because he sees him solely in terms of his kinship with wolves (he is ‘third cousin to a wolf’, as Yokk explains, p. 82), glossing over his own much closer kinship with the same species. Being part of a family and being its enemy is a matter not of blood but of behaviour, and it’s implied that a person can slip with disconcerting ease from the first category into the second, simply by ignoring the advice of Miskoo’s whale.

Mary Fairclough: Miskoo, Gullmag and Yokk watching a waterfall; Miskoo and Yokk rescue Gullmag.

In this story, then, a person makes their own luck, and making things in the proper way is part of that luck-making process: using animal parts only for what is needed, killing only as much as the body requires – whether for food, clothes or shelter – and eating only as much as will satisfy the stomach. Being ‘Bad Luck on four legs with a lot of teeth’ – the description of wolves first uttered by Miskoo’s father and later repeated by Gullmag’s uncle (p. 90) – is a matter of always making the wrong decisions, decisions based on greed. Like her mentor Grey Owl/Belaney, Fairclough clearly saw Indigenous ways of living as models for living well or luckily; and she fills her book with careful pictures of Indigenous practices based on a symbiotic relationship with the environment: the construction of an Inuit igloo from blocks of snow; the drying of fish on whalebone frames; cooking, eating and playing a drum in a Sámi ‘kawta’ or tent; lassoing a reindeer, milking it, making cheese from its milk, and curing the hide of its ‘forty-second cousin’ with birch bark; building a Sámi winter shelter. Grey Owl’s books, too, are full of drawings and photographs showing scenes and activities he presumed to be unfamiliar to his non-Indigenous readers in Canada and Britain. His drawings in Pilgrims of the Wild show two people paddling a birchbark canoe, storytelling in an Indigenous camp, various methods of trapping beaver, dragging sledges through a snowy forest, a beaver building its house.[5] Fairclough’s illustrations supplement her words by means of a visual narrative, equal in status with her prose; many of her pages show multiple actions on a single page, like a comic strip, and nearly all of them show interactions between human beings and animals, such as the series of illustrations of Miskoo climbing a cliff, in which he is supervised and encouraged by a gull called Waveglider (pp. 42-45). Together, complementary words and images reinforce her message of cooperation and equality between peoples, both human and nonhuman – a message that clearly appealed to the judges of the UN Literary Competition.

Mary Fairclough: Miskoo and Gullmag making things.

She goes further than the United Nations, however, in choosing as her focus two peoples who pay no attention to the boundaries between modern nations. The story ends with any such physical boundaries conclusively demolished, as its two families adopt a new way of life which involves seasonal travel to each other’s homelands. When winter makes it possible to travel overseas on a sleigh drawn by reindeer, Gullmag and her uncle take Miskoo home to his family, where old Yokk makes friends with Miskoo’s dogs, the reindeers make friends with Miskoo’s old friend the musk-ox, and Gullmag and her uncle become acquainted with Miskoo’s parents. And when the time comes to part again, the two families make every effort to ensure they will meet again:

Then they all said ‘Good-Bye’ rather sadly; but it wasn’t really good-bye for very long; for next Spring Miskoo’s Mother built herself an umiak, a boat a bit like the lost kayak, but big enough to take the whole family, dogs and all, and every Summer after that they all paddled down to Lapland for a holiday. And every Winter that it froze hard enough the others would come up over the ice to Farther-North-Still. (p. 110)

The new understanding between the two families, then, remakes the map of the world. Barriers are no longer marked by official borders but by the constantly changing contours of the pack ice, as it expands and contracts with the changing seasons. Hidden in Fairclough’s text is the quiet suggestion that the very existence of geographically demarcated Nations might need to be jettisoned if the dream of cooperation is to become a reality. And this is an idea she takes much further in her next two works of fiction.

Miskoo returns home to his family with the help of Gullmag and her Uncle Yorgen.

 

Sacrifice and Self-Interest in Little Dog and the Rainmakers (1949)

Miskoo the Lucky is presumably aimed at readers of around Miskoo’s age, five or six. Fairclough’s second book, Little Dog and the Rainmakers, has a target readership of perhaps nine or ten, and this gives it scope to elaborate Fairclough’s philosophy as represented in her prizewinning picture book. It is divided not into chapters but into four parts named after the four peoples among whom the child protagonist, Little Dog, lives: the Forest People, the Plains People, the Desert People and the Canyon People. Superficially these names apply to the Indigenous human peoples who inhabit four different environments in North America; but nonhuman peoples too are included in each category, most obviously the first – the Forest People – since Little Dog’s people acknowledge as equals the many other creatures that roam the wilderness where they live. Among these, we learn, are a family of Beavers, introduced to us at the beginning of the story on equal terms with Little Dog’s human family: the two families live at each end of ‘a very long, deep lake […] like a long shining mirror’, and each is guided by its own Chief, Ahmeek the Beaver and Hole-in-the-Sky the man (p. 6). A little later Fairclough refers to the former family as the ‘Beaver People’ in open homage to Grey Owl (p. 10); the homage is confirmed by Fairclough’s later assertion that they have ‘hands’ instead of paws (p. 33), an observation Grey Owl makes in Pilgrims of the Wild.[6] The forest also harbours Muskrats, Moose, Otters, Chipmunks, Crows, Bears and a great many more, their kinship with their human neighbours being cemented by the custom of Little Dog’s people of selecting (or having selected for them) a spirit animal as their personal totem at the point when they reach adulthood. Each of the other three Peoples on the continent embraces nonhuman creatures as well as humans. The Plains People are made up of Cougars, Horses and Buffalo as well as human tribes such as the Crow, the Dakota, the Osage and the Mandan; the Desert People include Antelopes, Rattlesnakes, Coyotes, Lobos (wolves) and Pack-Rats; and the Canyon People count Horses, Bears and Spirits or Salimapiyas along with humans among their number. As in Miskoo, the use of preliminary capitals elevates each nonhuman descriptor to the status of a human proper name.

My copy of Little Dog and the Rainmakers.

In the first part of the novel, the child protagonist Little Dog – whose name affirms his bond with animals, which is reinforced by his ability to understand their languages – undergoes a ritual solitary fasting and becomes a man, albeit a very small and young one. The process of becoming an adult among his people involves acquiring an animal totem, and while Little Dog hopes for something large and splendid, such as the Chief Moose, Mus-wa, he is instead awarded a creature more appropriate to his size: the Chief of the Chipmunks, known as the Great Big Chipmunk, who is still small enough to sit on Little Dog’s head. The names of our hero and his totem remind us that size is relative, and so too, it seems, is the question of which community one belongs to. An animal totem must accept its human charge as well as being accepted, and the Great Big Chipmunk’s acceptance is quickly followed by Little Dog’s induction into the full community of the animals, since he is at once invited to attend the Animal Council. The Council, we learn, has been called to assemble at the very same time as the Human Council, to discuss a problem that affects both communities equally: a cataclysmic drought. And when Little Dog volunteers to try to end this drought by seeking out a far-off human people who can make it rain – the Rainmakers of the title – his totem volunteers too, ensuring that the mission is a joint one between the human and animal communities. Great Big Chipmunk is not Little Dog’s sidekick or servant but his equal partner, and when they are later joined by another animal called Little Horse he too becomes an equal partner. Miskoo’s bond with animals is taken one step further in this book by the fact that Little Dog is accompanied on every step of his journey by animal companions, and by the human protagonist’s awareness that they form part of his own identity; without them he would not be Little Dog.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog at the Animal Council.

The resolution of the climate disaster in this book, then, requires close cooperation between beasts and humans, and a willingness on the part of both communities to sacrifice their individual interests for the sake of everyone on the continent. The whole book demonstrates how such cooperation and sacrifice might work in practice. Little Dog is selected to seek out the Rainmakers by the Animal Council, which is advised by a human Jossakeed or shaman, the Jossakeed of Lost Lake (a Grey Owl substitute who has abandoned human companionship for a life among the beasts). The boy carries with him a bag of magical gifts for the far-off Rainmakers, all of which are provided by animals. The bag is intended to be exchanged for the gift of rain, but in the course of his travels Little Dog keeps encountering other people who need help from the magic gifts, and these people may be human or animal – Little Dog makes no distinction between them. One magic arrow made from a porcupine quill helps him rescue Little Horse from a puma; another saves the lives of two buffalo calves from marauding lobos; the enchanted stink of a skunk prevents the entire Buffalo nation from stampeding over a cliff to certain death; and a magic snakeskin cures a young human warrior who is dying from a venomous snake bite. In each case, Little Dog’s act of mercy brings him much-needed assistance on his arduous journey to the land of the Rainmakers. By the time he reaches that land, the bag is almost empty – but he would not have made it at all without giving up the gifts, and in any case it turns out that what the Rainmakers need from him is not a bag full of magic objects but the willing sacrifice of Little Dog himself in exchange for the gift of rain. The world Fairclough offers us is founded not on the accumulation of expensive possessions but the willing surrender of one’s own interests for the needs of the collective – a surrender predicated on the recognition that both sets of interests are finally the same.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog and Little Horse ride with the buffalo. As usual, Great Big Chipmunk is on Little Dog’s head.

At each stage of his journey, Little Dog gets to witness the devastating effects of drought on animal cultures as well as human ones. The Great Plains contain both Dakota people, who migrate for miles in search of water, and vast herds of Buffalo who range from one dwindling water source to another, and who know full well that many of their number will die before the boy can procure the rain. The Desert harbours both the human community of the Secret Water, who jealously guard the resources of their hideout for themselves, and herds of pronghorn antelope who can only drink from the shrinking oases at risk of their lives. In both locations corpses and bones tell the tale of the many people of both kinds who have died of thirst. Meanwhile, at the end of the journey Little Dog finds that the water-rich Rainmaker people freely share their land with huge herds of horses, and their rainmaking skills with all who need them, human and animal alike, even at the risk of over-watering their own fields and orchards. Through these encounters Little Dog comes to an understanding that the needs of one community are best served by providing for the needs of all, and that self-interest to the exclusion of the interests of others must always prove self-destructive in the end.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog and Little Horse ride with the pronghorn antelope.

At the same time, Little Dog keeps meeting people who have a very different philosophy. In his home country of the forests, the crow called Kahgahgengs is known as the Thief, always stealing food from others instead of finding it for himself (p. 23), always ready to torment the dying or to lead young children – such as Little Dog – into needless danger, presumably in hope of feeding on their corpses. Kahgahgengs is punished for his selfishness by being forced to serve others through the magic of the Jossakeed of Lost Lake; for the whole of Little Dog’s absence on his journey he must stay with the shaman of the human village and report the boy’s progress to him, remaining at his task until either Little Dog gets safely home again or ‘it is known that he is dead’ (p. 39). An equally self-centred and damaging person haunts the Mandan village where Little Dog stays when he is crossing the Great Plains. This is a ‘false Jossakeed’ known as Turtle (p. 70), who exploits the drought to terrorize the Mandan, stirring up hatred between them and other human peoples of the Plains and exiling joy and pleasure from the Mandan lodges. His defining characteristics are humourlessness, a love of violence (his leggings are ‘solidly fringed with scalps’, p. 64), self-interest – reflected in the protective shell of the creature his name invokes – and a facility for spreading fear wherever he goes. The oldest Jossakeed of the Mandan compares this sower of hate with a bird of ill omen like Kahgahgengs. ‘Many times,’ he reminds a gathering of his tribe,

‘have the birds of sorrow flown over this people; many times have we driven them away from us. Now they come thick again about our heads, as our corn dies in the dry ground, the river runs low, and the buffalo are far away. But this time […] the evil birds build their nests in our lodges.’ (p. 67)

Sure enough, the false Jossakeed carries a spear ‘tufted with crow-feathers’ (p. 64), confirming his kinship with Kahgahgengs. And the true shaman deals with him far more mercilessly than the Jossakeed of Lost Lake dealt with the crow: his warrior grandson drags Turtle outside the stockade, leaving him in a condition where the ‘buzzards are the only people who will trouble about [him] now’ (p. 71).

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog and Little Horse approach the dwellings of the Mangan People.

The most intriguing of the self-serving peoples in the novel is a community which is never graced with a name, who inhabit a hidden valley in the desert because they have alienated all the other peoples who live nearby.[7] From Little Dog’s first encounter with this people they are associated with wolves, who in Miskoo were widely considered ‘Bad Luck on four feet’; and the transference of this concept from wolves to humans makes much better sense in Little Dog’s universe. Crossing the desert on the way to the Rainmakers’ mountain home, Little Dog comes across a young man dying from a snakebite, whose older brothers sit helplessly by, ‘as grim-looking as winter wolves’ in the face of their helplessness (p. 92). Little Dog wins their friendship by curing the sick man with the magic snakeskin from his pouch, but he quickly learns they have few other friends, having stolen ‘far more horses […] than so small a band could possibly need’ (p. 98), killed people ‘for the fun of it’ (p. 100), and kidnapped women, including a woman of the Rainmaker people. Stealing horses is a kind of game for many human peoples of the Plains, but the people of the Secret Water have taken the game to excess, violating the principle laid down by Beluga in Miskoo, ‘NEVER TAKE MORE THAN YOU NEED’. As a result they are ‘like lone wolves who have been turned out of the pack’ (p. 100) – a better characterization of a universal enemy than Miskoo’s blanket condemnation of wolves in general.[8] In Little Dog, however, even lone wolves can be looked on with compassion. The child protagonist genuinely likes the brash boy-warrior whose life he saves, and notices that his older brothers like Steals-in-the-Snow too, acting towards him ‘rather as a mother wolf with only one cub might’ (p. 97). When the young warrior falls victim to a retaliatory raid by the Rainmakers, Little Dog mourns him much as Huck Finn mourns his equally brash friend Buck when the boy gets shot in a family feud. The echo may well be a conscious one: in both cases the victim plunges into water at the fatal moment, and in both cases the child who witnesses the victim’s death – Little Dog or Huck – is haunted by posttraumatic flashbacks for a long time afterwards.[9] The young warrior’s plunge into the Secret Water his people have been keeping to themselves is particularly symbolic in the context of a drought. His disappearance into its depths, fighting furiously with his enemies, and his later re-emergence from it only to set out on a doomed quest to avenge the deaths of his brothers at the hands of the Rainmakers, underlines his total isolation from a world that has come together in a collective bid to bring the rain. Steals-in-the-Snow is as much a lone wolf in death as he was in life.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog and the Secret Water People.

If crows and wolves are set apart from other people by their bad habits of taking more than they need and killing for fun, there is a smaller menace in Fairclough’s book which deserves to be set alongside them. A little later in their desert crossing Little Dog and his friends come across a Pack-Rat living in an abandoned human pueblo on top of a mesa (a table-shaped mountain); and the Rat, they learn, is obsessed with collecting objects he does not need. Among these objects are precious things that may have been stolen from human corpses; but the Pack-Rat steals something far more valuable from the companions, which is a quiver-full of magic corn that was given them by the Josakeed of Lost Lake to help them on their journey. The Pack-Rat maintains that this act of petty thievery is no more than a fair exchange – what he calls a ‘trade’ – since he leaves a few bits and pieces from his own collection in place of the corn; but his trick very nearly proves fatal for Little Dog and his friends. The last leg of their desert crossing turns out to be much harder and longer than expected, and without the magic corn starvation and thirst come close to killing them before it is over. Fairclough’s self-centred rodent foreshadows a time when the American continent will be wholly subjected to the dubious rules of trade, and when those rules will be stretched to breaking point in the interests of private gain, like the rules of the game of horse-thieving as played by the wolflike people of the Secret Water. In Little Dog, the Pack-Rat Pikawee is an exception among the many peoples who work together to end the drought; but adult readers may well suspect that he stands for the packs of capitalistic rats who later came to run the country at the expense of their fellow Americans.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog and his companions struggle through the desert after their corn has been stolen by Pikawee.

Diametrically opposed to the self-centred loners in the book – the lone Wolves, Crows and Pack-Rats – is the three-person band known as the Rainseekers, who sacrifice themselves for the collective. When Little Dog volunteers to travel across the continent to the Rainmakers he does so in a spirit of adventure rather than sacrifice: he is excited at the prospect of the journey, and ‘it would be FUN,’ he thinks, ‘to see that Rain-Dance!’ (p. 36). But Mus-Wah the Moose, who once saved Little Dog’s life, sees the journey in sacrificial terms: if successful, Mus-Wah thinks, the quest will wipe out the boy’s debt to himself, since he will have saved both the Moose Chief and all his people from certain death (p. 40). Little Horse, meanwhile, when they meet him, has already been nominated as a sacrifice by the Mandan people, having been driven out of the community with all their fears and misdemeanours symbolically loaded on his back like the scapegoat of the ancient Jews, in a last despairing bid to end the drought. Little Horse feels guilty, as a result, for being rescued from the claws of a puma, until Little Dog persuades him that he will make a better sacrifice of himself by helping the travellers reach the Rainmakers (p. 50). Little Dog helps Little Horse by using one of the magic gifts he carries in his bag, gifts intended to be offered to the Rainmakers in exchange for rain. Each time this happens in the book – each time a gift designed to help the collective gets used instead to save an individual life – could be considered a sacrificial act, since it jeopardizes Little Dog’s larger mission. The rightness of these smaller sacrifices, however, is confirmed at the end of his journey by the Rainmakers themselves, who take these little sacrifices as good reason to show generosity on their own part: ‘You did well to use the other gifts as you did,’ one of them reassures him, ‘and, Little Dog, as you helped others so we will try to help you’ (p. 138). Their judgement is endorsed by the fact that the only gift left at the end of the journey – one of the three magic quills put into the bag by Kahgi the Porcupine – plays a central role in the Rain-Dance ceremony. Ahool, the Spirit or Kachina of the Sun, uses the quill as an arrow shot from his bow towards the north, taking Little Dog and his two companions with it as well as the life-supporting rain, and so accomplishing the most crucial act of sacrifice in the whole adventure. Reciprocal gestures – gifts freely given, often to the detriment of the giver, which elicit equally generous gifts from the recipient – structure Little Dog’s journey from start to finish. This sets the shared values of the Rainseekers, the Rainmakers and the communities that rely on their mutual understanding directly at odds with the values of the ‘thieves’.

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog at the Council of the Rainmakers.

The last and greatest sacrifice made by Little Dog is to offer his life in exchange for rain. Appropriately enough, this turns out to be a reciprocal gesture. The Rainmakers explain that once they have summoned the rain someone needs to volunteer to draw it away from their land, wearing a Kachina mask to mark them out as one of the Great Spirits and hence worthy to be followed; otherwise the rain will bring only destruction to the fertile southern farms (‘the beans [will] be washed from the ground, […] the corn [..] beaten down into the mud’, and the people will starve, p. 147), while the rain-starved lands of the north will remain in drought. Whoever undertakes this dangerous northward journey may not survive. At once Little Dog’s two best friends among the Rainmakers, Green Corn Woman and Root Digger, volunteer for the role. But they are interrupted by the Great Big Chipmunk, the only one of the three travelling companions who has not yet explicitly sacrificed himself. Green Corn Woman and Root Digger, he points out, are needed by their people. He, on the other hand, is a Totem, and hence already part of the spirit world; he does not think that posing as a Kachina or Spirit will kill him. In any case he is happy to undertake the journey north, bringing water to the continent, since that was always his intention: ‘Little Dog and I were sent here to fetch the Rain,’ he sums up, ‘and fetch it we will, if it drowns us!’ The speech balances the much shorter speech made by Little Dog near the start of the book, when he volunteered for the journey south at the Animal Council on the shores of Lost Lake. The Chipmunk’s speech takes place at a Council too, a human one in this case. Both the southward journey and the fulfilment of its object, then, are the result of collective decision making, and the collective includes both human and nonhuman people. The same sense of collective solidarity is expressed in the preparations made for the northward journey, as it was in the preparations for the journey south, which chiefly involved collecting magic items to put in Little Dog’s bag to trade with the Rainmakers. For the northward journey Little Dog is ritually dressed as a Puebloan person, while the Great Big Chipmunk is fitted with a Puebloan mask to symbolise his status as a Kachina or Great Spirit. At the same time they are enjoined to fix their minds on the places they know where the rain is needed: the Great Plains where the boy and the Chipmunk met Little Horse; the forests of Little Dog’s northern homeland (p. 158). They prepare for the sacrifice as perfect amalgams of the peoples who are helping them and the peoples who need their help, a completed circle that embraces all the inhabitants of the continent. Fairclough was at heart a designer, and her orchestration of the final journey accomplishes the design of her narrative aesthetically as well as morally, like the symbolic patterns made in different coloured sands that decorate the floor of the kiva or sacred underground room where the Rainmakers’ Council took place (p. 146).

Mary Fairclough: Little Dog at the Rainmaking Ceremony.

At the climax of the Rainmaking ceremony, when Ahool the Sun Kachina shoots the magic porcupine quill from his bow towards the north, the companions magically follow the arrow through the air in a movement that retraces and justifies every step of their southward journey. As they go, they catch glimpses of the various friends, human and nonhuman, who helped them on their way: the dying Buffalo on the prairies, the lodges of the Mandans, two young Cougars who helped them pass the Great Red-Pipe-Stone Quarry, a Bear who showed them the way across the river that separates the forests from the plains. Fairclough does not forget anyone of importance who gave the companions assistance, and in mentioning every helper she includes them all in the final gesture of fulfilment and mutual friendship. As a model for collective living, the last few pages of Little Dog and the Rainmakers can hardly be bettered, and mark the book as essential reading for young and old at a time of climate catastrophe like our own.

Mary Fairclough: Alders

Fairclough’s meticulous use of available scholarship on the indigenous peoples of the north American forests, the Great Plains and the Pueblos is reflected everywhere in her representations of the way they live: in her words, in her black-and-white ink drawings, and in the colourful, intricate linocuts interleaved with the verbal narrative. She is clearly fascinated in this book, as she was in Miskoo, by the material and spiritual processes by which people make conscious use of the lands they inhabit. This is evident in her account of the rites of passage to the status of warrior undergone by Little Dog and his older brother, in her description of the ceremonies of the Animal Council, in her account of another Council in an earth lodge of the Mandan, and in her evident enjoyment of Puebloan rituals of all kinds. Her explanation for the relative elaborateness of Puebloan ritual is deeply affectionate: the Pueblo People, she tells us,

living quietly on their high mesas, or down in their deep canyons, thinking as much of growing crops as of hunting animals, and only fighting if they really had to, had given a lot of time and attention to ceremonies, from beautiful elaborate ones for rain and corn-planting and so on, down to small kindly ones for making guests feel at home. They hated anyone to feel awkward or embarrassed. (pp. 136-137)

The combination of engagement, respect, affection and extensive research suggested by Fairclough’s verbal and pictorial narrative seems to me to embody a number of practices recommended by Nisi Shawl and Cynthia Ward in their celebrated handbook Writing the Other: A Practical Approach (Seattle, WA: Aqueduct Press, 2005). This handbook draws on Shawl and Ward’s experience of teaching a course with the same title, and aims to consider ‘what works (and what doesn’t) when writing about characters of races, genders, sexual orientations, abilities, religions, nationalities, and other traits and features different from your own’ (p. 4). As suggested by Shawl and Ward, Fairclough has clearly read, viewed and thought a good deal in an effort to achieve ‘authenticity’, as she understands it. She also claims to have listened to Native Americans – ‘I heard an Indian say once that only careless people have adventures when travelling’, she tells us (p. 40) – although one wonders whether the ‘Indian’ she mentions was in fact the interloper Grey Owl, addressing spectators on one of his lecture tours of Britain. In addition, her narrator stands respectfully outside the various cultures she describes (‘I heard an Indian say’) – something Nisi Shawl considers a useful strategy when writing about characters different from yourself: ‘When at all plausible, the best point of view from which to recount a transcultural tale is one that in some way mimics the tale-teller’s position vis-à-vis the culture: that of an alien’ (p. 89). If nothing else, Fairclough’s fascination with and desire to be respectful of the four Indigenous cultures she depicts shine through in every sentence. Her book, like the original charter of the United Nations, is based on the principle of cooperation between peoples, and that cooperation extends to Fairclough’s honouring of each distinct community she represents – even that of the outcasts of the desert, the lone wolves whose courageous cub, Steals-in-the-Snow, is mourned and honoured in his death by Little Dog.

Mary Fairclough: Glamorous Night

As with Miskoo the Lucky, however, nations do not exist in Little Dog’s world as they do in the world of the United Nations, as tracts of land arbitrarily divided by borders whose contours cannot be seen except on a map. Little Dog is given a map at one point by one of the Mandan men, but it doesn’t indicate any borders; it’s solely designed to help him find his way from waterhole to waterhole as he crosses the desert. In any case, the map is burned to ashes when the People of the Secret Water are attacked by the Puebloan Rainmakers; so he does not have it for much of the journey it was made for, crossing the desert. Fairclough’s American continent is divided not into geographically demarcated nations but into ecosystems: forests, deserts, mountains, plains; and the inhabitants of these four ecosystems are united by a great deal more than what divides them.

Mary Fairclough: Heavy Horses

In fact, space itself doesn’t operate in Fairclough’s first two books as it does in the world of her mostly Anglo readers. Both Miskoo the Lucky and Little Dog and the Rainmakers introduce their readers to systems of communication that overcome both spatial and cultural distance, as more modern forms of communication in her time – radio, telegraph, film, television – simply cannot. One such system is the presence in each book of a messenger with wings, a bird that can oversee and inform distant people of the progress of the protagonist on his epic journey. Miskoo’s journey from his homeland to the land of the Sámi is observed by Nyctia the great Snow Owl, and she makes sure that his family knows he is safe and well so that they will not fret during the short Arctic summer he spends with his new friends. Little Dog’s journey, too, is observed by a friendly bird, Kiniou the great War-Eagle, Chief of all Birds. It is also observed by Little Dog’s enemy, Kahgahgengs the Crow, who is forced by the Jossakeed of Lost Lake to report regularly and truthfully on Little Dog’s progress to the Jossakeed of Little Dog’s people, Man-Whose-Dreams-Are-True. This second communications system confirms the spiritual ties that bind the shamans of all peoples on the North American continent. The Jossakeed of Lost Lake is not known to Man-Whose-Dreams-Are-True, but they share the same understanding of natural magic, and this allows them to speak to each other wordlessly, even at a distance. The old Jossakeed of the Mangan People knows the Jossakeed of Long Lake from a meeting long ago, and willingly helps Little Dog to fulfil the mission which his fellow shaman set in motion. The shaman of the Puebloan People, who is also the Chief of the Desert People – Many Drums Speaking – specializes in making music that brings different peoples together, physically as well as emotionally, which is the supreme form of communication or ‘speaking’, as his name suggests. Even the shaman of the outcast People of the Secret Water, their singer and storyteller, tells the same stories as other shamans, though he uses different names. ‘All over the world’, the narrator tells us, ‘different people have different ideas about these things’ (p. 102); but ‘these things’ remain the same, and can be understood by those who listen carefully, no matter which people they belong to. Shamans of all Peoples speak the same language, tell the same stories, perform the same kinds of magic, and share the same understandings, and this mutual sharing across space and time far outstrips the dream of the United Nations in its potential for bringing people from diverse communities into cooperative syncopation.

Mary Fairclough: Janet in Red

Little Dog and the Rainmakers, then, is a United Nations book, like Miskoo the Lucky; indeed, it was published by the same publishers – Hutchinson’s – and its dustjacket includes an advertisement for the earlier book, reminding readers that it was ‘Hutchinson’s £10,000 United Nations Literary Competition Prize Winner’. Both books, however, go well beyond the United Nations in their inclusiveness, embracing entire ecosystems and discarding all artificial borders in their embracement of cooperation. The Blue Tree has a very different tone, but its inclusiveness is just as generous and striking. Its differences from and similarities with the other books will be the subject of the post that follows.

[The follow-up blog post can be found here.]

Little Dog and the Rainmakers, dustjacket, rear view

NOTES

[1] For example, she wrote the book for an opera, John Barleycorn, with music composed by Bruce Montgomery – aka the crime writer and science fiction afficionado Edmund Crispin…

[2] The full text of her talk can be found here.

[3] I found the quotation here.

[4] The 1945 edition of the UN Charter can be found here.

[5] His most lavishly illustrated book is a novel for children, The Adventures of Sajo and her Beaver People (1935), which again contains both drawings and photos. It can be found here.

[6] See Pilgrims of the Wild, chapter 2: ‘Their hands—one can call them nothing else—were nearly as effective as our own more perfect members would be, in the uses they were put to. They could pick up very small objects with them, manipulate sticks and stones, strike, push, and heave with them and they had a very firm grasp which it was difficult to disengage. When peeling a stick they used them both to twist the stem with supple wrist movements, while the teeth rapidly whittled off the succulent bark as it went by, much after the fashion of a lathe.’ Pilgrims can be found online at Project Gutenberg, here.

[7] It’s worth noting that they are not ‘the desert people’, who are called upon by the Rainmakers to help with the spell for summoning rain; the nameless people of the Secret Water occupy the desert by default, having been expelled from their original communities, whatever they were, for violating the rules of communal living as explained by Beluga. The name of Little Dog’s friend from the Secret Water people, Steals-in-the-Snow, suggests that they come from a much less arid setting than a desert.

[8] Elsewhere in the book we meet more community-minded representatives of lupine society, such as the Chief of the Wolves, a ‘grey slant-eyed shadow’ who licks the hand of Little Dog’s mother as they wait together for her son’s return (p. 171).

[9] See Mark Twain, Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn (London and New York: Everyman, 1977), p. 283: ‘I wished I hadn’t ever come ashore that night, to see such things. I ain’t ever going to get shut of them – lots of times I dream about them.’ Compare Little Dog, p. 113: ‘the Very Big Chipmunk was still glum, and Little Dog began remembering things again’.

Mervyn Peake, Boy in Darkness (1956), and the Nightmare of Complicity

[This piece was written for a conference, ‘Dark Fantasies: Aesthetics of the Nightmare in the 20th Century’, organised by Sheila Dickson and Hans-Walter Schmidt-Hannisa, which took place at the Goethe Institut, Glasgow, on 11 and 12 May 2023. The conference marked the opening of an exhibition featuring the art of Caspar Walter Rauh and Frank Quitely, which is why the piece begins with a comparison of Peake and Rauh. Warm thanks to Sheila and Hans-Walter for inviting me to participate.]

Mervyn Peake, Strange Bird, n.d.

The British artist Mervyn Peake and the German artist Caspar Walter Rauh were born within a year of each other. The careers of both took off in the 1930s. Both entered into creative dialogue with contemporary movements such as Expressionism, Surrealism, New Romanticism and Fantastic Realism, without becoming fully attached to any of them. Both men’s careers were interrupted and profoundly reshaped by the Second World War, and the art of both has long been associated with fantasy and the fantastic. Both were fascinated by grotesque bodies marking the intersection between humans, beasts and trees; both illustrated the fairy tales of the brothers Grimm; both penned their own fantastic stories. Between them, in fact, they offer striking case studies relating to the emergence of fantasy and the fantastic in the verbal and visual arts as among the most resonant responses to the cataclysmic middle years of the Twentieth Century.

Caspar Walter Rauh, ‘Vogelmensch’ (1973)

For both men, the cataclysm found its birth in the human mind, and in Peake’s case, at least, in his own unconscious. His art exposes disturbing parallels between his lifelong creative impulses and the impulse to dominate or wreck the world, as manifested first in the career of Adolf Hitler and later in the threat of global nuclear war. I’d like to consider what I’ll call Peake’s fantasy of complicity in relation to his last masterpiece in prose, a ‘long short story’ called ‘Boy in Darkness’.[1] This novelette was first published in 1956 as one third of an anthology, Sometime, Never, reprinted the following year as ‘A Ballantine Science Fiction Classic’.[2] The other two contributors were William Golding and John Wyndham, whose novelettes, set respectively in ancient Rome and the time to come, make up the first and second parts of the collection under the headings ‘The Past’ and ‘The Future’. One might, then, have expected Peake’s text – the third and final part – to come under the heading ‘The Present’, but instead it was designated ‘The Dream’. Dreams pervade this little collection, from the transient vision of an alternative Roman history conjured up by a Greek inventor in Golding’s ‘Envoy Extraordinary’ to the dream of a near future with no men in it in Wyndham’s futuristic narrative ‘Consider Her Ways’.[3] The book as a whole is the product of a period infatuated with Freud, which recognised that sleep takes up a third of a person’s lifetime and sought to represent the pervasive influence of dreams on contemporary culture through all available media, from paint, fur and feathers to household appliances. For artists working in this period, the distinction between dream and wakefulness was barely valid, and a serious attention to dreams – and their dark siblings, nightmares – was an urgent necessity if the modern world was to be fully accounted for, and perhaps restored to some semblance of health.

There’s no direct indication in ‘Boy in Darkness’ that the Boy protagonist is asleep and dreaming, but the story begins with him throwing himself on his bed in a teenage huff, and a sense of nightmare suffuses the text from this point onwards. The source of the nightmare is the dissolution of boundaries: between dream and reality, childhood and adulthood, play and earnest, humans and beasts, past, present and future, and above all between good and evil, as defined by religious institutions, politicians and moral philosophers. All these boundaries had, of course, already been breached by the time Peake wrote his story, largely thanks to the First World War, which weakened or destroyed all the old grand narratives. But ‘Boy in Darkness’ addresses their dissolution with unique intensity, re-affirming the contemporary sense that life itself had become a dream, and demonstrating how rival forces were engaged in a struggle for possession of the modern dreamscape.

Mervyn Peake, sketch of Ithell Colquhoun (1939)

The contemporary movement in art most concerned with dreams was of course Surrealism, which sought access to the unconscious through automatic drawing, psychoanalysis, and close attention to the dream life of the artist. Peake’s links with Surrealism mostly came through association. His wife, the artist Maeve Gilmore, has been linked to the Surrealists by a recent exhibition of her work at Studio Voltaire, whose website compares her work to that of Eileen Agar, Leonora Carrington and Ithell Colquhoun (Peake drew pencil sketches of Colquhoun in 1939).[4] One of Peake’s closest friends of the 1930s was the Surrealist painter and set designer Leslie Hurry, who illustrated three of his poems.[5] Another friend was Dylan Thomas, closely associated with Surrealism at the time, whose poetry had a powerful influence on Peake’s early verse. We don’t know if Peake visited the London International Surrealist Exhibition of 1936, but given that he was teaching at the Westminster School of Art at the time it’s hard to imagine he didn’t. He could well have read the famous introduction, by the art critic Herbert Read, to the anthology that accompanied the exhibition, Surrealism (1936). And if he did, he might have found several things in it that resonated with his own concerns.

In his introduction Read argues for a close affinity between the Surrealist movement and a well-established fantastical strand of the English literary imagination, which includes ballads, the Gothic novels of Mary Shelley and Matthew ‘Monk’ Lewis, the Prophetic Books of Blake and the nonsense of Lewis Carroll and Edward Lear.[6] Lovers of Peake will notice how closely this list aligns with his interests: he illustrated Coleridge’s ballad The Ancient Mariner, Stevenson’s Gothic novel Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde, and Carroll’s Alice books, as well as writing a number of ballads, several novels and short stories with many Gothic features, a poem on Blake and a great deal of what he called ‘Nonsence’.[7] For Herbert Read, Surrealism was a form of Romantic art which, by taking account of the unconscious as well as the conscious life of human beings, achieves what he calls ‘super-realism’, as against the restricted ‘realism’ of much art and fiction.[8] Realism, Read argues, acknowledges only the conventions recognised by the conscious mind and so fails to represent the full range of human experience, as does the reason-and-rules-based approach known as ‘classicism’. Romantic surrealism, by contrast, maintains a constant tension between reason and the life of the unconstrained imagination as encountered in dreams. Read’s essay culminates in an account of the transformation of a dream he had into a (very bad) poem, as a means of demonstrating the techniques by which an unconscious experience can migrate into literary form. The poem in turn serves to confirm the fact that ‘In dialectical terms there is a continual state of opposition and interaction between the world of objective fact – the sensational and social world of active and economic existence – and the world of subjective fantasy’.[9] This opposition and interaction, Read goes on, ‘creates a state of disquietude, a lack of spiritual equilibrium, which it is the business of the artist to resolve’. Writing poems or stories based on dreams is one way of transacting this ‘business’, and to do justice to dreams artists must feel ‘unimpeded by the irrelevant standards of morality’ – morality being no more than a set of conventions or codes subject to change with each new generation.[10] Read’s essay, in other words, sets out radically to destabilize conventional notions of good and evil, identifying the fantastic art of the Surrealists as a crucial tool in that emancipatory process.

A more radical approach to dream, which did not seek to ‘resolve’ its contradictions, was published three years later by another of Peake’s friends, the poet Walter de la Mare. Angela Carter described de la Mare as a Surrealist, presumably on the grounds of his lifelong obsession with the oneiric;[11] and though he never joined this or any other movement, his mammoth introduction to his anthology Behold, This Dreamer! – published in the year the War broke out, 1939 – could have served as a field guide to dreams for Surrealist artists. For de la Mare the distinction between waking and sleeping is always uncertain. The border between the two states defies cartography, waking dreams are as common as sleeping ones, and what recollections in tranquillity we may have of dreams is only ever achieved in our waking moments, contaminating them with conscious thought. A section of his introduction is titled ‘Day-Dreams’ and concerns the phenomenon of ‘reverie’: a kind of waking sleep in which the mind spins subjective visions from what Read calls ‘objective fact’.[12] Peake famously entitled one chapter in his novel Titus Groan (1946) ‘The Reveries’, sinking his reader into the daydreams of his principal characters as if in response to de la Mare’s essay. Another section of the introduction to Behold, This Dreamer!, ‘Day-Life and Dream-Life’, asserts that waking experience is no more coherent than that of sleep. Reality, de la Mare points out, is made up of random elements – ‘the clump and clatter of a country horse and cart, the demoniac scream of a motor horn, the rumble of a distant train, the crowing of a cock, a maid polishing a brass door-handle, the barking of a distant dog’ – with no rational connection between them except for their simultaneous reception by a pair of human ears.[13] And he goes on to point out that we sometimes lose certainty as to whether we’re awake or asleep, selecting a recent international incident to drive home the point:

Few experiences […] can have exceeded in intensity and dread that of living through the recent European crisis[…]. Yet even then, on the brink of that abyss, how many of us must have paused, as I did myself for one moment, at the inward enquiry, ‘Is this a dream?’[14]

The reference here is to the September Crisis of 1938, when Britain and France sought to avert war with Germany by handing over part of Czechoslovakia in response to German aggression.[15] The logic for doing so – that it would ensure peace – was quickly shown to be no logic at all, and the appeasement of Hitler branded Britain and France as directly complicit with Nazi expansionism. The prospect of impending war awakened by the Crisis, then, is for de la Mare a real-life nightmare, and his response to this brutal intrusion of dreams into reality was to publish two successive anthologies – Behold, This Dreamer! and Love (1943), to the second of which Peake contributed a poem – that focussed on dreams rather than nightmares, intimacy rather than conflict. If the world was in the grip of a dream, these collections imply, perhaps the most committed of dreamers could somehow help to alter the kind of dream it was…

At the same time, de la Mare’s own dreams as reported in Behold, This Dreamer! are packed with acts of disturbing aggression and retribution. One dream involves his murder of an elderly woman and his vain attempts to conceal the crime by mopping up her blood. Startled by something, he spills the bucket of blood he has collected, allowing it to run all over the floor, while simultaneously the blood-red light of dawn spills in through the window like a premonition of the crime’s discovery (p.71). In another dream he imagines that the house where he committed the murder has been sold without his consent, meaning that someone will certainly find the corpse in the locked room where he left it (p. 72). In another he sees himself punished for the murder by being tortured on a machine with many wheels (p. 74); in still another he sits awaiting execution, then makes a sudden dash for freedom and is shot dead by a guard (p. 75). All the atrocities of the Twentieth Century seem to be visited on the poet in his sleep, marking him out as the man responsible for them and promising to track him down with the same closed circuit of elusive but deadly logic that trapped the nameless narrator of Flann O’Brien’s The Third Policeman (c. 1940), or the unfortunate Josef K in Kafka’s The Trial (1925, translated 1937).

Peake met de la Mare when he drew his portrait for the London Mercury in 1936 – the year of the International Surrealist Exhibition, and the year when Peake’s writing career began to take off. From 1937, Peake’s verse was widely published in magazines, and it was de la Mare’s encouragement that led him to submit his first collection, Shapes and Sounds (1941), to Chatto and Windus. Peake’s fascination with dreams was almost on a par with the older poet’s, and three at least of his published works take the form of dream visions: the short story ‘The Weird Journey’, first published in 1948; ‘Boy in Darkness’ (1956); and the children’s play ‘Noah’s Ark’, written in the 1950s. Interestingly, all three of these texts have religion at the core. In ‘The Weird Journey’ the protagonist falls ‘wide awake’ to find himself striding like a clockwork giant along a Dali-esque beach surrounded by multicoloured parrots, who carry books of the Old Testament in their beaks.[16] ‘Boy in Darkness’ contains a monstrous Lamb which is clearly a perversion of the Lamb of God, while in ‘Noah’s Ark’ a young child falls asleep to find himself in the story from Genesis, caught up in a conspiracy of carnivorous animals against Noah, the only person who can guide their vessel through the stormy seas of the scriptural Flood.[17] Peake grew up as the son of dissenting missionaries in China, and married a Catholic whose religion he found hard to stomach (as did Gilmore herself, eventually).[18] It’s not surprising, then, if his dream works vividly represent the actual or threatened dissolution of faith, from the dismembered Bible of ‘The Weird Journey’ to the suicidal plot to take over the ark in the children’s play. And ‘Boy in Darkness’ goes one step further, making the Boy himself complicit with faith’s dissolution, a double-dyed blasphemer against the oppressive faiths of his dreamworld, and thus a stand-in for the blasphemer-artist himself. If de la Mare’s dreams made him a murderer, Peake’s made his protagonist a god-killer, completing an artistic trajectory that began in his pirate fictions of the 1930s, around the time when he met de la Mare.

The symbiosis between art and violence was already present in Peake’s early novel fragment, Mr Slaughterboard (c. 1935), whose titular protagonist is a pirate captain who regularly kills off members of his crew ‘in the cause of artistry and to prove the inevitabilities of the illogical’.[19] A few years later, during the war, Peake drew a series of pictures designed to display his talents to the War Artists’ Advisory Committee, from whom he sought employment. Titled ‘An Exhibition of the Artist Adolf Hitler: The New Order’, these consist of images with conventional academic titles – ‘Landscape with Figures’, ‘Sea-scape’, ‘Peasant Dance’, ‘Study of a Young Girl’ – each of which depicts a wartime atrocity.[20] The landscape shows refugees moving through a corpse-strewn city, the seascape a young woman adrift in water after her ship has been torpedoed, ‘Peasant Dance’ shows a man and woman dying in a hail of bullets, while the young girl has been shot in the chest. Most striking of all is ‘Self-Portrait’, which shows the artist Adolf Hitler staring at himself in horror, with haunted eyes, sweat beading his forehead, mouth compressed. He is presumably looking into a mirror as he draws his own likeness; but the artist who really drew him was of course Mervyn Peake, and the notion that the artist might see himself mirrored in Hitler is profoundly unsettling, as unsettling as the notion of wartime atrocities as a form of art. The conceit is lent a perverse wit by the fact that Hitler really was an aspiring artist, and the whole project raises a number of questions about the function of art in wartime; if to represent acts of violence, real or imagined, does this make the artist somehow complicit with those acts, like the appeasers who accepted the logic of Hitler’s violence by rewarding him for it? To draw a man like Hitler convincingly, wouldn’t one have to imagine oneself as his double, see things through his eyes, even if only for a moment? Did Peake’s own propensity for writing about art as violence, à la Mr Slaughterboard, predispose him to achieve this feat of identification? Presumably the War Artists’ Advisory Committee didn’t want the public pondering such questions, since the picture series was never published in his lifetime.

Mervyn Peake, ‘Self-Portrait’

But the concept of the violent artist continued to haunt him. The antihero of the first and second Titus novels, a young man called Steerpike, is an accomplished draftsman and actor whose technical skills are utterly divorced from any emotional investment in his art. What delights him, in fact, is mimicking the effects of art to worm his way into the trust of art’s admirers – and to make a horrible art of his own by accomplishing ingenious murders and getting away with it. As Peake informs us, ‘He could not sink himself. He was not the artist. He was the exact imitation of one’.[21] And the possibility of that ‘exact imitation’ – with no artist’s heart at the core of it – seems to rock Peake the artist with recurrent anxieties over his own status as creator. Was he in fact the artist, or was he merely the mimic, his art no more than a parasitic copy of the great artworks he admired? Was he unable to sink himself, to emotionally invest in his creations? Peake’s nightmare throughout his life is his coexistence with the artist’s double – indistinguishable from the true artist – whose skills are placed at the service of totalitarianism, i.e. of the shaping of life itself into an exact copy of the worst of nightmares, a cold, calculating, self-interested mind. At other, more stable times in history this vision of the artist-dictator might have seemed excessive; but at a time when the political reality surpassed the most appalling of dreams, the notion that there might be any such thing as ‘excess’ in politics may no longer have seemed entirely valid.

Mervyn Peake, ‘Steerpike’

Like the Titus books, ‘Boy in Darkness’ begins in the setting of Gormenghast Castle, a vast and ancient edifice which has been governed by nonsensical rituals for thousands of years – though the name of the castle is never mentioned in it, erased from the protagonist’s and reader’s minds like names themselves in Alice’s wood of forgetting. The rituals performed in the castle resemble a religion whose meaning has been leeched from it by the passage of time; but they derive an oppressive authority from their titanic architectural setting, a setting whose veneration lies at the core of each ritual. Stone itself is the object of worship in Gormenghast, and the bodies and minds of its mortal denizens are expected to mimic stoniness in their dedication to the singular functions laid down for them by long-dead zealots. In Titus Groan the bodies of the kitchen cleaners called the Grey Scrubbers seem to be morphing into stone, while the Earl of Groan’s personal servant, Flay, has kneecaps that resound at every step, as if succumbing to petrifaction.[22] Yet in ‘Boy in Darkness’, there is growth at the heart of this implacable structure. Tiny organisms sprout in abandoned cellars and lost staircases; creatures scamper with a ‘husky scuffling sound’ across the floors of abandoned halls;[23] and the central human figure in the Gormenghast hierarchy, the Earl of Gormenghast – the Boy himself, whose name, ‘Titus’, is never mentioned, like the name of the castle – stands on the cusp of maturation. In the novels Titus Groan and Gormenghast, change was deemed blasphemy by the castle’s rule-driven Masters of Ritual; but in ‘Boy in Darkness’ change suffuses both the castle and all its denizens, represented here by the hordes of excited, sweating children and dynamic riders who participate in the night of celebratory ‘high barbecue’ with which the story begins.[24] And as the narrative unfolds, change itself becomes the focus of a struggle over the soul of art and the artist, enacting the struggle over art’s position as the recorder and agent of change in the twentieth century.

The story divides itself into two distinct parts. In the first part, the young Earl rebels against the rigid structure of the castle hierarchy – a structure driven by arbitrary conventions, like Read’s notion of Classicism – by making up his mind to run away. The Boy’s rebellion could be taken to represent the insurgency of Romanticism against the regulations of the Enlightenment, and by fostering such rebellion – limited as it is – the castle could be said to nurture creativity; indeed, the sheer absurdity of its ceremonies makes them seem endlessly creative. In the second half of the story, the Boy flees from the familiar confines of the castle into a changeless wasteland: a post-apocalyptic Dead Zone littered with industrial remains, ruled over by a monstrous sentient Lamb addicted to change – or rather, to changing other people’s bodies, then trapping them in his unchanging service till the end of their days. The wasteland itself is a corpse, no longer useful as a healthy biosphere, or as the site for a farm or working mine, while the disused mine where the Lamb resides is littered with the bones of his worn-out slaves, whose transformation at the Lamb’s cold hands eventually kills them. In the first part of the story, the Boy of the title represents the creativity and vitality of childhood; he tells himself stories, then acts out those stories using himself as his principal player, escaping from the castle into the wilderness beyond in imitation of his reveries and sleeping dreams. In the second part, the Lamb is the heartless pseudo-artist of Peake’s nightmares, the ersatz changes he effects representing a calcification and compression of the human bodies he gets into his power. Once changed by him, none of his formerly human subjects can ever change again, and this changelessness, it’s implied, is what destroys them, militating against the life principle that sustains their flesh and blood.

The two parts of the story represent the past and the future, which converge on the dream of the present much as they did in the famous treatise by J W Dunne, An Experiment with Time (1927).[25] Dunne’s influential book argued that dreams consist in equal parts of fractured images of the past and the future, and he went on to devise a complex theory to account for the elements of precognition he detected in his own dreams; Peake’s friend and first editor, Graham Greene, was deeply interested in Dunne’s theories. The first part of the novelette, in which the Boy figures as a feudal lord in a Gothic castle, represents the past, while the second, set in a terminally damaged landscape full of evidence of lost technologies, represents the future – most obviously in the scientific ‘experiments’ conducted by the Lamb, whereby he transforms human beings into their closest animal equivalents (spiders, lions, goats, monkeys) in order to subject them to his own sadistic uses.[26] The Boy finds himself stranded between these two timelines, desperate to free himself from the oppressions of the feudal past, desperate to resist and overcome the oppressions of the technocratic future – an embodiment of the uneasy post-war present. But he also takes on aspects of both past and future. By rebelling against authoritarian ritual he upholds the decidedly modern philosophy of individual self-determination – a form of anarchy, of the kind with which Peake became partly aligned in the post-war years, as James Gifford has argued.[27] Meanwhile the Boy’s one-person ‘insurrection’ against Gormenghast echoes the revolts, protests and revolutions that have characterised the twentieth century, from the Russian Revolution to the General Strike to the independence movements in Ireland, India, Burma and the rest.[28] But he also incites the Lamb’s servants to rebellion using feudal ideas, promising them ‘golden thrones’ of their own to replace the Lamb’s quasi-ecclesiastical seat; and he deploys a tool from the mythic past – a long knife or sword – to destroy the Lamb at the story’s conclusion. Adrift in a nameless, history-less space – like the Boy stowaway in Peake’s play about Noah’s Ark – he has to construct his own personal narrative to escape the controlling narratives imposed on him against his will, and makes use of all available resources from past, present and future to steer himself to some form of resolution. In doing so he becomes contaminated by the sins both of his ancestors and his descendants, losing an ‘innocence’ that has been usurped by the sheep-shaped dictator of the industrial wasteland, and finally coming to embody the complex condition of the modern artist.[29]

Loss of innocence – that vexed term, with its Christian and Blakean connotations – lies at the centre of the narrative, along with a changing sense of how creativity operates in different contexts. In Freudian terms, the Boy stands on the threshold between the latency phase and the genital phase of a child’s development; his adventure begins on the evening of his fourteenth birthday. The traversing of that threshold is marked by the story’s transition from an unfocused fantasy of exploration in the opening paragraphs to the wielding of a phallic sword in the final showdown. At the beginning the Boy seeks refuge in an act of imaginative art while lying in bed: he studies a stain on the ceiling of his bedroom and transforms it in his mind’s eye into the map of an island fit for exploring, a pirate-infested zone of adventure reminiscent of Stevenson’s Treasure Island – Peake’s favourite reading as a boy, and a books he illustrated as an adult. But this purely imaginative process fails to satisfy him on this day of transition, and instead he chooses to enact adventure using his body as well as his mind, fleeing from the Castle into the rule-less wilderness beyond.

Here he finds many more stains, for the desert or wasteland beyond the wilderness is covered with toxic deposits:

Tinges of glaucous colour, now here, now there, appeared before his eyes. They lay thinly like snail-slime or glistened from the occasional stone or along a blade of grass or spread like a blush over the ground.

But a blush that was grey. A wet and slippery thing that moved hither and thither over the foreign ground.[30]

If the story is a dream, at this point it has become an erotic one, as signalled by the word ‘blush’: suffused with the shame Freud identified as a key sign of transition to the genital phase. Soon afterwards, the Boy encounters two male persons, half man half beast – Goat and Hyena – one of whom constantly employs the language of affection (‘my dear’, ‘my love’) and invites the Boy to stroke his mane (p. 40). This pair carries the Boy to a yet more disturbingly sexualized being in the form of the Lamb, who is both a human child – with a child’s plump hands – and an ancient predator of unfathomable malice, possessing a child’s shrill voice that articulates a murderous adult lust directed at the Boy. This being, too, lives in an environment rife with stains. The objects in the subterranean room he inhabits, lit by innumerable quasi-ecclesiastical candles and lamps, give off a ‘kind of vivid stain; almost as if the lit objects burnt – or gave out, rather than absorbed, the light’ (p. 57), like certain radioactive substances. Later the Lamb himself succumbs to spontaneous staining after touching the Boy’s face with an icy finger: ‘a kind of covetous and fiery rash spread out beneath the wool, so that the milk-white curls appeared to be curdled, in a blush from head to feet’ (p. 82). One reader of the novelette, Peake’s biographer Malcolm Yorke, found its transition from childhood fantasy to implied child sexual abuse by adults too disturbing to condone, especially if the story might have been intended for children.[31] But the anthology in which it first appeared makes it perfectly clear that it was aimed at adults, and that the story it tells is in effect the story of the end of ‘innocence’ in a far wider context than that of a single child’s slow growth to maturity, with all the dangers that entails.

Mervyn Peake, Boys in Masks

In any case, the Boy never sees himself as ‘innocent’. He begins the story in a rage brought on by the humiliations he has had to endure over the last two days, in the course of his birthday rituals. These include being presented with gifts which must at once be returned to the castle vaults; sitting for hours at the edge of a ‘gnat-haunted’ lake (p. 23); planting a tree without assistance, wearing a hat ‘like a dunce’s cap’ (p. 23); and sporting a necklace of rotting turkey feathers, which must again be returned in the morning to a pointless official called the ‘Hereditary Master of the Quills’ (p. 26). All these details resemble punishments rather than celebrations, and imply that the concepts of misdemeanour and punishment have little meaning in a castle that has lost all sense of proportionate cause and effect. The Boy’s mini-insurgency, meanwhile, though natural under the circumstances, represents for the denizens of Gormenghast a blasphemous revolt against the castle more or less equivalent to Satan’s revolt against his Maker. The link with Satan is strengthened by the fact that the Boy’s rebellion involves breaking promises: ‘Had he forgotten,’ the narrator wonders, ‘the pledges he had made as a child, and on a thousand subsequent occasions? The solemn oaths that bound him, with cords of allegiance, to his home[?]’ (p. 25). The parallel is undermined, a moment later, by its diminutive scale: the Earl proposes only to rebel for a single day (p. 25). But it’s immediately reinstated by a sudden outbreak of verbal blasphemy on the part of the young revolutionary: ‘Oh, damn the Castle! Damn the Laws! Damn everything!’ (p. 25). Uttered in his bed, between waking and sleep, the concept of sacrilege followed by damnation continues to resonate throughout the Boy’s nightmare, culminating in his encounter with a genuinely devilish being, the toxic Lamb. For instance, when the Boy flees from the castle he encounters a pack of strange dogs which help him to cross a river into the wasteland. The Boy sees their yellow eyes as ‘ineradicably wicked’, and the name of their species blasphemously inverts the word for God, yet the Boy identifies with them as a fellow living creature and sends up a ‘prayer of gladness’ for having met them (p. 36). Woven through the first half of the story, then, is the association of the Boy with transgression; while in the second half of the narrative he is increasingly aligned with the monstrous Lamb who is his purported enemy.

Indeed, the second part of the story mirrors the first, with an anticipated ceremony or ritual – to be accomplished when the two beast-men who serve the Lamb bring the Boy to their Master – followed by a second act of insurrection, whereby the Boy substitutes the Lamb for himself as victim in the sacrifice, then recrosses the river with the help of the dogs on his journey homewards. And there are further mirrorings in both parts. At one point in his castle bedroom the Boy catches sight of himself in a looking-glass, which prompts the first of his acts of rebellion, the tearing off and trampling of the turkey-feather necklace. And in the second part, the Boy seeks to gain power over the Lamb’s hybrid man-beast servants by mirroring the homoerotic language used by Goat. ‘What a mane!’ he tells Hyena admiringly: ‘How proud and arrogant are the hairs of it! With what a black, torrential surge do they break through your snow-white shirt’ (p. 51). A little later he mirrors the doctrine of the Lamb, promising the beast-men not only thrones but hordes of ‘slaves’ of the kind the Lamb created for himself when he fabricated man-beasts out of men (p. 88). In the process he transforms the man-beasts into potential mirrors both of the Lamb and of himself, awaking in them a thirst both for Lamb-like tyranny and for the ‘ulcer’ of Boy-like ‘insurrection’ (p. 88). Even the Boy’s failure fully to bring the man-beasts on side – they are too terrified of the Lamb to rise against him – means that, mirror-wise, the Lamb is unable to use the man-beasts for his own purposes, giving the Boy the chance to kill him with Hyena’s sword.

In the Hall of Mirrors which is ‘Boy in Darkness’, the Boy and the Lamb could be taken to represent rival aspects of the creative artist; aspects that overlap and converge at crucial moments. The Boy turns the stain on his ceiling into a piratical Treasure Island, complete with a wandering fly as the explorer he can identify with as he spins his stories – the explorer he embodies as he flees the castle (p. 25). Like Stevenson before him, he shows little awareness of the colonial heritage that forms the backdrop of all pirate adventures, all explorer stories; for him tropical islands are no more than exciting stage sets, only rendered more amusing by the presence of native peoples (branded ‘Indians’ or ‘cannibals’) or non-native but conveniently huntable wild goats. The Lamb, on the other hand, uses people and places rather than ceiling stains and flies as the raw material for his murderous art, like Peake’s artist-Hitler. He stains the once immaculate landscape over which he rules with his lust for dominion; and his two surviving works, Hyena and Goat, make explicit the colonial nature of his artistry. Goat, after all, serves as the staple diet of British castaways and naval frigates, while the hyena is the most despised of indigenous beasts in the colonised territories of Asia and Africa. The Lamb’s history contains hundreds of creatures such as these, metamorphosed into beast-men by his psychic powers; however, all but two have died before the Boy’s arrival, anticipating the long slow death of the British Empire to which Peake bore witness, as a son of missionaries and a product of the British boarding school system, designed as it is to churn out soldiers, entrepreneurs and administrators to control the colonies. The products of the Lamb’s artistry are mostly mockeries of creatures from British colonised territories: the debased ‘king of beasts’ or ‘golden cat’, the man-lion (pp. 69-70), the ‘delicate and nimble’ man-gazelle (p. 70), the ‘mantis-man’, the crocodile-man, and strangest of all the ‘inordinate fish that sang like a linnet’ – a denizen of the colonised field of human dreams. The Lamb himself is a travesty both of the Christian Lamb of God – seated on a throne worthy of a bishop or Pope, and finally sacrificed at the hands of the Boy – and of childhood ‘innocence’, rendered literally hollow by decades and centuries of merciless, self-serving artistry imposed on the bodies of others, whether children or enslaved adults. Even the Lamb’s fascination with making beast-men for his own amusement links him to boyhood adventure stories, such as H G Wells’s The Island of Doctor Moreau (1896) or Edgar Rice Boroughs’s The Monster Men (1913). The Boy of the story’s title – a lost soul like Wells’s Prendick or Burroughs’s Number Thirteen – meets the Lamb in darkness (that could be an alternative title for the novelette), and finds himself capable of both mimicking and destroying it. To destroy the Lamb he uses an instrument from the old imperialist romances – a sword – and so sets himself up as the artist-hero of his own narrative. But the interwovenness of the narratives of Lamb and Boy – for instance, in the way the Boy works on the minds of his beast-man captors, Hyena and Goat, as he seeks to gain some power to face up to the Lamb – renders them disturbingly reflective of each other. By the end of the story it’s easy enough to think of the Boy as some kind of hybrid child-beast, or Boy-Lamb, whose nature contains both the inventive freedom of childhood and the hunger for power of a fully-fledged dictator.

The narrative, as a result, embodies the dissolution of simplistic moral systems as discussed by Herbert Read in his introduction to Surrealism. It could be read as a commentary on Read’s account of the Surrealist’s contempt for such moral systems, which are only ever devised to uphold the interests of the powerful:

The Surrealist is opposed to current morality because he considers that it is rotten. He can have no respect for a code of ethics that tolerates extremes of poverty and riches; that wastes or deliberately destroys the products of the earth amidst a starving or undernourished people; that preaches a gospel of universal peace and wages aggressive war with all the appendages of horror and destruction which its evil genius can invent; that so distorts the sexual impulse that thousands of unsatisfied men and women go mad, millions waste their lives in unhappiness or poison their minds with hypocrisy. For such a morality […] the Surrealist has nothing but hatred and scorn (p. 86).

The Boy’s bid for power ends, in fact, with the refusal of any such system. When he kills the Lamb, the creature’s last remaining victims, Goat and Hyena, undergo a transformation into the humans they once were, losing the allegorical names which had pinned them into their beastly bodies and becoming ‘two ancient men’, one with a ‘sloping back’ no longer locked into the characteristics of the carrion eater he embodied throughout the story, the other with the ‘sideways shuffle’ that formerly marked the self-styled Capricorn or goat (p. 92). The ancient men do not become the Boy’s slaves or servants; they merely lead him out of the mine and part from him and each other ‘without a word’ (p. 92). In doing so, they dismantle what had threatened to become a horrible alternative Pilgrim’s Progress penned by the Lamb, whose characters can only ever signify the narrow range of qualities indicated by their names: Lamb, Goat, Hyena, Boy (or Monkey, as he nearly becomes). As a missionary’s son, one of Peake’s default adventure stories would have been Bunyan’s masterpiece, and a quotation from it provides the epigraph at the beginning of Titus Groan. Like ‘Boy in Darkness’ Bunyan’s book is ‘delivered under the similitude of a dream’, but its tightly controlled allegories have none of the waywardness of actual dreams, being governed by the ‘gospel-laws’ of a stern God.[32] At least, so Bunyan hopes, and expresses those hopes in his verse ‘Apology for his Book’; though the section of that ‘Apology’ selected by Peake to introduce Titus Groan suggests that the resultant allegory will have something Surreal about it (‘Dost thou love picking meat? Or wouldst thou see / A man i’th’clouds, and hear him speak to thee?’). The Boy’s return to the castle at the end of the story consigns the Lamb’s allegory to the realm of dream or nightmare, and makes of the Boy’s ancestral home, by contrast, an uneasy refuge.

Walter de la Mare thought of the European Crisis as a nightmare, in part, perhaps, because of the complicity with Nazism with which it stained British democracy. Peake’s nightmare, in ‘Boy in Darkness’, is a composite British artist who is complicit both with colonialism and with Nazism, both with the feudalism of the past and with the totalitarianism of the present and future. As a portrait of Peake’s moment in history, then, it’s as disturbing – and perhaps as enlightening – as anything else we have. Herbert Read might have called it a work of ‘super-realism’. It’s clearly, at least, a substantial work of art.

Mervyn Peake, illustration for Oscar Wilde’s poem The Sphinx

NOTES

[1] The term ‘long short story’ is applied to ‘Boy in Darkness’ by Maeve Gilmore in her foreword to the story, as reprinted in Boy in Darkness and Other Stories, ed. Sebastian Peake (London and Chicago: Peter Owen, 2007), p. 17. All quotations are from this edition.

[2] Sometime, Never: Three Tales of Imagination by William Golding, John Wyndham, Mervyn Peake (New York: Ballantine Books, 1962), front cover.

[3] In ‘Consider her Ways’ it’s taken by the first-person narrator – at least at first – as a literal dream: ‘I must still be in a suspended state,’ she tells herself, ‘very likely with concussion, and this was a dream, or hallucination’ (Sometime, Never, p. 68). The dream content of ‘Envoy Extraordinary’ is more complex, fabricated from its three central characters’ radically different perspectives on the world – one fanciful, one apparently practical but equally idealistic, one balanced between fancy and practicality – each held in suspension by the improbable encounter between the owners of those perspectives which the story relates.

[4] Studio Voltaire, Maeve Gilmore: https://studiovoltaire.org/whats-on/maeve-gilmore-2022/.

[5] Richard Warren’s account of Hurry sets him firmly in the context of the surrealists and neo-romantics: https://richardawarren.wordpress.com/tag/leslie-hurry/.

[6] Herbert Read (ed.), Surrealism (New York: Harcourt, Brace and Company, n.d.), pp. 46-56.

[7] For Peake’s ‘Nonsence’ see the introduction to R. W. Maslen and G. Peter Winnington (eds.), Complete Nonsense, Fyfield Books (Manchester: Carcanet, 2011), pp. 1-2.

[8] Read, Surrealism, p. 21. Peake describes himself as a ‘Romanticist in Painting’ in a letter to Gordon Smith; see Smith, Mervyn Peake: A Personal Memoir (London: Victor Gollancz, 1984), p. 46.  See also James Gifford on Peake’s loose affiliation with New Romanticism, in Gifford, A Modernist Fantasy: Modernism, Anarchism and the Radical Fantastic (Victoria, BC: ELS Editions, 2018), p. 122 ff.

[9] Read, Surrealism, p. 40.

[10] Read, Surrealism, p. 51.

[11] Walter de la Mare, Memoirs of a Midget (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1982), introduction by Angela Carter.

[12] De la Mare’s interest in reverie goes back to the beginning of his career; he introduces a character called ‘Reverie’ into his chapters on The Pilgrim’s Progress in his first novel, Henry Brocken (1904). See de la Mare, Henry Brocken (London: W. Collins, n.d.), chapters IX and X.

[13] Walter de la Mare, Behold, This Dreamer! (London: Faber and Faber, 1939), p. 68.

[14] De la Mare, Behold, This Dreamer!, p. 69.

[15] See Peake’s poem, ‘Au Moulin Joyeux: September Crisis, 1938’, in Peake, Collected Poems, ed. R. W. Maslen, Fyfield Books (Manchester: Carcanet, 2008), p. 43, for the writer-artist’s reaction to the same events.

[16] Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 95.

[17] For ‘Noah’s Ark’ see Mervyn Peake, Peake’s Progress: Selected Writings and Drawings of Mervyn Peake, ed. Maeve Gilmore (London: Allen Lane, 1978), pp. 383-443.

[18] For Peake’s struggle with Catholicism see his poems ‘How Foreign to the Spirit’s Early Beauty’ and ‘No Creed Shall Bind Me to the Sapless Bole’, Collected Poems, ed. Maslen, pp. 39 and 61.

[19] Peake, Peake’s Progress, p. 71.

[20] The picture series has never been reproduced in its entirety; most of the pictures listed can be found in Mervyn Peake: The Man and his Art, ed. G. Peter Winnington (London and Chester Springs: Peter Owen, 2006), pp. 66-69. ‘Sea-scape’ can be found in Mervyn Peake, Writings and Drawings, ed. Maeve Gilmore and Shelagh Johnson (London: Academy Editions and New York: St Martin’s Press, 1974), p. 46.

[21] Mervyn Peake, The Gormenghast Trilogy (London: Mandarin, 1992), p. 116.

[22] A similar process of petrifaction takes place in the closing part of Herbert Read’s only novel, The Green Child (1935). See Read, The Green Child (London: Grey Walls Press, 1945), pp. 124 ff.

[23] Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 32.

[24] Peake, ‘Boy in Darkness’, p. 30.

[25] My edition is this one: J. W. Dunne, An Experiment with Time (London: Faber and Faber, 1973).

[26] Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 59: ‘the experiments were without precedent.’

[27] See James Gifford, A Modernist Fantasy, p. 122 ff.

[28] Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 25: ‘Insurrection! It was indeed nothing less.’

[29] For the Lamb’s usurpation of innocence, see Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 79: ‘they heard a sound of bleating, so faint, so far away; it was like innocence or a strain of love from the pastures of sweet April.’

[30] Peake, Boy in Darkness, p. 37.

[31] See Malcolm Yorke, Mervyn Peake: My Eyes Mint Gold. A Life (London: John Murray, 2000), pp. 257-8.

[32] John Bunyan, The Pilgrim’s Progress (London: Faber and Faber, 1947), pp. 3-11)

Mervyn Peake and the Queering of Sark

The Hogsback, Sark. British commandos landed here twice in the Second World War.

[I’d like to start with a shout-out to Dr Taylor Driggers, whose work in general, and in particular his brilliant first book, Queering Faith in Fantasy Literature, Perspectives on Fantasy (London etc. : Bloomsbury Academic, 2022), opened my eyes to new dimensions of the fantastic. His book should be the first port of call for anyone looking at fantasy, queerness and Christianity.]

In my last post I wrote about my recent visit to the island of Sark, in a quest to understand Mervyn Peake’s fascination with this inhabited rock in the English Channel. As I wrote, an idea began to dawn on me, largely in response to Jane Norwich’s book about the Sark Art Group to which Peake belonged, Inspired by Sark (2022).[1] I wondered if he thought of Sark as representing an escape from the rules that bound him on the British mainland, in particular the rules that governed sexuality and gender? Sark as an escape of any kind, of course, was really a Sark of the imagination – a fantastical Sark – and I think this became very clear to him as he spent time on the island, first in the inter-war years when the Art Group briefly flourished as a hothouse of idealistic optimism, and later when he returned after the war to find the island community changed by suffering and the landscape transformed by the impact of the German occupation. At the same time, Peake’s dream of an alternative Sark in which the rules of sexuality and gender were relaxed or re-examined remained with him, I think, and helped to shape his novels, not least the only novel he set on Sark itself, the quirkily disturbing Mr Pye. I should stress that this is conjecture, but it’s built on what I think are solid foundations, and this post will expose those foundations as best it can.

Hovering in the background as I write is John Donne’s famous Meditation 17, from Devotions Upon Emergent Occasions (1623). The most familiar part of this contemplative passage is, perhaps, the opening sentence: ‘No man is an island, entire of itself; every man is a piece of a continent, a part of the main’. As a man of his time and of his own particular strand of education, Peake is likely to have known this piece well. He attended a school for the sons of missionaries, and was clearly fascinated by early modern literature, which finds echoes throughout his work, from the quasi-Jacobean blank verse spoken by Earl Sepulchrave in Titus Groan – and the quotation from Bunyan’s Pilgrim’s Progress that opens it – to his experiments with the sonnet form (such as his early poem on the sixteenth-century painter El Greco) and the Elizabethan-style verse dramas he wrote in the 1950s.[2]

Sea Rocks near Creux Harbour, Sark

Meditation 17 runs like this:

No man is an island, entire of itself; every man is a piece of the continent, a part of the main. If a clod be washed away by the sea, Europe is the less, as well as if a promontory were, as well as if a manor of thy friend’s or of thine own were. Any man’s death diminishes me, because I am involved in mankind; and therefore never send to know for whom the bell tolls; it tolls for thee.

I mentioned in my previous post that an early version of Mr Pye ends with the missionary’s death, and it seems to me that Donne’s meditation could fittingly be used to provide a commentary on that earlier ending. In that version of the novel, the missionary is driven from the island in the end, like James Whale’s creature in the movie Frankenstein (1931), as a monster and an outcast; but his death does not purge the islanders of their kinship with him, according to Donne’s text. Sark could easily be described as a clod washed out to sea from the continent of Europe, and Mr Pye could in turn be seen as an adopted ‘Son of Sark’, like Peake himself: a smaller clod, whose loss both diminishes the island, rendering it spiritually or at least emotionally bereft, and accentuates his involvement in it – the involvement it sought to undo by hounding him to the edge of a cliff and over it.[3] There is even a ‘manor’ on Sark, as in Donne’s Devotion: the Old Manoir which the Lords of Sark first made their home in the Sixteenth Century, though they no longer live there. If Meditation 17 helps to establish Mr Pye’s death in that early version as confirmation of his fellowship with the islanders, despite their hostility to him, then the disappearance of Mr Pye in the novel’s published state leaves the question of what to make of his kinship to the islanders completely open. Does it affirm his difference from them, or their unacknowledged need for him, since after his removal the island is left ‘suddenly empty, […] nothing but a long wasp-waisted rock’ off the coast of France?[4] Mr Pye’s loss diminishes Sark, and by extension all those who cannot contend with what Mr Pye represents. But what is that, exactly?

As my last blog post explained, Mr Pye arrives on Sark with the intention of converting the islanders to his personal religion: the religion of a pantheistic God he calls the Great Pal, who inheres in everything, from the storm at sea to the porridge at the breakfast table, from the ‘brook that sparkles in the Dixcart valley’ (a tree-filled combe that leads down to the beach close to the Peakes’ house on Mill Road) to the cigarette smoked by Mr Pye’s landlady and friend, the redoubtable Miss Dredger (p. 60). His mission, however, soon turns bizarre. His excessive virtue (or what he sees as his virtue) unexpectedly causes him to sprout a pair of wings, and in his efforts to rid himself of this embarrassment he turns to petty crime. This in turn has the effect of both shrinking the wings and making horns spring from his head; and it’s the horns that turn the islanders against him. The wings and the horns mark him out as different; but this physical difference can also be seen as a demonstration of his underlying links to the local community. He is not simply an angelic missionary, but also that benevolent being’s devilish equivalent, the colonial invader. He is, in fact, a human being, and the principal strangeness about him is his ability to demonstrate his human tendency to contradiction and paradox in a strikingly physical way.

Mr Pye on his way to Sark

From the moment he arrives on the island Mr Pye’s difference from the islanders is marked. Short, plump, urbane and urban, with glasses and a ‘sharp nose, not unlike the beak of a bird’ (p. 10), his appearance and comportment are identified at once by the ticket-sellers and ferry operators as having little resemblance to those of the locals, or indeed to most incomers or tourists. At the same time, he is very ordinary and unthreatening. His paunch accentuates his tendency to self-indulgence – overeating and perhaps inertia – while his smallness underscores his inability to do real harm, despite the fact that small, plump men have disrupted continents (think of Napoleon or Hitler, both of them posers of genuine historical threats to the Channel Islands; Sark is littered with Napoleonic cannons left over from the wars between Britain and France in the early nineteenth century, and Mr Pye sits on one of them late in the book to contemplate his relationship with the islanders). Mr Pye doesn’t look at all dangerous, and it’s only gradually that the Sarkese begin to convince themselves that he represents a danger to them, an invasive threat to their very existence, thanks both to his horns and his angelic-but-alien wings.

What is it, though, that marks out Mr Pye as different when he buys his ferry ticket at the start of the novel, well before anything supernatural attaches itself to him? His urbanity and urbaneness are surely not enough. Nor indeed are his comportment, speech or appearance, since we later learn that there are plenty of other English settlers on the island, as well as characters of equal eccentricity: from the young woman Tintagieu, who claims to have a dolly at home which must be put to bed whenever she doesn’t wish to accept an assignation, to Mrs Rice, who is ‘almost square’ and wears a bizarre straw hat (p. 99). The one thing that marks out Mr Pye as different at this point, it seems to me, is his unabashed campness. Mr Pye shows every sign of being gay, and would have been read as such, I think, by many of Peake’s readers when the book came out. His addiction to fruit-drops makes him ‘the Fruit Drop’ – that’s Tintagieu’s nickname for him – and ‘fruit’ in the 1950s, as now, was a term that could signify gayness. The missionary’s scrupulous care over his own appearance (he has ‘beautifully manicured’ hands, p. 8), his extravagant movements (‘Mr Pye […] joined his hands together beneath his chin, […] stood upon the tips of his toes, and breathed deeply’, p. 11), and his serene indifference to the sexual attractions of the most erotically charged woman on the island, Tintagieu – even when she walks past him naked at dead of night (p. 123ff.) – seem to confirm the assumption. He has a powerful effect on sailors, such as the ‘huge, sour-visaged, red-necked, sea-booted mariner’ of whom he makes a convert (pp. 76-77). He calls his God not father but ‘Pal’, the word a gay man of the 40s or 50s might have used for a lover (and a married woman on Sark, Dorothy La Trobe Bateman, is said to have called her own lover Trevor Blakemore her ‘Great Pal’ in a rather open euphemism).[5] Peake could scarcely have clustered together more signs of Mr Pye’s sexuality without endowing him with a partner of his own.[6]

Tintagieu (r) and the painter Thorpe (l)

One might speculate, in fact, that Tintagieu’s presence on Peake’s Sark is partly designed to draw attention to Mr Pye’s queer alterity. She is said to have slept with so many ‘visitors, residents and locals’ that she has become something of an ‘institution’, her diary so packed with assignations ‘that her inability to accept more than a fraction of the innumerable invitations that were tendered her […] had the paradoxical effect of giving her a reputation for a mad kind of chastity, a crazy, indecipherable coyness, among those who had but recently arrived’ (p. 109). After Mr Pye’s famous picnic, discussed in my previous post, she moves in with him and his landlady Miss Dredger, and eventually becomes his closest friend, the flamboyantly physical counterweight to his inordinate spirituality. There is never any question that he will sleep with her after she moves in; his love for her, as for Miss Dredger, is entirely ‘sexless’ (p. 52). But Tintagieu too, as we’ve seen, has a reputation for a strange kind of sexlessness or ‘chastity’. Like him she is plump, which suggests a shared overindulgence of their sensual appetites; like him she is repeatedly described as ‘innocent’, even childish (as I said earlier, she mentions her ‘dolly’ whenever she wishes to dodge a date she does not want, while Mr Pye’s figure resembles that of a toddler); and neither her innocence nor her chastity is presented as being in any way at odds with her sexual freedom. Both Mr Pye’s sexlessness and Tintagieu’s chastity might be taken to signify their freedom from the heteronormative rules that govern other islanders; a freedom they offer freely to the people of Sark, each in their own distinctive manner.

Mr Pye (l) and Miss George (r)

One of the ways of extending love practised by Mr Pye is to bring the people of Sark together in unexpected combinations. In the first part of the novel the missionary makes friends with two single women, Miss Dredger and Miss George, and invites them to share his home in the name of love (despite the fact that the home in question is in fact Miss Dredger’s). There are numerous indications that both women are queer, especially Miss Dredger, who presents as conventionally masculine, with her cigarettes, her angular appearance, and her quasi-military contempt for any sign of weakness or lack of backbone. Both women hate each other when Mr Pye first meets them, a situation which Miss Dredger describes to Miss George as a ‘long divorce’ (p. 66), but they are quickly reconciled under his paternalistic tutelage. Indeed they take part in a kind of vicarious courtship, which begins when Miss Dredger begins to dream, under Mr Pye’s influence (he has ‘laced her chicken soup with a strong sedative’), of ‘floating over Tunbridge Wells hand-in-hand with Miss George’ (p. 43). The courtship reaches a crescendo when the missionary kisses Miss George’s fingers and tells her the ‘romantic story’ of the stones on the rings she wears (p. 79), then comments on her loneliness and invites her to start ‘a new life of love and endeavour’ (p. 80) with Miss Dredger in her boarding house. After this the two women form a family of choice with Mr Pye, working together to prepare his legendary picnic at Derrible Bay and in the process becoming ‘integrate’, as he calls them – ‘magnificently integrate’ (p. 83) or involved.[7] Again there is nothing sexual about their integration, but the language of marriage used to describe it affirms its opposition to heteronormativity, its resistance to 1950s social and sexual conventions.

Not that sexual conventions are much cherished by the heterosexual inhabitants of the island. Tintagieu’s sexual profligacy necessarily reflects the profligacy of the Sarkese men, and Mr Pye notes less than half way through the novel that the islanders are perfectly capable of being as promiscuous as she is without admitting it. Having made a careful study of their collective habits, he informs them at the picnic, he has ‘watched, in microcosm, the “world and his wife” go by – and sometimes I have seen, unless I am mistaken, the world go by with someone else’s wife’ (pp. 103-4). Tintagieu’s behaviour is considered outrageous, but is as integral to island life as the distinctive rock from which she takes her name. Meanwhile, Mr Pye’s encouragement of universal love in place of competition or mutual hostility is merely a rigorous application of a principle supposedly central to the islanders’ religious convictions, but which is breached more often than it is observed by most of Sark’s inhabitants. Both Tintagieu and Mr Pye openly advocate things that are either hypocritically denied while being widely practised or hypocritically advocated without being practised at all. The behaviour of these two unconventional figures is in each case an open affirmation of Donne’s insistence that ‘no man is an island’, since everyone shares a more or less equal collection of follies and foibles, each of which requires the participation of their fellow human beings serving either as collaborators or as countervailing foils against which to measure it. Mr Pye’s mission, as he sees it, is to make the islanders understand the ties that bind them – their common humanity and the mutual affection this should encourage. He seeks, in fact, to bring them ‘true joy’ by binding them into the ‘cosmos of love’ (p. 43). But he ends by uniting them against himself as a threatening intruder, his difference from the islanders reinforced by a relapse on their part – partly inspired by Mr Pye’s own internalised theology, as represented by his unruly wings and horns – into the crudest kind of binarism, whereby the world is neatly divided into separate moral units, good and evil, with everyone naturally assuming that they themselves belong in the former category. He seeks to bring love to the island, and instead unites it in a collective outbreak of hate, the homophobic lynching of Mr Pye.

Jane Norwich, Inspired by Sark, showing linocut by Alfred Waldron, ‘Actress’

It’s tempting to see this situation as a response to Peake’s experiences with the Sark Art Group in the 1930s. Jane Norwich’s book about the Group, Inspired by Sark, makes it clear how distinctive the artist’s colony must have seemed when its first representatives arrived on the island in 1933. When the newly-built and innovative Gallery building was opened in August of that year, the Guernsey Press announced dramatically that ‘Modernity has come to Sark’, an occasion of note at a time when the island still operated the last feudal system in the British Isles (Inspired by Sark, p. 27). The island’s feudal lord, the Dame of Sark, encouraged the enterprise, but was careful to insist that the building’s design was intended ‘to interfere as little as possible with Sark’s atmosphere of antiquity’ (p. 25). The young artists who displayed their work in the Gallery were not all of them experimental modernists, but they drew suspicion nonetheless from the more traditional Sarkese painters. The elderly landscape artist William Toplis, for instance, ‘frankly admitted that he did not like the modern school’, lumping modernists and the Sark Art Group together in a homogeneous unit – though he was happy to display his paintings alongside theirs when invited to do so (p. 28). Reviewers affirmed that the Group’s exhibitions embodied ‘a world where modernity is the very keynote’ (p. 43), a fact that provoked some reviewers to sarcasm: one summed up the second Group exhibition of 1934 as composed entirely of ‘modern’ pieces, ‘some ultra-modern, even that which has been described as futuristic; like its parallel in music it has its applauders. Certainly, much of the work is decidedly clever and none could be described as commonplace’ (p. 45, my emphasis). The various manifestos for the Group provided by its founders the Drakes, however, emphasized inclusivity rather than cleverness. The prospectus described it as a ‘non-profit-making cooperative’ (p. 16), which suggests an egalitarian Leftist but non-denominational perspective, and the St Ives painter Borlase Smart wrote after the first exhibition at the gallery that ‘The directors do not subscribe to any set theory or school of thought’ (p. 30). Instead, Smart insisted, ‘They are looking for work that has a constructive and integrating significance in modern life’ (p. 30, my emphasis). From the start the Group was more concerned with giving practical support to artists than with telling them what to make or how to make it, and with drawing in the local community rather than with re-educating them; and this emphasis on egalitarian practice as against theory, on the capacity to ‘integrate’ rather than to attach themselves to a specific method, school or philosophy, also reveals itself in Mr Pye’s religious mission to the island.

Eric and Lisel Drake on Sark

As modern, perhaps, as their paintings was the Sark Group’s attitude to sexuality. This could be described, in Mr Pye’s words about Miss Dredger and Miss George, as ‘magnificently integrate’, with a number of queer people joining the cooperative in the course of its brief existence. These included Ala Story, the Viennese gallery director responsible for getting the Sark Group’s work exhibited in London, who was a Lesbian, and Frank Coombs, the gay artist and architect who helped ensure the Sark Art Gallery building remained standing when he spotted flaws in its construction before the exhibition was due to open in 1933.[8] Most flamboyantly queer of all were the artist Alfred ‘Pip’ Waldron and his partner, Alex Gannon, who joined the Group from Birmingham in 1934. Waldron and Gannon, Norwich tells us, never concealed their status as a couple while on the island, and went on to run the Sark Art Group’s activities, first along with the newly appointed manager, Coombs, then by themselves after Coombs left to work with Story in London in 1935. Eric Drake seems to have cultivated a deliberate obtuseness as to his fellow Group members’ sexuality; in a letter to Peter Winnington he insisted that he ‘never tried to probe the relationship’ between Waldron and Gannon, and asserted that Coombs ‘fell for’ the island girl who provided the model for Tintagieu (and of course this is quite possible, despite Coombs’s later relationship with the art critic Eardley Knollys).[9] Overall, though, the Group’s attitude to the body was liberal. They swam naked together from Sark’s beaches, and Eric and Lisel liked to sunbathe naked too, to the surprise of the island postman. Peake seems to have been particularly liberal with his body, sending the same love poems (Malcolm Yorke tells us) to several island women at once, and getting found out pretty quickly.[10] He gained a reputation for painting landscapes in the nude, wearing only a sombrero as protection from the sun, and drew widespread attention with his Bohemian clothes, long hair and piratical earring.[11] Sometimes he wore a cape, like the artist Augustus John or Bela Lugosi’s Dracula. The same habit was later adopted by Mr Pye to conceal the growth of his wings (p. 172), and Mr Pye also took on Peake’s buccaneering aesthetic, donning a bandana ‘in true pirate fashion’ to conceal his horns (p. 205). It’s intriguing to note how Peake’s youthful fashion choices get associated in Mr Pye with the need for camouflage, implying the missionary’s involvement in a running conflict with the islanders’ proneness to suspicion of strangeness and strangers, which necessitates the strategic use of camouflage to protect its ‘commandos’ (Mr Pye’s rather unexpected word for his closest followers and friends) (p. 81).

The Sark Art Gallery

At one point in his time with the Sark Art Group, Peake fell in love with one of his fellow artists, the Bostonian Janice Thompson, and took her home to meet his parents – possibly to gain their approval for his engagement to her. Thompson found the meeting ‘uncomfortable and disappointing’, and went back to Boston not long after.[12] Peake returned to Sark with his hair cut short and his earring missing. Later, Thompson recalled her time on Sark as possessing a distinctive ‘climate’ of its own, making it an island of experiment and exploration circled by seas of drab conformity. From her perspective, as described in her poem ‘The Artists’, the Sark experience involved an attempt to open a succession of ‘entrances and escapes’ from all kinds of restriction with the help of ‘many keys’, an Alice in Wonderland-style abandonment of conventional logic in favour of a multi-faceted vision capable of comprehending ‘An instant’s multiplicity’ and of defining ‘with line and curve / The pride of rock, / The baleful earthen face’, as embodied in the Sark landscape.[13] For Thompson, leaving the island meant a retreat into cramped and sexless domestic spaces full of ‘mole faces’ and ‘threadbare hair’:

Having breathed deeply of too keen an air
We journeyed back to family parlors
Of gas-blue flames in suffocating rows.
A hand bewildered, faltering with a cup
To brush away a crumb
As grey, mole-faces peered from threadbare hair,
Not knowing from what climates we have come.[14]

Peake, too, wrote of Sark and its people as following a different drum, making it a place where ‘Life beat another rhythm’ like a heart quickened by desire:

Life beat another rhythm on that island
As old as her own birth.
We were the island people, and the earth
Sea, sky, and love, were Sark, and Sark, the earth
While round us moved the swarming of the sea.[15]

Both poems associate the island with a closeness to the earth – soil, rocks and the body of the planet itself – and with freedom from the suffocating constraints of the ordinary. It’s tempting to see this as a comment as much on the sexual liberation it afforded as on the artistic experiment to which it gave rise – as much on ‘love’ as on the work the artists did there.

Captain Slaughterboard and the Yellow Creature

Peake’s familiarity with the queer culture of the 1930s can be taken for granted, given the fact that he moved in artistic circles in the metropolis. One of his first exhibitions took place at the Black Cat Café in Old Compton Street, London, a well-known meeting place for rent boys and their clients, as Quentin Crisp informs us in his autobiography, The Naked Civil Servant (1968).[16] Crisp himself was a friend of Peake’s, who got to know him at one of the many cafés, eateries and bars Crisp frequented in the Second World War, the Bar-B-Q in Chelsea. It was during the war that Crisp acquired a reputation both for brilliant wit (he has been called the Oscar Wilde of the twentieth century) and for considerable personal courage, since he went on parading the streets of the metropolis in defiance of air raid sirens, flying shrapnel and the disapproval of air wardens. Peake illustrated Crisp’s satirical poem, All This and Bevis Too, in 1943, and later made fine illustrations for the poems of Oscar Wilde, using a Chinese brush his father brought back from Hong Kong. It would hardly be surprising, then, if Peake felt comfortable introducing gay characters into his fiction, and one character in the Gormenghast books, Doctor Prunesquallor, has been regularly read as queer. A sheet of drawings from the war years has been found recently which seems to show a love affair between an older and a younger male centaur, riffing on Peake’s depiction of centaurs in his poetry and elsewhere as epitomes of the exuberant male body. Most strikingly of all, his children’s story Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor (1939) depicts the evolution of a queer relationship between the titular pirate and a Yellow Creature he finds on a tropical island, whose rock formations mimic the distinctive contours of the Sarkese coastline. After capturing the Yellow Creature with the help of his crew, Captain Slaughterboard gradually loses interest in a pirate’s lifestyle and ends by marooning himself voluntarily with the Creature on the island where he found it, luxuriating in idleness and the Yellow Creature’s cooking. Various commentators have pointed out that the Yellow Creature’s face recalls Peake’s many portraits of his wife, Maeve Gilmore; but its body presents as male, and the pronouns Peake uses for it are either gender neutral (it) or masculine (he/him).[17] In one of the last pictures in the book the Creature seems to be cross-dressing, wearing a skirt while making a meal and smoking a distinctly piratical pipe. Peake is said to have enjoyed dressing up in Maeve’s clothing. The body, male or female, was a thing of beauty, and just as he felt comfortable drawing both male and female figures, so too he seems to have had little difficulty in recognising and accepting the various forms of desire that draw male and female bodies together, in whatever combination happens to answer their present needs. In Captain Slaughterboard Drops Anchor, a tropical version of the Isle of Sark could be read as standing in for a paradise where queer relationships are acknowledged with the same reverence and affection as Peake’s marriage to Maeve.

Alfred Waldron, ‘Tropic’

Besides Crisp, another significant queer presence in Peake’s life was Alfred ‘Pip’ Waldron, his fellow artist in the Sark Art Group. It has been suggested at various times that Mr Pye may have been partly modelled on Waldron: Robjn Cantus speculates as much on his website, Inexpensive Progress (https://inexpensiveprogress.com/4728/alfred-waldron/), but the only evidence he gives is a quotation from Eric Drake, who writes of him that ‘he seemed to live in a world of fantasy that was private to him’.[18] Cantus probably took his speculation from Peter Winnington’s fine biography of Peake, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, which observes that ‘There may be another autobiographical element in Mr Pye’s odd characteristic of sucking his thumb, which recalls Pip Waldron’ (p. 240).[19] Winnington explains this observation in a footnote, where he quotes an unpublished letter from another Sark Group artist, Tony Bridge: ‘[Waldron] used to climb on to Brenda [Streatfield]’s lap (he was very small) and suck his thumb’ (p. 279). Both Winnington and Eric Drake suggest that this habit may have been a result of childhood trauma.[20] Not much more is known about Waldron and his ‘fantasy world’, beyond the fact that he attended the Birmingham Art School, that he and Alex Gannon moved to London after leaving Sark, and that they went on to live in Cheltenham till their deaths. Pip’s linocuts, though, tell us something about his world, and are worth pausing over, given the possible link between Pip and the equally diminutive Mr Pye.

Alfred Waldron, ‘Thou Shalt Not’

For me as for others, the art produced and shown by Waldron while on Sark can be read as a series of striking comments on British sexual politics in the early twentieth century. I saw reproductions of several linocuts by Waldron at the Visitor Centre on the island, and more have been published by Norwich in her book, one of which looks like an open comment on homophobia, as Norwich points out.[21] ‘Thou Shalt Not’ shows a naked man in the foreground raising his arms and shouting furiously at two more naked men, who flee into the shadows. Is he berating them for homoerotic activity, as the biblical title seems to suggest? If so, his gesture of remonstration looks distinctly ironic, since he could be interpreted as displaying his body to them in his fury; indeed, another reading might suggest he is angrily berating the men for their hypocrisy in rejecting the naked male body as a site of same-sex desire. A second linocut, ‘Masque’, shows a woman in a richly patterned dress holding a mask in front of her face with her right hand while looking out of the frame directly at the viewer; her left hand holds a cigarette and rests on a ribbon at her waist. A man and a woman stand in conversation behind her, like an embodiment of heteronormativity. Norwich sees in the woman’s face a resemblance to the Sapphic art director Ala Story, and the picture might be read as a comment on the necessity for Lesbian women to lead a double life – though the woman has no visible partner of any gender. ‘Tropic’ shows a naked young man sprawling backwards under a blazing sun, as if interpreting the tropics of the imagination described by Peake in his short story ‘I Bought a Palm Tree’ – see my previous post – as a state of liberation from sexual judgments and inhibitions of all kinds.[22] ‘Ballet Moon and Cloud’ shows an apparently naked but extravagantly decorated young man holding the hand of a masked female dancer; they are dancing together, not so much as erotic partners as co-performers of femininity. ‘Festoon’ shows two women embracing in a heap of quasi-oriental clothing. Finally, one of Waldron’s most ambitious pictures, another linocut called ‘Husbands and Wives’, shows a group of women and a group of men (with one woman) by a pool, each group totally engrossed in their companions, nobody in either group showing any awareness of the adjacent party; indeed, the thick black trunk of what looks like a palm tree sets a natural barrier between the men and most of the women. Again, the foliage around them looks tropical; did Waldron’s fantasy life on Sark, like Peake’s in ‘I Bought a Palm Tree’, inhabit the tropics? In each case these linocuts may be read as depicting a world that is subject to the rules of heteronormativity, a world where the idea of husbands and wives takes precedence over alternative sexual relationships, even when those alternative relationships dominate the minds of the men and women in question; a world where homoerotic desire is accounted a sin, and where as a result men and women must of necessity be frequently alone if they are to luxuriate in those desires, even in their secret fantasies.

Alfred Waldron, ‘Husbands and Wives’

There is something visionary, it strikes me, about Waldron’s prints. They have a Blakean quality. The shouting man in ‘Thou Shalt Not’, for instance, recalls in his stance one of Blake’s most famous images, ‘Albion Rose’ (1794-1796), sometimes known as ‘The Dance of Albion’ or ‘Glad Day’, which shows a naked young man who stands facing the viewer, his arms and legs spread wide, his face joyful, beams of coloured light radiating from his head and torso. Blake’s print is a thing of glory, as its titles suggest, but the mood of Waldron’s is different. The man seems older, his body more gaunt, it turns away from the viewer as if in shame or anger, and instead of rays of coloured light it is framed in darkness. ‘Tropic’ is much more positive, with its blazing sun and luxuriating male body, taking advantage of solitude to enjoy itself freely; while ‘Husbands and Wives’ and ‘Masque’ seem to contemplate the needful hypocrisy to which the criminalization of queerness gives rise, the men and women in each picture conforming outwardly to heterosexual norms despite the fact that their interests and desires are so obviously at odds with them. Peake’s Mr Pye, like Waldron, is a Blakean visionary. The message he brings to Sark – as he tells the islanders again and again – concerns love for all, based on Donne’s understanding of the connectedness of all people, or on Blake’s of the connectedness of everything in the universe. Could he have taken up Waldron’s mission to make a statement about hypocrisy and small-mindedness to this isolated population? Could the novel, Mr Pye, chart a movement from potential island-wide unity – an embracing of human affection in all its manifestations – to the reinstatement of petty divisions, unfounded hostilities, and specifically homophobic violence? This would invest the hunting of Mr Pye at the end of the book with the disturbing connotations I’ve already touched on. But Quentin Crisp’s biography confirms that homophobic violence was widespread in London between the wars; and the death camps of Nazi Germany represented, among other things, the worst excesses to which such violence could extend.[23] What happens to Peake’s novel, then, if we read it using the queer lens provided by Pip Waldron’s linocuts and Crisp’s life writing?

William Blake, ‘The Dance of Albion’

Waldron’s most ambitious project was an illustrated edition of the Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam, most famously translated by Edward Fitzgerald (the book was never published). The Rubaiyat was represented by Fitzgerald as a manifesto for religious scepticism, with the poet enjoining his lover to forgo bodily restraint in favour of a hedonistic embracing of food, drink and sex while the opportunity presents itself – the old carpe diem theme. In one of the images from Waldron’s sequence, Omar Khayyam 2 (see end of post), four women mourn over the dead body of a young man – who has a wound in his side reminiscent of the wound inflicted on Christ’s crucified body by a soldier’s spear – while in the background women embrace and chase one another while young men stroll by with arms draped across each other’s shoulders. In another, Omar Khayyam 1 (see below), a masked young man and a woman dance surrounded by older spectators. Two of the spectators are naked, the third is clothed. One male spectator reads from a book, his right hand raised in the attitude of a preacher; another turns away from the dancers with his hands joined as if in prayer. These two are grouped together in the left foreground, as if both belong to the same hypocritical religious sect (hypocritical because the preaching spectator is suggestively unclothed and has his attention fixed on the dancers, while the kneeling spectator has positioned himself right in front of the theatrical floodlights, like another performer). On the right side of the picture a person with a scythe (I think a man, though I’m not certain) gazes at the dancers’ performance with what looks like rapt appreciation. He is smiling and touching his chin as if in thought. Is this scythe-person Death, and is s/he pleased that the dancers are acknowledging his/her imminence by seizing the day? Death’s traditional hood is pushed back to expose not only a living human face but a healthy body, very different from the skeletal bodies favoured by Holbein in his series of woodcuts The Dance of Death. In conjunction with the biblical title of Thou Shalt Not – which echoes the opening phrase of the Ten Commandments – Waldron’s Khayyam project looks like a Blakean rejection of Christian sexual puritanism, because such puritanism invites imprecations and aggression against those who practise or advocate sex in its less acceptable forms (hence the young martyr in the foreground of Omar Khayyam 2). It could be read, indeed, as the work of a visionary atheist or agnostic, disgusted by the hypocrisy of latter-day Pharisees, who happily practise sexual infidelity (Mr Pye claims to have seen ‘the world go by with someone else’s wife’) while repudiating any form of illegal sex they claim not to practise.

Alfred Waldron, ‘Omar Khayyam 1’

Crisp’s biography, meanwhile, includes a number of intriguing references to religion. There is the fact that Crisp presents himself in his naïve youth as a self-styled ‘missionary’ for homosexuality, whose flamboyant self-display is designed to make a place in the world – and more particularly in London – for camp gay men. ‘My outlook was so limited’, he explains in his third chapter, ‘that I assumed all deviates were openly despised and rejected’ (p. 33). In response to this perception, he resolved to embark on a career of dramatic protest on behalf of ‘all deviates’, wearing makeup at a time when it was frowned upon even for women to wear it, growing his hair and fingernails long, and cultivating an exaggeratedly ‘feminine’ walk which drew the attention of passers-by more effectively than any words of protest he could utter (pp. 49-50). Such were his means of pursuing his mission, and he concentrated these activities not on the West End or Soho, where they would barely be noticed, but on the world beyond: ‘the rest of England was straightforward missionary country. It was densely populated by aborigines who had never heard of homosexuality and who, when they did, became frightened and angry. I went to work on them’ (p. 33). Later, Crisp tells us he took on a job as commercial artist not so much to earn money as from an ‘evangelical zeal’ to win from the heterosexual world ‘acceptance as a homosexual’ (p. 74). His religion was not Christian – he had ‘withdrawn [his] ambassadors’ from God’s ‘territory’ at the age of fifteen – but involved a generous extension of the key Christian concept of ‘love’, a word, he tells us, ‘about whose meaning there seemed to be some ambiguity’ (p. 119). ‘Often during this period of my life’, he writes,

to the embarrassment of my hearers, I claimed that my whole existence was love. I meant that I was trying never to close my hand against anyone – even the unlovable (in dealing with whom I was having a great deal of practice). I would have placed at anyone’s disposal my meagre resources of money or advice or concern. Sometimes I fancied that all the elements of a golden age of universal well-wishing were already known and would become instantly effective when […] some genius combined them in the right order. I was always delighted with the slightest break-through in this field. (p. 119)

Crisp’s objective, in other words, was to work towards the ushering-in of a new ‘golden age’ in human relationships, when human beings embraced one another regardless of sexuality, gender, appearance, class, and so on. He adds, a little later on, that owing to his extravagant sexual fantasies and enjoyment of auto-eroticism he had always found sexual acts with other people unsatisfactory, and as a consequence ‘had severed the connection between sex and love’ (p. 121). His love resembles Mr Pye’s in its sexlessness, although unlike Mr Pye he was perfectly happy to engage in sex when the opportunity arose.

Quentin Crisp photographed by Angus McBean (1941)

It was around this ‘period’ of Crisp’s life that he collaborated with Mervyn Peake on his pamphlet, All This and Bevin Too (1943), a satirical poem for which Peake drew the pictures.[24] The poem itself offers something of an insight into both men’s state of mind in the middle of the Second World War. It describes the frustrated efforts of a melancholy kangaroo to offer his services to the Zoo, where he finds himself repeatedly rejected as a conscript despite the many notices posted everywhere by the Zoo’s management insisting that kangaroos are urgently wanted. Crisp was rejected by the army on account of his open homosexuality, while for years Peake’s efforts to be taken on by the state-sponsored War Artist’s Commission were frustrated, while his own time as a conscript served only to demonstrate his utter unsuitability for the army, ending in a seemingly inevitable breakdown and discharge. The kangaroo, too, finds his place in the Zoo usurped by a horse, while he himself is trained in the equine art of pulling a cart – only to fail once again to be accepted by the Zoo after completing his training. The story would be a bleak one if it were not for the utopian community of friends who help the kangaroo in his efforts to get suitable employment. A monkey lends him a hat to improve his appearance, a cat helps him fill out an impenetrable employment form, and so many other people and animals support him that he throws them a slap-up feast in gratitude, using all available ration tokens. The feast goes magnificently, despite the fact that again one animal is masquerading as another (the lamb chop is made of horse meat; the war effort, in Crisp’s eyes, is predicated on the need for ersatz substitutes). The kangaroo ends as he started, unemployed and miserable (Crisp tells us he was suicidal after being rejected by the army, since he could see no prospect of employment for the rest of the war). But the sense that he’s still part of a supportive community is reinforced by his final exchange with the poet, presumably Crisp himself, which is recorded with obvious sympathy and enlists both Crisp and the reader in the utopian chosen family that sought to alleviate the kangaroo’s problems throughout the narrative. The golden age may not be imminent in Crisp’s poem, but there are signs of a definite ‘break-through in the field’. Peake’s situation, meanwhile, as an artist who had suffered a breakdown, was not much better than Crisp’s in 1943, though he had in fact found employment as a War Artist thanks to his friendship with the head of the War Artist’s Commission, Kenneth Clark. In his readiness to work alongside Crisp, Peake was part of Crisp’s support group, just as Crisp (who gave Peake wartime employment as an illustrator) was part of Peake’s.

It’s quite possible that Peake knew about Crisp’s ‘mission’ of spreading sexual tolerance and love; after all, Crisp himself acknowledges his delight in talking about himself in cafés and bars like the one in which he met the writer-artist. Not only does Mr Pye’s aim as a missionary who wishes to convert an island to a religion of love resemble Crisp’s, while his theatrical flamboyance echoes that of the controversial London character, but the role of Mr Pye’s own chosen family in supporting him against a hostile environment – Miss Dredger, Miss George (before he alienates her), the painter Thorpe and the girl Tintagieu – recalls that of the kangaroo in All This and Bevin Too. Mr Pye’s religious mission catches resonance, too, from Alfred Waldron’s pictorial campaign against Christian hypocrisy, while his smallness, his difference from the other islanders, and his habit of sucking his thumb align him with Waldron himself. Even Mr Pye’s supposed sexlessness finds a philosophical prop in Crisp’s statement that he had succeeded, by the time Peake met him, in separating sex from love. And Mr Pye’s arrogance – his lust for conquest, as expressed in his desire to convert a self-contained territory into the utopia or golden age of his heart’s desire, or in his insistence that he knows what’s best for Miss George – recalls Crisp’s confession at the end of his autobiography that ‘Power was what I craved most ravenously’, and that he ‘wanted dominion over others in order to redress the balance’; as partial recompense, that is, for the powerlessness to which he had been so often consigned by his ‘deviate’ status (p. 222).

Crisp’s autobiography, for all its occasional recourse to a religious vocabulary, resists the temptation to sum itself up with some sort of moral. ‘I know,’ he writes, ‘that on no account must I point a moral or trace a pattern through my past’; this is a sign of his subscription to the ‘modern manner’ (p. 220); and he adds, ‘I clearly see that my life was only an imprudent dash between the cradle and the tomb across open country and under fire’ (p. 220). Apart from anything else, the person who writes is ‘still changing – still in doubt’ (p. 222), which means that any retrospectively imposed moral or pattern will be necessarily incomplete. Mr Pye, too, invokes religious vocabulary, but ends by rejecting any attempt at a moral conclusion. The protagonist grows wings and horns in response to his good and evil actions – or what he perceives as his good and evil actions; his good actions are not always good, his evil actions in many cases barely worthy of the name. And as the book goes on, the moral associations with each bodily eruption grow steadily less certain. The appearance of Mr Pye’s wings coincides with a new sense of alienation from his God, as he ceases to be able to talk with Him – something he claims to have been able to do throughout his life. As a result, it also brings with it a sense of all-encompassing loneliness, of being cut off not only from the mortal friends to whom he is closest but from the spiritual conversation he formerly cherished, and hence from the evangelical narrative of which he felt himself to be part. In the days before the wings’ appearance, Miss George refused point blank to be made a symbol of Mr Pye’s faith; and her lowering down the chimney could be said to mark the failure of religious symbolism itself, a failure reinforced by the uncertain status of those ‘crisp, forceful little feathers’ on her tormentor’s back. Later Mr Pye himself refuses to become a symbol of his own religion, reluctant to display his wings to the world as a mark of God’s favour for fear of being treated like a circus freak (p. 137). In the process Mr Pye divorces himself from his lifelong mission or narrative or purpose for the very first time. The appearance of his wings, which might have been taken to confirm his saintly identity, instead makes him question that identity, and with it the narrative to which he has always sought to conform. But what is there to replace it, apart from the drab narrative of failure, exile and a lonely death?

Mr Pye in Camouflage

Mr Pye conceals his wings under a voluminous cape (p. 148), and when his horns begin to grow he hides them under a bandana (p. 205), a Basque beret (p. 209), and a Panama hat (p. 220). For a time, at least, he exists in a state of camouflage, his abnormal body hidden away from view, only his increasingly bizarre behaviour offering clues to the mental and physical anguish he is suffering. He closets himself repeatedly, locking himself in his room at Miss Dredger’s house to examine his growing wings, concealing himself in the island prison when the people of Sark turn against him. His closest friend, by the end of the novel, is Tintagieu, who is famous throughout the island as a rebel against the laws of sexual constraint. His closeness to Tintagieu at the end suggests that she somehow understands him, and Tintagieu’s chosen area of expertise suggests that she understands him because she sees his torment as in some way linked to sexual desire. Tintagieu’s body strains at the seams of her tight-fitting dress, just as Mr Pye’s wings and horns strain at the items he uses to bind them: cape, bandana, beret or hat. Tintagieu’s willingness to walk naked along the roads of Sark may even have given Mr Pye the courage, in the end, to bare himself, to display his horns to the islanders at the annual cattle show, come what may; he certainly approves of her nakedness when he sees her walking past his gate in the early morning (‘It is right,’ he tells her, ‘Absolutely right’, p. 123). And it is Tintagieu who seeks to reconcile him, after he bares himself, to her fellow islanders, insisting that his horns are no more threatening than the horns of the nearby cattle (p. 240). They belong to his body, and have no necessary symbolic significance. The Sarkese woman and Mr Pye, in other words, seek at the end against all hope to advance the golden world of tolerance and mutual affection advocated by Crisp, only to be met with the kind of violence Crisp encountered all too often on the streets of London.

There’s a curious moment at the culmination of the novel, as Mr Pye finds himself pursued by a mob of islanders baying for his blood, when the missionary draws a final, sharp distinction between his mysteriously sprouting body and the discourse of Christianity that might be used to explain it. Just as he is about to make his final leap from the precipitous Coupée, the missionary enters a state of unearthly calm. He sits ‘perfectly upright, yet perfectly relaxed’ on the seat of the carriage that carries him, then symbolically detaches himself from his God: ‘As the ground began to dip,’ Peake tells us, ‘he drew forth his soul and tossed it skywards to his maker. “Oh, catch it if you care to,”, he cried, and he beat his wings in an earthless exultation’ (p. 253). The result is that it’s Mr Pye’s body only – his body and mind – that makes the great leap into space from the narrow isthmus that links Great Sark to Little Sark. This implies, perhaps, that the Christian narrative he has cleaved to so far has no place, as yet, for a body or mind like his. He does not, in response, reject the narrative altogether – he tosses his soul, after all, to the being he sees as his maker – but he recognises all the same that Christian theology cannot embrace his kind of difference at this point in its history. It’s noteworthy that he asks if the Great Pal might care to catch his soul, not if he can do so, as one might expect (‘catch me if you can’ being the phrase his last words seem to echo), and caring is, of course, another term for the ‘love’ Mr Pye has preached throughout his time on Sark (it shares the same root as ‘charity’, from Latin caritas, love). Like Quentin Crisp, in other words, Mr Pye seems to understand that the word ‘love’ as used by Christians is not yet capacious enough to include queer folk like himself. The recent controversy over same-sex marriage in the Anglican Church suggests that it still hasn’t found a way to achieve that capaciousness. Until it does, the queer community must find its own way to the ‘earthless exultation’ experienced by the little missionary.

Colin Moss, ‘Camouflaged Cooling-Towers’ (1943)

I’ve mentioned camouflage several times in the course of this post, and I want to end with some thoughts on camouflage in relation to art, and in particular the Sark Art Group. The Group didn’t last long; founded in 1933, all its main members had left the island by 1938, so that when Maeve Gilmore and her husband Peake arrived on Sark for a holiday in the summer of that year, ‘the gallery was closed and Eric Drake and his artists were nowhere to be seen’ (p. 66). During the war, as Norwich tells us, a remarkable number of the Group’s artists went to work with the Camouflage Directorate at Leamington Spa; these included Eric Drake, Pip Waldron, Guy Malet, Leon Underwood and about eight others. It’s satisfying to think of Waldron, with his passion for human masks, providing masks for inanimate objects in support of the Allied cause. The artists’ responsibilities included disguising airfields, storage sites, military vehicles, ships, factories and other industrial locations, as well as playing a major role in preparations for Operation Overlord (the D-Day landings) – making model tanks, among other things, to mislead the German forces. When, a few years after the war, Ralph Thomas filmed a war movie called Appointment with Venus (1951) on Sark – about a daring raid to snatch a prize cow called Venus from the island, under the nose of the occupying Nazis – the artist figure Lionel Fallaize, played by Kenneth More, is recruited to camouflage a cow to serve as stand-in for the bovine protagonist. It’s hard not to see this as a witty reference to the work of the Sark Art Group artists in the Second World War.

Kenneth More camouflaged as an artist in Appointment with Venus (1951), Sark in background

Quentin Crisp, too, contemplated offering his services to the Camouflage Directorate, but concluded that his gifts lay elsewhere: ‘My function was rather to render what was already clear blindingly obvious’ (p. 117). Crisp’s art is his body, which he decorates and parades about the streets in a bid to force the city population to recognise and acknowledge what they have always known: that there are queer people in the world and that they have a place in it, or rather many places, since the highly mobile Crisp became in effect one of the sights of London, like the Tower, the Theatre, the Galleries or Westminster Abbey – though unlike these, capable of being seen almost anywhere. His aesthetic armoury – long nails and hair, fabulous clothes, makeup – is the direct opposite of camouflage. The artist Thorpe in Mr Pye, by contrast, cannot make visible the inward vision he is occasionally vouchsafed; it remains concealed within, and his diatribes against the artistic establishment (it is dominated, he claims, by ‘the amateurs, the Philistines, the racketeers, the Jews, the snarling women and the raging queers to whom Soutine is “ever so pretty” and Rembrandt “ever s-so sweet”’, p. 184) only expose his own prejudices, his acute self-consciousness and inward shame at his own inadequacy, all of which make him stammer. He inveighs against ‘the Jews’ without showing any awareness that Chaïm Soutine – an artist he reverences – was Jewish, and died while hiding from the Nazis in occupied France. He inveighs against ‘snarling women’ in the presence of a woman, Tintagieu. And his comment about ‘raging queers’ overlooks the conspicuous queerness of Mr Pye, to whom he is speaking at the time. On the first occasion Thorpe mentioned Mr Pye to Tintagieu, the young woman had said she could tell him ‘some very queer things’ about the little stranger (p. 73); and the marks of queerness accumulate round him as the narrative goes on.

Derek Jacobi as Mr Pye and Robin McCaffrey as ‘Tanty’ (Tintagieu) in the BBC series ‘Mr Pye’ (1986)

Some of Mr Pye’s ‘queer things’ are apparent from the very beginning, in his talk (‘the gayest quips and sallies’, p. 75) and his extravagant gestures. But when his body begins to manifest its queerness through wings and horns he at once has recourse, as we’ve seen, to the camouflage of clothing. In the end, though, Mr Pye decides to dispense with concealment. He dons garments of Crisp-like conspicuousness at Miss George’s funeral – a cape, a tropical suit (the tropics again!), a ‘lavender scarf of sensuous silk’, and a Panama hat he refuses to doff in respect for the dead (p. 172). He later tells the deputation of islanders who come to complain of his queer behaviour that he and they must be ‘visible’ to one another, adding that ‘If there is anyone here who is afraid to look me in the eyes – let him be gone’ (p. 194). And he finally exposes his horns for all to see in the aptest of places: the island cattle show. The horns themselves have an obvious sexual connotation, which is helpfully pointed up by one of the island boys, who tells a policeman that Mr Pye is nothing less than ‘old Horny Satan’ (p. 241). Ironically, the policemen sent from Guernsey to arrest him for his self-exposure are themselves entrapped by Tintagieu in her cottage, where ‘she had heated their blood and then locked them in’ (p. 242); in other words they are no less ‘Horny’ than the man they came to arrest. Mr Pye’s self-exposure exposes the islanders in all their hypocrisy, outing them, as Thorpe outs himself, as prey to a thousand prejudices, and thus rendering what was already clear, as Crisp puts it, ‘blindingly obvious’. Mr Pye, in other words, moves from confident self-display in his capacity as a missionary, to a desperate use of camouflage to conceal his otherness, to a courageous emergence from his carefully constructed closet.

In the process Mr Pye creates a work of art. His intention when he came to Sark, as he tells the islanders, was ‘upon a small canvas […] to complete a picture to its last brush-stroke’ (p. 198), and he went about his work with ‘meticulous artistry’ (p. 45). But by the end of the book he has become a work of art himself. His wings make him look like a cherub from a Raphael painting; his horns invoke a ‘superb piece of drawing’ accomplished with ‘two sweeps of a Chinese brush – spontaneous, fierce and inevitable’ (p. 225); while his last scene, as he dashes by night to his doom at the Coupée, conjures up images from the most lurid pictures of Gustave Doré or John Martin, or the movies of Fritz Lang and the great James Whale. He has moved, in fact, from the position of the optimistic artists of the Sark Art Group, who brought modernity to the Channel islands in the 1930s, to the position those artists adopted in support of the war effort – experimenting with different kinds of camouflage – and at last to the conspicuous bodily display of that artist-cum-missionary for the golden age of queer liberation, Quentin Crisp. In the process, Mr Pye comes to embody some of the most potent dreams and influences of imaginative artists in the mid-twentieth century. And his embodiment of those dreams and influences arises from the rich, strange web of associations flung out by the little book in which Peake caught him.

I hope that by tracing some of the strands of that strange web I have begun to make a case for its richness.

Alfred Waldron, ‘Omar Khayyam 2’

POSTCRIPT

It’s important to point out, I think, that Thorpe’s anti-Semitic remark about art being ‘in the hands of the Jews’ didn’t go unchallenged when Mr Pye came out in 1953. When Peake wrote to the screenwriter Norman Hudis asking for help in having the book made into a film, Hudis replied that he would do what he could, and that he liked the book, but that there was one thing in it that jarred:

I couldn’t understand why you found it necessary to put into Thorpe’s mouth the conviction that art is “in the hands of the Jews”. Apart from the fact that per se, this is not true, the context in which it is placed leads to an assumption that this would be an evil state of affairs. I am always disturbed to find this kind of statement in a book or story – especially as, in this case, it seems to have been introduced gratuitously. The remark is so casual that, especially in a book like “Mr Pye” – essentially unworldly for me – it stands out as the kind of thing which strengthens any existing prejudice in the reader and plants the horrid seed in minds which may be free of such prejudice.

(Letter of October 8 1953, Peake Archive, British Library)

Hudis makes  his point with admirable tact and firmness, and it’s clearly right; Thorpe’s comments run horribly against the grain of the book’s overall tone, and although I have suggested that they are meant to be taken as evidence of the artist’s rudeness and stupidity, to include them at all was a bad mistake under any circumstances; all the more so given Peake’s own deep admiration of Jewish artists such as Jacob Epstein, Mané Katz and Chaïm Soutine (for which, see my discussion here).

NOTES

[1] Jane Norwich, Inspired by Sark: The Story of the Sark Art Group (Market Harborough: Matador, 2022).

[2] I’ve written about the various echoes in Peake’s poetry, many of them Elizabethan, in my introduction to his Collected Poems (Manchester: Carcanet, 2008), pp. 10-11.

[3] For Peake as an honorary islander, see Stephen Foote’s little book Mervyn Peake: Son of Sark (Guernsey: Blue Ormer Publishing, 2019).

[4] Mervyn Peake, Mr Pye (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1978), p. 254. All quotations are taken from this edition.

[5] See Norwich, Inspired by Sark, pp. 21, 124, 164-5.

[6] The character from whom he derives his name – ‘Mr Pye’ in Agatha Christie’s novel The Moving Finger (1942) – is similarly coded as gay, being described as ‘an extremely ladylike plump little man’ who delights in his collection of Dresden shepherdesses. The Moving Finger, http://detective.gumer.info/anto/christie_25_2.pdf, p. 28.

[7] For a discussion of the ‘family of choice’ or chosen family, see Brian Heaphy, Jeffrey Weeks and Catherine Donovan, ‘Narratives of Care, Love and Commitment: AIDS/HIV and Non-Heterosexual Family Formations’, in Peter Aggleton, Peter Davies and Graham Hart (eds.), Families and Communities Responding to AIDS (London: UCL Press, 1999), pp. 67-82

[8] Ala Story was married to Neville V. O. Story in 1930, but her lifetime partner was Margaret Mallory; for her biography, see Norwich […], and Burcu Dogramaci, ‘Transmetropolitan Refernces in the Metromod Archive: Ala Story in London and New York’, Metromod 19.09.2021, which can be found here: https://metromod.net/2021/09/19/transmetropolitan-references-in-the-metromod-archive-ala-story-in-london-and-new-york/.  Frank Coombs, meanwhile, became the partner of the painter Eardley Knollys (see Norwich, p. 135) on his return to London from Sark.

[9] G. Peter Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies: The Illustrated Biography (Londond and Chester Springs, PA: Peter Owen, 2009), p. 85.

[10] Malcolm Yorke, Mervyn Peake: My Eyes Mint Gold: A Life (London: John Murray, 2000), p. 65.

[11] For the sombrero rumour see Yorke, Mervyn Peake, p. 65.

[12] Norwich, Inspired by Sark, p. 39.

[13] Norwich, Inspired by Sark, p. 40.

[14] Ibid.

[15] Peake, Collected Poems, p. 70.

[16] Strictly speaking the café was called ‘Au Chat Noir’, but Crisp tells us the boys on the game ‘were not putting up with any such nonsense’. The Naked Civil Servant (London etc.: Harper Perennial, 2007), pp. 27-8. For Peake’s exhibition, with two other artists, see G. Peter Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, pp. 71-2.

[17] See Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 130.

[18] Cantus here seems to be quoting Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 85.

[19] See Mr Pye, p. 129: ‘She opened the door quietly, and there he was, curled up like a child, his thumb in his mouth and his sharp nose lying along the pillow’.

[20] Winnington, Mervyn Peake’s Vast Alchemies, p. 85.

[21] Norwich, Inspired by Sark, p. 38.

[22] ‘I Bought a Palm-Tree’ can be found in Peake, Boy in Darkness and Other Stories (London and Chicago: Peter Owen, 2011), pp. 103-109.

[23] See Crisp, The Naked Civil Servant, p. 67ff.

[24] My copy was reprinted by the Mervyn Peake Society in 1978.